JP2022164818A - game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

PROBLEM TO BE SOLVED: To provide a game machine capable of achieving improvement in amusement of games.

SOLUTION: In a slot machine 10, after a bet operation is performed, rotation of each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R is started on the basis of an operation of a start lever 41. Then, by the operation of stop switches 42 to 44, respective reels are stopped and stop symbols corresponding to the result of a lottery can be stopped. In a normal section, a shift lottery from the normal section to an advantageous section is performed on the basis of the result of a game. When in the advantageous section, a shift lottery to an AT mode, in which an advantageous result winning becomes possible due to the occurrence of a pressing order notification, is to be performed. In the shift lottery to the AT mode, if the lottery result is not a win, the advantageous section is finished.

SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 1

COPYRIGHT: (C)2023,JPO&INPIT

Description

The present invention relates to gaming machines.

Pachinko machines, slot machines, and the like are known as types of gaming machines. In these gaming machines, it is known that an internal lottery is held based on the establishment of a predetermined lottery condition, and a privilege is given to the player according to the result of the internal lottery.

Specifically, regarding the slot machine, when the start lever is operated in a situation where medals as game media are betted, an internal lottery is carried out and the reels start to rotate and stop while the reels are rotating. When the switch is operated, the rotation of the reels stops. Then, when the result of stopping the reels corresponds to the result of the internal lottery, a privilege corresponding to the result is given (see Patent Document 1, for example).

JP 2008-295707 A

Here, it is necessary to improve the interest of the game in the above-exemplified gaming machines, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION It is an object of the present invention to provide a game machine capable of improving the interest of a game.

The present invention
a plurality of circular bodies to which a plurality of types of patterns are attached in a circumferential direction;
a display unit that allows visual recognition of a part of the pattern for each of the circular bodies;
a starting operation means for starting the circulation of each of the circulation bodies when operated;
stop operation means for stopping the circulation of each of the circulation bodies when operated;
drive control means for starting the circulation of each of the circulation bodies when the start operation means is operated, and stopping the circulation of the circulation bodies when the stop operation means is operated;
Lottery means for performing a lottery as to whether or not to grant a privilege to a player based on the operation of the starting operation means;
When the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result and the predetermined pattern combination corresponding to the predetermined result stops at an effective position set at a position where the pattern can be visually recognized through the display unit, privilege granting means capable of granting a privilege corresponding to a predetermined result;
with
As a lottery result by the lottery means, a replay result in which a replay that enables the next game to be executed without requiring a new game medium is given as the privilege by the privilege granting means, and a predetermined number of games are played by the privilege granting means. A gaming machine provided with at least a payout result in which the payout of game media is given as the privilege,
As game states, a normal game state and a first specific game state which is likely to be more advantageous to the player than the normal game state are provided,
As a state included in the first specific game state, a second specific game state that is more likely to be advantageous to the player than other states in the first specific game state is set,
A first transition lottery means for executing a first transition lottery for determining whether or not to transition to the first specific game state in the normal game state;
Based on the fact that the lottery result of the first transition lottery by the first transition lottery means is the first transition result corresponding to the transition to the first specific game state, the second to shift to the first specific game state 1 specific transition means;
A second transition lottery means for executing a second transition lottery for determining whether to transition to the second specific game state;
Based on the fact that the lottery result of the second transition lottery by the second transition lottery means is the second transition result corresponding to the transition to the second specific game state, the second transition to the second specific game state 2 specific transition means;
with
When the result of the second transition lottery by the second transition lottery means is not the second transition result, a specific end means for terminating the first specific game state;
characterized by comprising

According to the present invention, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

1 is a front view of a slot machine in one embodiment; FIG. 1 is a perspective view of a slot machine showing a state in which a front door is closed; FIG. 1 is a perspective view of a slot machine showing a state in which a front door is opened; FIG. It is a rear view of a front door. It is a front view of a housing|casing. It is a figure which shows the pattern arrangement|sequence of each reel. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between a pattern that can be visually recognized through a display window and an effective line; FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between a pattern that can be visually recognized through a display window and an effective line; FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the winning mode and the privilege to be given; FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the winning mode and the privilege to be given; FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the winning mode and the privilege to be given; 3 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of a main controller; FIG. 2 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of a display control device; FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interrupt processing by a main control unit. 4 is a flowchart showing normal processing by a main controller; It is a flow chart which shows lottery processing. It is a figure which shows an example of the lottery table for normal game states. 4 is a flowchart showing reel control processing; It is an explanatory view showing the relationship between the order of operation of the stop switch and the winning mode to be established. FIG. 5 is an explanatory diagram for explaining reel stop control; 4 is a flowchart showing RT state processing; It is a figure which shows an example of the lottery table for 1st RT states. It is an explanatory view showing the relationship between the order of operation of the stop switch and the winning mode to be established. It is a figure which shows an example of the lottery table for 2nd RT states. It is a figure which shows an example of the lottery table for 3rd RT states. FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram showing an overview of each state; 10 is a flowchart showing bonus state processing; It is an explanatory view showing the relationship between the order of operation of the stop switch and the winning mode to be established. It is a figure which shows an example of the lottery table for BB states. FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram showing a transition relationship of each state; FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram showing an overview of display modes; It is a flow chart which shows lottery result correspondence processing. It is a flow chart which shows advantageous section transition lottery processing. FIG. 11 is a flow chart showing a first special winning combination process; FIG. FIG. 11 is a flow chart showing a second special combination process; FIG. It is a flow chart which shows processing for addition information. 13 is a flow chart showing a third special combination process; 4 is a flow chart showing processing for a specialized zone; FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining main results of a lottery related to an instruction function and setting differences between winning probabilities; It is a figure which shows an example of an advantageous area transition lottery table and an AT mode transition lottery table. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of a portent game number table; It is a figure which shows an example of an addition lottery table and an addition game number lottery table. FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining the relationship between the number of remaining games in the actual advantageous section and the number of remaining games on the display; It is a figure which shows an example of a back-up lottery table. It is a figure which shows an example of an addition alerting|reporting timing table. It is a flowchart which shows the process for mode change alerting|reporting. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing an overview of the pressing order notification effect performed on the auxiliary display section; It is a flow chart which shows pushing process. It is a flowchart which shows a prize-winning result corresponding process. FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing game number management processing; FIG. 9 is a flowchart showing end determination processing; It is a figure for demonstrating the outline|summary of an instruction|indication monitor and an area indicator. It is a flow chart which shows section display 1st processing. It is a flow chart which shows section display 2nd processing. FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing remaining game number management processing; FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing remaining number management processing; FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining the relationship between the start game and end game of the advantageous section and the display of the section indicator; 10 is a flowchart showing effect setting processing by a sub-side display control device; FIG. 11 is a flow chart showing a betting effect setting process; FIG. It is a flow chart which shows a production|presentation setting process at the time of a start. 10 is a flow chart showing a process for notification of pressing order. It is a flowchart which shows the setting process of an additional effect. It is a flow chart which shows the effect setting process at the time of each stop operation. It is a flow chart which shows the effect setting process at the time of all stop. 10 is a flowchart showing a bonus effect setting process; FIG. 11 is a flow chart showing processing for notification of a transition opportunity. FIG. It is a flowchart which shows a continuous production|presentation setting process. It is a figure which shows the relationship between an alerting|reporting timing and an additional effect. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of display effect by an auxiliary display unit; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of display effect by an auxiliary display unit; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of display effect by an auxiliary display unit; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of display effect by an auxiliary display unit; It is an explanatory view for explaining an example of continuous production. It is a figure which shows an example of the AT mode transition lottery table in each RT state. It is a figure which shows an example of the lottery table for 4th RT states. FIG. 11 is a flowchart showing a fixed RT game number setting process; FIG. FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing RT transition processing; FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the alerting|reporting process for RT transition. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of display effect by an auxiliary display unit; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of display effect by an auxiliary display unit; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of display effect by an auxiliary display unit; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of display effect by an auxiliary display unit; It is a figure which shows the relationship between AT mode transition lottery and RT state. It is a figure which shows the relationship between AT mode transition lottery and RT state. It is a figure which shows the relationship between AT mode transition lottery and RT state. It is a flow chart which shows processing at the time of advantageous section transition winning. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st process at the time of AT non-winning. It is a flowchart which shows a second process when AT is not won. It is a flowchart which shows the 3rd process at the time of AT non-winning. It is a figure which shows the relationship between an advantageous area transition lottery and an AT mode transition lottery. 10 is a flowchart showing RT transition processing in Modification 1. FIG. In Modified Example 2, (a) is a flowchart showing game number addition processing, and (b) is a flowchart showing RT transition processing. In the modification 3, (a) is a diagram showing the setting difference of the winning probability of the transition replay, and (b) is a diagram showing the setting difference of the occurrence rate of the push order notification when the transition replay is won. In Modified Example 4, (a) is a diagram showing an example of a display effect by the auxiliary display section, and (b) is a diagram showing the relationship between the transition timing to the fourth RT state and the number of AT mode games. 14 is a flow chart showing processing for notification of post-loading in Modified Example 5. FIG. FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing RT transition processing; FIG. It is a flow chart which shows pushing process. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of a freeze timing table; FIG. It is a flow chart which shows processing for freezing. FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining an outline of a freeze effect; FIG. FIG. 21 is an explanatory diagram showing a transition relationship between states in modification 6; It is a figure which shows an example of the lottery table for 3rd RT states. FIG. 11 is a flow chart showing a second special combination process; FIG. It is a flowchart which shows a prize-winning result corresponding process. It is a figure which shows the relationship between AT mode transition lottery and RT state. FIG. 21 is a diagram showing an example of an AT mode transition lottery table in each RT state in modification 7; FIG. 17 is a diagram showing an example of an AT mode transition lottery table in each RT state in modification 8; 29 is a flow chart showing a part of the first special combination process and the advantageous zone transition winning process in Modification 9. FIG. FIG. 22 is a diagram showing an example of an AT mode transition lottery table in each RT state in modification 10; It is a figure which shows an example of the AT mode transition lottery table in each RT state. It is a figure which shows an example of the AT mode transition lottery table in each RT state. In Modified Example 11, (a) is a flowchart showing part of the first special winning process, and (b) is a diagram for explaining the relationship between the presence or absence of the AT mode first lottery in the RT state. FIG. 17 is a diagram showing an example of an AT mode transition lottery table in each RT state in modification 12; 29 is a flowchart showing advantageous section transition lottery processing in Modification 13. FIG. It is a flow chart which shows section display 1st processing. (a) is a flowchart showing second processing when AT is not won, and (b) is a diagram for explaining the relationship between the start game and end game of an advantageous section and the display of the section indicator. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing a transition relationship between states in the second embodiment; 4 is a flowchart showing RT state processing; It is a figure which shows an example of the lottery table for 4th RT states. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of a lottery table for the fourth RT state in modification 1; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing a transition relationship between states in modification 2; (a) is a diagram showing an example of a 4RT state lottery table, and (b) is a diagram for explaining a route when the AT mode is started from the 4th RT state. It is a flow chart which shows pushing process. FIG. 20 is a diagram showing an example of a lottery table for the fourth RT state in modification 3; FIG. 21 is a diagram showing an example of a lottery table for the fourth RT state in modification 4; In the third embodiment, (a) is a flow chart showing processing when winning an advantageous section transition, and (b) is a diagram showing the structure of a RAM in a main control device. FIG. 11 is a flow chart showing a first special winning combination process; FIG. FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining the relationship between the start game and end game of the advantageous section and the display of the section indicator; 10 is a flow chart showing a first special combination process in Modification 1. FIG. It is a figure which shows an example of an AT mode transition lottery table. 14 is a flow chart showing a first special combination process in Modification 2. FIG.

<First embodiment>
An embodiment in which the present invention is applied to a reel-type game machine, which is a type of game machine, specifically a slot machine, will be described in detail below with reference to the drawings. 1 is a front view of the slot machine 10, FIG. 2 is a perspective view of the slot machine 10 with the front door 12 closed, FIG. 3 is a perspective view of the slot machine 10 with the front door 12 open, and FIG. 5 is a front view of the housing 11. FIG.

As shown in FIGS. 1 to 5, the slot machine 10 has a housing 11 forming its outer shell. The housing 11 is formed in the shape of a box with an open front as a whole, and is attached to a so-called island facility by nailing or the like when it is installed in a game hall.

A front door 12 is attached to the front side of the housing 11 so that it can be opened and closed. That is, the housing 11 is provided with a pair of upper and lower support shafts 13a and 13b on the left side as viewed from the front, and the front door 12 is provided with bearings 14a at positions corresponding to the support shafts 13a and 13b. , 14b are provided. With the spindles 13a and 13b inserted into the bearings 14a and 14b, the front door 12 rotates with respect to the housing 11 about the opening/closing axis extending vertically connecting the spindles 13a and 13b. It is movably supported, and the front open side of the housing 11 can be opened or closed by turning the front door 12 . Further, the front door 12 is kept in a locked state by a locking device 20 provided on the back side thereof so that it cannot be opened. A key cylinder 21 integrated with a locking device 20 is provided on the upper right end side of the front door 12, and the locked state is released by a predetermined key operation on the key cylinder 21.例文帳に追加

A game panel 25 is provided near the upper center of the front door 12 to inform the player of the game state. Three vertical display windows 26L, 26M and 26R are formed side by side on the game panel 25, and the inside of the slot machine 10 can be visually recognized through the display windows 26L, 26M and 26R. The display windows 26L, 26M, and 26R may be combined into one and used as a common display window.

As shown in FIG. 3, the inside of the housing 11 is divided into upper and lower parts by a partition plate 30. Above the partition plate 30, a reel unit 31 constituting variable display means is attached. The reel unit 31 includes a left reel 32L, a middle reel 32M, and a right reel 32R, each of which is cylindrical (annular). Each of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is rotatably supported such that the center axis thereof coincides with the rotation axis of the reel. The rotation axes of the respective reels 32L, 32M, 32R are arranged on the same axis extending substantially horizontally, and the respective reels 32L, 32M, 32R correspond to the respective display windows 26L, 26M, 26R one-to-one. . Therefore, part of the surface of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is visible through the corresponding display windows 26L, 26M, 26R. Further, when the reels 32L, 32M, 32R rotate forward, the surfaces of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are displayed through the respective display windows 26L, 26M, 26R as if they were moving from top to bottom.

Here, the configuration of the reel unit 31 will be briefly described.

Each of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is connected to a stepping motor, and the reels 32L, 32M, 32R can be driven to rotate individually by driving the stepping motor. . The stepping motor is set to make one rotation by applying a drive signal of 504 pulses (hereinafter also referred to as an excitation pulse), for example. controlled. Also, in the reel unit 31, a reel index sensor for detecting that the reel has made one rotation is installed on each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. The reel index sensor outputs a detection signal to the main controller 101, which will be described later, each time it detects that the reel has made one rotation. Therefore, main controller 101 adjusts the angular positions of reels 32L, 32M, and 32R every rotation based on the detection signal from the reel index sensor and the number of excitation pulses output until the detection signal is input. It can be checked and corrected.

A plurality of patterns as identification information are drawn on the outer peripheral surface of each of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R in the long side direction (circling direction). More specifically, 21 patterns are drawn at regular intervals. Therefore, 24 pulses (=504 pulses/21 symbols) of excitation pulses are required to switch a pattern at a predetermined position to the next pattern. Further, the main controller 101 recognizes the symbols that are visible from the display windows 26L, 26M, and 26R based on the number of excitation pulses output after the detection signal of the reel index sensor is input, Control can be performed to stop a predetermined pattern at a position visible from 26L, 26M, and 26R.

Next, the symbols drawn on each reel 32L, 32M, 32R will be described.

FIG. 6 shows the pattern arrangement of the left reel 32L, the middle reel 32M, and the right reel 32R. As shown in the figure, 21 symbols are arranged in a line on each reel 32L, 32M, 32R. Numbers 0 to 20 are assigned to the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, respectively. , and are not actually attached to the reels 32L, 32M, 32R. However, the numbers will be used in the following description.

The symbols include a “red bell” symbol (for example, the 7th on the left reel 32L), a “white bell” symbol (for example, the 20th on the left reel 32L), and a “first replay” symbol (for example, the 19th on the left reel 32L). 3rd), “second replay” symbol (e.g., 6th on left reel 32L), “red 7” symbol (e.g., 10th on left reel 32L), “watermelon” symbol (e.g., 8th on left reel 32L) , “Cherry” symbol (eg, 4th on left reel 32L), “Black BAR” symbol (eg, 18th on left reel 32L), “White BAR” symbol (eg, 17th on left reel 32L), “LUCKY There are 11 types of symbols (for example, the 5th on the left reel 32L) and "young man" symbols (for example, the 0th on the left reel 32L). Then, as shown in FIG. 6, the numbers and arrangement orders of various symbols are completely different in each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R.

Each of the display windows 26L, 26M, 26R is formed so that three of the 21 symbols attached to the corresponding reel are visible as a whole. Therefore, when all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are stopped, 3×3=9 symbols are visible through the display windows 26L, 26M, 26R.

In the slot machine 10, the game result of each game is reported using a combination of three symbols, one symbol for each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, among the visible symbols. Since 3×3=9 symbols are visible as described above, as a combination of these three symbols, for example, as shown in FIG. A combination of symbols stopping on the upper line L1, a combination of symbols stopping on the middle line L2 connecting the middle symbols of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, and a combination of symbols stopping on the middle line L2 connecting the lower symbols of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. There is a combination of symbols that stop on the bottom line L3. In addition, combinations of symbols stopped on the right downward line L4 connecting the upper symbol of the left reel 32L, the middle symbol of the middle reel 32M and the lower symbol of the right reel 32R, the lower symbol of the left reel 32L and the middle symbol of the middle reel 32M. There is a combination of each symbol that stops on a right rising line L5 connecting the upper symbols of the right reel 32R. In addition, there is also a combination of symbols that stop on a bending line L6 connecting the upper symbol of the left reel 32L, the middle symbol of the middle reel 32M, and the middle symbol of the right reel 32R. The lines L1 to L5 are lines that form a straight line when the respective patterns are arranged, and the bending line L6 is a line in which the patterns are bent in the middle when the respective patterns are arranged. Note that there are combinations of symbols other than the bending line L6 that stop on the line where the bending occurs, but the explanation is omitted here.

Among these lines L1 to L6, a line that is activated by the number of bets of medals and a line that is not activated are set. When a prize is established, a privilege of paying out a predetermined number of medals, which are game media, is given, or a privilege of shifting the game state is given. On the other hand, if the symbols are stopped in a predetermined combination on the line that is not activated, winning is not established and the privilege is not given.

In the slot machine 10, as shown in FIG. 8(a), only the lower right line L4 is the active line, and as shown in FIG. 8(b), two lower lines L3 and lower right line L4 There is a case where the combined line is the valid line and a case where only the bend line L6 is the valid line as shown in FIG. 8(c). More specifically, when three medals are betted and the game is started, only the lower right line L4 is the active line, and when two medals are betted and the game is started, the lower line is the active line. The line L3 and the downward-sloping line L4 are set as valid lines. Also, when one medal is bet and the game is started, only the bent line L6 is set as the effective line. The three combined lines of the upper line L1, the middle line L2, and the upward right line L5 are never regarded as valid lines. In the following, a game that starts with 3 medals bet is a 3-bet game, a game that starts with 2 medals bet is a 2-bet game, and a game that starts with 1 medal is bet. Also known as a one-bet game.

9 to 11 are diagrams showing the correspondence between winning symbol combinations and benefits provided when winning.

As the small winning combination for which medals are paid out, there are the 1st small winning combination to the 41st small winning combination.

The "red bell" or "white bell" pattern on the left reel 32L, the "red bell" pattern on the middle reel 32M, and the "red bell" or "white bell" pattern on the right reel 32R are on the effective line. When it stops, it becomes the 1st minor winning combination. When the first minor win is established, 9 medals are paid out in the 3-bet game, and 15 medals are paid out in the 2-bet game.

The 2nd minor winning prize to the 26th minor winning prize have different winning symbol combinations. "White BAR" pattern, "Red 7" pattern, "Cherry" pattern, "White Bell" pattern or "LUCKY" pattern, right reel 32R "White BAR" pattern, "Youth" pattern, "White Bell" pattern, A "red 7" symbol or a "second replay" symbol stops on the upper line L1, that is, the "bell" symbol of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R stops on the upper line L1. For example, the "red bell" symbol or "white bell" symbol on the left reel 32L stops at the upper stage, the "cherry" symbol on the middle reel 32M stops at the middle stage, and the "white BAR" symbol on the right reel 32R stops at the lower stage. If you do, you will win the 8th minor role. As shown in FIG. 6, the middle reel 32M has a "cherry" symbol (No. 11) and a "red bell" symbol at a position adjacent to the upstream side (No. 12), and the right reel 32R has: A "red bell" design is arranged at a position (20th) separated by one design upstream from the "white BAR" design (18th). Therefore, when the eighth minor win is established on the right-downward line L4, the "red bell" symbol or "white bell" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "red bell" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the right The "red bell" symbol on the reel 32R is stopped on the upper line L1. When the 2nd minor winning combination to the 26th minor winning combination are established, 3 medals are paid out in the 3-bet game, and 14 medals are paid out in the 2-bet game.

The 27th minor combination is a combination in which whether or not a prize is won is determined by the stop symbol on the left reel 32L as a predetermined reel among the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. Specifically, "Cherry" on the left reel 32L. The 27th minor winning prize is established when the symbol stops at the upper stage or the lower stage. In this case, the stop symbols on the middle reel 32M and the right reel 32R do not affect the winning determination. In other words, regardless of the stopped symbols on the middle reel 32M and the right reel 32R, the "cherry" symbol on the left reel 32L is up or stopped. By stopping, the 27th minor winning combination is established. When the 27th minor win is established, 3 medals are paid out in the 3-bet game, and 15 medals are paid out in the 2-bet game.

The 28th minor winning combination is a winning mode in which the "cherry" symbols on the left reel 32L stop at the upper or lower stage, and the "cherry" symbols stop together on the lower right line L4. More specifically, "cherry" symbols or "second replay" symbols on the left reel 32L, "red bell" symbols, "white bell" symbols or "cherry" symbols on the middle reel 32M, "cherry" symbols on the right reel 32R, When the "first replay" symbol or the "second replay" symbol stops, the 28th minor winning combination is won. When the 28th minor win is established, 3 medals are paid out in the 3-bet game, and 14 medals are paid out in the 2-bet game.

As a supplementary explanation of the relationship between the 27th small winning combination and the 28th small winning combination, when the "cherry" symbol or "second replay" symbol on the left reel 32L stops, regardless of the stopped symbols on the middle reel 32M and the right reel 32R, Although the 27th minor winning combination is established, the 28th minor winning combination may be established instead of the 27th minor winning combination depending on the stop symbols on the middle reel 32M and the right reel 32R. That is, although the winning mode of winning the 27th minor role includes the winning mode of winning the 28th minor role, the 27th minor role winning and the 28th minor role winning are clearly distinguished and determined. is done.

The 29th minor winning combination is a winning mode in which a "watermelon" symbol on the left reel 32L, a "watermelon" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and a "watermelon" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the activated line. In other words, when the downward-sloping line L4 is the effective line, the 29th minor winning combination is established by stopping all the "watermelon" symbols downward-sloping. When the 29th minor win is established, 5 medals are paid out in the 3-bet game, and 14 medals are paid out in the 2-bet game.

The 30th minor winning combination is a winning mode in which the left reel 32L "watermelon" symbol, the middle reel 32M "watermelon" symbol, and the right reel 32R "watermelon" symbol stop on the upper line L1. More specifically, when the "watermelon" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "red bell" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "red bell" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the activated line, the 30th small Awarded for the role. When the 30th minor win is established, 5 medals are paid out in the 3-bet game, and 14 medals are paid out in the 2-bet game.

"Black BAR" symbol, "young man" symbol, "watermelon" symbol, "first replay" on the left reel 32L, "red bell" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and "red bell" symbol or "white" symbol on the right reel 32R. When the "bell" symbol and stop on the active line, the 31st minor winning combination is won. When the 31st minor win is established, 9 medals are paid out in the 3-bet game, and 15 medals are paid out in the 2-bet game.

For the 32nd to 35th minor wins, 3 medals are paid out in the 3-bet game, and 14 medals are paid out in the 2-bet game.

The 36th minor winning prize is obtained when the player operates the stop switches 42 to 44 aiming at the "watermelon" symbols on the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, for example, the left reel 32L and the middle reel 32M, or the left reel 32L. , the "watermelon" symbol on the right reel 32R stops on the activated line, while the "watermelon" symbol on the remaining reels does not stop on the activated line. When the 36th minor win is established, 3 medals are paid out in the 3-bet game, and 15 medals are paid out in the 2-bet game.

A "red bell" or "white bell" symbol on the left reel 32L, a "black BAR" symbol, a "watermelon" symbol, or a "cherry" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and a "red bell" symbol or "white" symbol on the right reel 32R. If the "bell" symbol and the "young man" symbol stop on the active line, the 37th small winning combination is won. As shown in FIG. 6, on the left reel 32L, a "red bell" symbol (No. 7) and a "second replay" symbol are arranged at a downstream adjacent position (No. 6). "Bell" symbols (3rd, 12th, 15th, 20th) and "1st replay" symbols are arranged at adjacent downstream positions (2nd, 11th, 14th, 19th). On the right reel 32R, the main "red bell" symbols (2nd, 5th, 12th, 20th) and adjacent positions (3rd, 6th, 16th, 0th) on the upstream side are "1st A "replay" pattern or a "second replay" pattern is arranged, and a "first replay" pattern is arranged at a position (11th) adjacent to the "white bell" pattern (10th) on the upstream side. Therefore, when the 37th minor winning combination is established on the right downward line L4, mainly the "Bell" symbol and the "Replay" symbol are tense on the left reel 32L and the right reel 32R, while the middle reel 32M is displayed. "Bell" symbols and "Replay" symbols do not stop, which is a so-called double-tenpai-out stop result. When the 37th minor win is established, 3 medals are paid out in the 3-bet game, and 15 medals are paid out in the 2-bet game.

"White BAR" symbol, "young man" symbol, "watermelon" symbol, "first replay" symbol on the left reel 32L, "red bell" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and "first replay" symbol on the right reel 32R, When the "watermelon" symbol and the "black BAR" symbol stop on the active line, the 38th small winning combination is won. In the 3-bet game, if the player operates the left stop switch at the timing when the number 4 "cherry" symbol on the left reel 32L reaches the upper and lower stages, and the 38th minor winning combination is established, the left A "red bell" symbol on the reel 32L, a "red bell" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and a "red bell" symbol or a "white bell" symbol on the right reel 32R are stopped on the middle line L2. When the 38th minor win is established, 3 medals are paid out in the 3-bet game, and 15 medals are paid out in the 2-bet game.

When the “red bell” symbol or “white bell” symbol on the left reel 32L, the “red bell” symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the “black BAR” symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the active line, Won the 39th minor role. The 39th minor winning combination is a winning mode that is established only in a 3-bet game. When the 39th minor winning combination is established, 9 medals are paid out.

When the “red bell” symbol or “white bell” symbol on the left reel 32L, the “red bell” symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the “red 7” symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the active line, Won the 40th minor role. The 40th minor winning combination is a winning mode that is established only in a 3-bet game. When the 40th minor winning combination is established, 9 medals are paid out.

When the "watermelon" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "black BAR" symbol or "cherry" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "watermelon" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the effective line, the 41st small Awarded for the role. When the 41st minor win is established, 3 medals are paid out in the 3-bet game, and 14 medals are paid out in the 2-bet game.

Winnings to which the privilege of replaying that the next game can be played without inserting medals are provided include first to twelfth replaying winnings. Further, when the second re-game win is established, the game state shifts to the first RT state, and when the third re-game win is established, the game state shifts to the second RT state, and the fourth re-game. When the winning or the fifth replay winning is established, the game state shifts to the third RT state. Then, when the 11th re-game win or the 12th re-game win is established, the game state shifts to the 4th RT state.

State transition winnings in which only game state transition is performed include 1st BB winning, 2nd BB winning and CB winning.

When the "red 7" pattern of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R stops on the active line, the first BB wins, and when the "white BAR" pattern of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R stops on the active line. , it will be the 2nd BB prize. When these BB prizes are established, the game state shifts to the BB state. Also, the left reel 32L has a "red bell" or "white bell" pattern, the middle reel 32M has a "red bell" pattern, the right reel 32R has a "watermelon" pattern, a "first replay" pattern, and a "black BAR". When the symbols and stop on the active line, the CB prize is won. When the CB winning is established, the game state shifts to the CB state.

In addition, although it is different from winning, there is a stop outcome in which the game state shifts to the first RT state. Specifically, the left reel 32L has a "red bell" pattern or a "white bell" pattern, and the middle reel 32M has a "white BAR" pattern, a "LUCKY" pattern, a "red 7" pattern, a "white bell" pattern, and a "white bell" pattern. When the "cherry" symbol, the "watermelon" symbol on the right reel 32R, and the "first replay" symbol stop on the active line, the game state shifts to the first RT state. The left reel 32L has a "red bell" or "white bell" pattern, the middle reel 32M has a "red bell" pattern, and the right reel 32R has a "white BAR" pattern, a "young man" pattern, and a "white bell" pattern. , “red 7” symbols, and “second replay” symbols stop on the activated line, the game state shifts to the first RT state. Hereinafter, the combinations of the above symbols are referred to as transitional numbers.

A start lever 41 that is operated to start the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is provided on the lower left side of the game panel 25. As shown in FIG. The start lever 41 constitutes start operation means or start operation means operated to start rotating the reels 32L, 32M, 32R, that is, to start variable display of symbols. When the start lever 41 is operated with a predetermined number of medals inserted, the reels 32L, 32M and 32R start rotating.

On the right side of the start lever 41, button-shaped stop switches 42 to 44 are provided to be operated to individually stop the rotating reels 32L, 32M, 32R. The stop switches 42 to 44 are arranged directly below the display windows 26L, 26M, 26R corresponding to the reels 32L, 32M, 32R to be stopped, respectively.

Stop detection sensors 42a-44a (FIG. 12) are connected to the stop switches 42-44, respectively, and the stop detection sensors 42a-44a are connected to a main controller 101, which will be described later. Based on the detection signals from the stop detection sensors 42a-44a, the main controller 101 recognizes that the stop switches 42-44 have been operated. Specifically, when the stop switches 42 to 44 are not operated, the detection signals of LOW signals are output from the stop detection sensors 42a to 44a, and by operating the stop switches 42 to 44, The detection signal is switched from a LOW signal to a HI signal. The main controller 101 grasps the switching of such signals and grasps that the stop switches 42 to 44 have been operated. When the main controller 101 recognizes that one of the stop switches 42 to 44 has been operated, it controls to stop the rotation of the reel corresponding to the operated switch.

That is, when the left stop switch 42 is operated, the rotation of the left reel 32L is stopped, and when the middle stop switch 43 is operated, the rotation of the middle reel 32M is stopped, and the right stop switch 44 is operated. In this case, the rotation of the right reel 32R stops. The stop switches 42 to 44 constitute stop operation means operated to stop the variable display of symbols based on the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R.

A medal slot 45 for inserting medals is provided on the lower right side of the display windows 26L, 26M, 26R. The medal slot 45 constitutes input means for inputting game media. Further, if attention is paid to the fact that the medal insertion slot 45 is accompanied by an action of directly inserting medals by the player, it can be said that the medal insertion slot 45 constitutes direct input means for directly inputting game media.

A medal inserted from the medal slot 45 is led to either a storage passage 47 or an ejection passage 48 by a selector 46 as passage switching means provided on the back surface of the front door 12 . More specifically, the selector 46 is provided with a medal passage switching solenoid 46a. When the medal passage switching solenoid 46a is de-energized, the medals are guided to the discharge passage 48 side, and when the medal passage switching solenoid 46a is energized, the medals are guided. is guided to the storage passage 47 side. The medals guided to the storage passage 47 are guided to the hopper device 51 housed inside the housing 11 . On the other hand, the medals guided to the discharge passage 48 are guided to the medal receiving tray 50 from the medal discharge port 49 provided at the lower front surface of the front door 12 and returned to the player.

The hopper device 51 is composed of a storage tank 52 for storing medals and a payout device 53 for paying out the medals to the player. The payout device 53 rotates a medal payout rotating plate (not shown) to discharge the medals to an opening 48a provided in the discharge passage 48 and to pay out the medals to the medal receiving tray 50 through the discharge passage 48. It has become. Further, on the right side of the hopper device 51, a spare tank 54 is provided for avoiding a predetermined amount or more of medals from being stored in the storage tank 52. FIG. Inside the storage tank 52 of the hopper device 51, a guide plate 52a for discharging medals from the storage tank 52 to the reserve tank 54 is provided. Therefore, when the medals are stored above the height at which the guide plate 52a is provided, the medals are stored in the reserve tank .

A button-like return switch 55 is provided below the medal slot 45 . When the return switch 55 is operated under the condition that the medals inserted into the medal slot 45 are clogged in the selector 46, the selector 46 is mechanically interlocked and operated, and the medals clogged in the selector 46 are returned to the medals. It is designed to be returned from the discharge port 49 .

A first credit insertion switch 56 for inserting three credited virtual medals as game media at a time is provided on the lower left side of the display windows 26L, 26M, 26R. A second credit insertion switch 57 is provided to the right of the first credit insertion switch 56 , and a third credit insertion switch 58 is provided to the left of the first credit insertion switch 56 . The second credit insert switch 57 is for inserting one virtual medal, and the third credit insert switch 58 is for inserting two virtual medals at once. The credit insertion switches 56 to 58 constitute input means for inputting game media together with the medal insertion port 45 . Also, it should be noted that while the medal insertion slot 45 is accompanied by the operation of directly inserting medals by the player, the credit insertion switches 56 to 58 are accompanied by the operation of inserting virtual medals based on stored memory. For example, it can be said that it constitutes an indirect input means for indirectly inputting a game medium.

Between the first credit insertion switch 56 and the second credit insertion switch 57, an effect switch 66 is provided which is operated when the effect is generated. That is, a first credit input switch 56 and a third credit input switch 58 are provided to the left of the effect switch 66, and a second credit input switch 57 is provided to the right of the effect switch 66. there is

A settlement switch 59 is provided to the left of the start lever 41 . That is, the slot machine 10 has a credit function of storing and storing surplus inserted medals up to a predetermined maximum value (equivalent to 50 medals) and payout medals at the time of winning as virtual medals. When the settlement switch 59 is operated under the stored condition, the virtual medals are dispensed from the medal discharge port 49 as real medals. In this case, focusing on the function of paying out credited virtual medals as real medals, it can be said that the settlement switch 59 constitutes settlement operation means for actually paying out the stored game media.

Below the display windows 26L, 26M, 26R of the game panel 25 are a credit display portion 60 for displaying the number of credited virtual medals, and a remaining number of payouts for displaying the number of remaining medals to be paid out until the BB state ends. A display unit 61 and a payout number display unit 62 for displaying the number of medals paid out at the time of winning are provided. Although these display units 60 to 62 are composed of 7-segment displays, it is of course possible to replace them with liquid crystal displays or the like.

Below the display windows 26L, 26M, 26R on the game panel 25 and to the right of the payout number display part 62, there is a push order indicator for notifying the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44 and the operation order. An instruction monitor 68 having an interval indicator for indicating an advantageous interval, which is an interval in which the game can be progressed in an advantageous situation for the player by changing the winning rate of the minor combination, is provided. Instruction monitor 68 will be described in greater detail below.

At the top of the front door 12, an upper lamp 63 that lights up or blinks as the game progresses, and a pair of left and right lamps that emit various sound effects as the game progresses and notify the player of the game state. A speaker 64 and an auxiliary display section 65 for giving various information to the player are provided. The auxiliary display section 65 is for executing various display effects as the game progresses. It is called an auxiliary display section 65 . An upper lamp 63 , a speaker 64 , and a display control device 81 for driving the auxiliary display section 65 are provided behind the auxiliary display section 65 .

A power supply box 70 is provided on the left side of the hopper device 51 inside the housing 11 . The power supply box 70 accommodates the power supply device 91 therein, and is provided with a power switch 71, a reset switch 72, a setting key insertion hole 73, and the like. The power switch 71 is a start switch for supplying power to each unit including the main controller 101 . The reset switch 72 is a switch for resetting the error state of the slot machine 10 . The setting key insertion hole 73 is used by a hall manager or the like to adjust the payout of medals. That is, the winning probability (setting value) of the slot machine 10 can be set by inserting the setting key into the setting key insertion hole 73 and turning it on by the hall manager or the like. The reset switch 72 is operated not only when resetting the error state but also when changing the winning probability of the slot machine 10 .

Above the reel unit 31, a main control device 101 for overall management of the game is attached to the housing 11. As shown in FIG.

The main controller 101 is provided with a role ratio monitor 77 for clearly indicating the ratio between the game state that is advantageous to the player and the state that is not. The role ratio monitor 77 is configured to be visible from the front of the gaming machine by opening the front door 12 and to be invisible from the front of the gaming machine by closing the front door 12. 101 is installed on the side facing the front of the game machine. Contained. Incidentally, when the front door 12 is in the closed state, the role ratio monitor 77 cannot be visually recognized even through the gaps between the display windows 26L to 26R. The role ratio monitor 77 cannot be checked unless the front door 12 is opened. Note that the role ratio monitor 77 will be described later in detail.

Next, the electrical configuration of the slot machine 10 will be described with reference to block diagrams of FIGS. 12 and 13. FIG.

The main control unit 101 is equipped with a microcomputer centered around a CPU 102 as arithmetic processing means. In addition to the power supply device 91, the CPU 102 is connected to a clock circuit 103 that outputs a rectangular wave of a predetermined frequency, an input/output port 104, and the like via an internal bus. The main controller 101 functions as a main board built into the slot machine 10 .

On the input side of the main controller 101, the reel unit 31 (more specifically, a reel index sensor that individually detects that each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R has made one rotation) and a start detection sensor that detects the operation of the start lever 41. 41a, stop detection sensors 42a to 44a for individually detecting the operation of each of the stop switches 42 to 44, an inserted medal detection sensor 45a for detecting medals inserted from the medal slot 45, and a medal dispensed from the hopper device 51. A payout detection sensor 51a, a first credit insertion detection sensor 56a that individually detects the operation of the first credit insertion switch 56, a second credit insertion detection sensor 57a that individually detects the operation of the second credit insertion switch 57, and a third credit. A third credit insertion detection sensor 58a that individually detects the operation of the insertion switch 58, a settlement detection sensor 59a that detects the operation of the settlement switch 59, a reset detection sensor 72a that detects the operation of the reset switch 72, and the setting key insertion hole 73. Various sensors such as a setting key detection sensor 73a for detecting that a setting key has been inserted and turned on are connected. It's becoming

A power supply device 91 is connected to the input side of the main control device 101 via an input/output port 104 . The power supply device 91 includes a power supply unit 91a that supplies driving power to each electronic device of the slot machine 10 including the main controller 101, a power failure monitoring circuit 91b, and the like.

The power failure monitoring circuit 91b monitors the power failure state and generates a power failure signal when the power switch 71 shuts off the power as well as when the power fails. Therefore, the power failure monitoring circuit 91b monitors the stabilized drive voltage of DC 12 volts in this example output from the power supply unit 91a, and determines that the power supply has been cut off when the drive voltage drops below 10 volts, for example. is configured to output a power failure signal. The power failure signal is supplied to each of the CPU 102 and the input/output port 104, and the CPU 102 recognizes this power failure signal to execute power failure processing, which will be described later. The power failure signal is also supplied to the display control device 81 .

The power supply unit 91a is configured to output a stabilized voltage of 5 volts, which is used as a driving voltage in a control system such as the main controller 101, even when the output voltage drops below 10 volts. The time during which the stabilized voltage is output is sufficient for main controller 101 to execute power failure processing.

On the output side of the main controller 101, the reel unit 31 (more specifically, a stepping motor for rotating the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R), the medal passage switching solenoid 46a provided in the selector 46, the hopper device 51, the credit A display unit 60, a remaining payout number display unit 61, a payout number display unit 62, an instruction monitor 68, a role ratio monitor 77, a display control device 81, an external centralized terminal board 121 capable of transmitting information to a hall management device (not shown), etc. are input. It is connected via the output port 104 .

The CPU 102 includes a ROM 105 storing various control programs and fixed value data to be executed by the CPU 102, and a work area for temporarily storing various data when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 105. In addition to the RAM 106 for securing , various processing circuits necessary for the slot machine 10, such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data transmission/reception circuit, etc., and a credit counter for counting the number of credits, etc., are not shown. Various counters are built in. The ROM 105 and the RAM 106 constitute a main memory as storage means, and programs for executing various processes are stored in the above-described ROM 105 as part of the control program.

The RAM 106 is configured to retain (back up) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply device 91 even after the slot machine 10 is powered off. The RAM 106 includes a memory for temporarily storing various data, a winning flag storage area 106a for storing the lottery result of the combination, and stop information used when controlling the stop of each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. In addition to the stop information storage area 106b for storing the status information storage area 106c for storing the game status such as the BB status, etc., a backup area is provided.

The backup area is an area for storing the value of the stack pointer when the power is cut off due to a power failure or the like (including when the power is cut off by operating the power switch 71; the same shall apply hereinafter). Yes, when the power failure is resolved (including power-on by operating the power switch 71; the same applies hereinafter), the state of the slot machine 10 can be restored to the state before the power-off based on the information in the backup area. . Writing to the backup area is performed when the power is turned off by power failure processing (see FIG. 14), and restoration of each value written to the backup area is performed in the main processing when the power is turned on.

Further, the NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the CPU 102 is configured to receive a power failure signal from the power failure monitoring circuit 91b when power is shut off due to power failure or the like. When the power is cut off, the NMI interrupt processing as the power failure flag generation processing is immediately executed.

As shown in FIG. 13, the display control device 81 is equipped with a microcomputer centered around a CPU 181 as arithmetic processing means. The CPU 181 has a ROM 182 storing various control programs and fixed value data to be executed by the CPU 181, and a work area for temporarily storing various data when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 182. A RAM 183 and the like for securing are incorporated.

The display control device 81 is provided with input/output ports (not shown), the input side of which is connected to the main control device 101, and the output side of which the upper lamp 63, the speaker 64, and the auxiliary display section 65 are connected. there is Based on various commands input from the main controller 101, the upper lamp 63, the speaker 64, and the auxiliary display section 65 are driven and controlled. In other words, the display control device 81 is a sub-board that executes auxiliary control in relation to the main control device 101 that is the main board that supervises and manages the game. In other words, the load on the main board is reduced by providing a sub-board for the sounds, lamps, and displays related to indirect games.

The input side of the display control device 81 is connected with a production switch 66 (more specifically, a production switch detection sensor that detects the operation of the production switch 66). The various display units 60 to 62 and 68 may also be driven and controlled by the display control device 81 .

Next, each control process executed by the CPU 102 of the main controller 101 will be described. The processing of the CPU 102 can be broadly classified into main processing that is started when the power is turned on, timer interrupt processing that is started periodically (with a cycle of 1.49 msec in this embodiment), and a power failure signal to the NMI terminal. There is an NMI interrupt process that is started with the input of . Of these processes, processes related to the progress of the game, that is, timer interrupt processes and normal processes performed in the main process will be described below.

FIG. 14 is a flowchart of timer interrupt processing periodically executed by the main controller 101. The CPU 102 of the main controller 101 generates a timer interrupt every 1.49 msec, for example.

First, in the register saving process shown in step S101, the values of all the registers in the CPU 102 used in the normal process, which will be described later, are saved in the backup area of the RAM 106. FIG. In step S102, it is confirmed whether or not the power failure flag is set. When the power failure flag is set, the process proceeds to step S103 to execute power failure processing.

Here, an outline of power failure processing will be described.

When the power supply is interrupted due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, a power failure signal is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 91b of the power supply device 91, and the power failure signal is input to the main controller 101 via the NMI terminal. When a power failure signal is input, main controller 101 immediately executes NMI interrupt processing and sets a power failure flag in a power failure flag storage area provided in RAM 106 .

In the power failure processing, first, it is determined whether or not the command transmission has been completed. If the transmission has not been completed, this processing is terminated, the timer interrupt processing is resumed, and the command transmission is terminated. When the command transmission is completed, the value of the stack pointer of the CPU 102 is saved in the backup area of the RAM 106 . After that, the output state of the output port in the input/output port 104 is cleared, and all actuators (not shown) are turned off. Then, when the power failure is resolved, a RAM judgment value for judging whether or not the data in the RAM 106 is normal is calculated and stored in the backup area, thereby inhibiting subsequent RAM access. After the above processing is performed, an infinite loop is entered in preparation for the case where the power is completely cut off and the processing cannot be executed. Considering the case where the power failure flag is erroneously set due to, for example, noise, it is confirmed whether or not the power failure signal is being output until entering an infinite loop. If the power failure signal is not output, it means that the power failure state has been restored. Therefore, the power failure flag is reset while permitting writing to the RAM 106, and the timer interrupt processing is resumed. If the power failure signal continues to be output, an infinite loop is entered as it is. Incidentally, whether or not the power failure signal is being output is checked even under the infinite loop, and when the power failure signal is no longer output, the process proceeds to the main processing.

Returning to the description of the timer interrupt process, if the power failure flag is not set in step S102, various processes after step S104 are performed.

That is, in step S104, clearing processing of the watchdog timer for initializing the value of the watchdog timer for monitoring the occurrence of malfunction is performed. In step S105, the CPU 102 performs an interrupt end declaration process to enable the next timer interrupt to be set. In step S106, in order to rotate the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, stepping motor control processing is performed to drive the stepping motors, which are the driving motors for the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. In step S107, the states of various sensors (see FIG. 12) such as the stop detection sensors 42a to 44a, inserted medal detection sensor 45a, payout detection sensor 51a, etc. connected to the input/output port 104 are read, and whether the read result is normal or not. Sensor monitoring processing is performed to monitor whether or not. In step S108, timer calculation processing is performed to subtract the value of each counter or timer. In step S109, counter processing is performed to output to the external centralized terminal board 121 the results of counting the number of bets of medals and the number of payouts.

In step S110, command output processing for transmitting various commands such as a lottery result command, which will be described later, to the display control device 81 is performed. In step S111, segment data setting processing for setting segment data to be displayed in the credit display section 60, the remaining payout number display section 61, and the payout number display section 62 is performed. In step S112, segment data display processing is performed to supply the segment data set by the segment data setting processing to each of the display units 60 to 62, 68 and display corresponding numerals, symbols, and the like. In step S113, port output processing for outputting data corresponding to the I/O device from the input/output port 104 is performed. In step S114, the values of each register saved in the backup area in step S101 are returned to the corresponding registers in the CPU 102, respectively. After that, in step S115, interrupt permission processing for permitting the next timer interrupt is performed, and this series of timer interrupt processing is terminated.

Next, normal processing for performing main controls related to the game will be described with reference to the flow chart of FIG.

First, in step S201, interrupt permission processing for permitting the next timer interrupt is performed. In step S202, pre-start processing for enabling a game is performed. In the pre-start process, the process waits until the display control device 81 or the like finishes initialization. When the initialization of the display control device 81 and the like is completed, game management processing shown in steps S203 to S215 is performed.

As game management processing, in step S203, data such as various game information stored in the RAM 106 (for example, random numbers used in the previous game) are cleared. After that, in step S204, start waiting processing is performed.

In the start waiting process, it is determined whether or not any replay winning has been established in the previous game. If any of the replay wins have been established, automatic injection processing for automatically inserting the same number of virtual medals as the number of previous bets is performed, and the start waiting processing is terminated. Specifically, for example, when a replay win is established in a 3-bet game, processing is performed to automatically insert 3 virtual medals, and when a replay win is established in a 1-bet game, 1 coin is executed. , the virtual medals are automatically inserted.

Note that in the automatic insertion process, virtual medals are inserted without reducing the number of virtual medals displayed on the credit display section 60 . In other words, when any of the replay wins are established in the previous game, the player can play the current game without reducing the number of medals owned and without inserting medals. If none of the replay winnings has been established, sensor abnormality confirmation processing is performed to confirm whether or not an abnormality has occurred in the sensor reading result performed in the sensor monitoring processing step S107 of the timer interrupt processing, When an abnormality occurs, the slot machine 10 is placed in an error state and an abnormality occurrence process is performed to notify the occurrence of the error. This error state is maintained until the reset switch 72 is operated. Medal return processing for determining whether or not the settlement switch 59 has been operated when the reading result of the sensor is normal, and paying out the same number of medals as the credited virtual medals when the settlement switch 59 has been operated. I do.

After the medal return process is completed or if the settlement switch 59 is not operated, whether or not the medal insertion or credit insertion switches 56 to 58 have been operated between the previous start waiting process and the current start waiting process. If either one is performed, a medal insertion process for changing the number of bets, etc. is performed, and the start waiting process is terminated. Also, if neither medal insertion nor operation of the credit insertion switches 56 to 58 has been performed between the previous start waiting process and the current start waiting process, the start waiting process is terminated as it is.

After completion of the start waiting process, it is determined in step S205 whether or not the number of bets on medals has reached a specified number. In this slot machine 10, "2" is set as the specified number in the CB state, and game states other than the CB state (specifically, the normal game state, the first RT state, the second RT state, the third RT state, the "1" and "3" are set as the prescribed numbers in the 4RT state and BB state). That is, in the CB state, an affirmative determination is made in step S205 on the condition that the bet number is "2", and in other than the CB state, the bet number is "1" or "3". , an affirmative determination is made in step S205. In other words, in a game state other than the CB state, if no medals have been betted, or if the number of bets is "2" even if medals have been betted, a negative determination is made in step S205. If the number of bets has not reached the specified number, the process returns to the start waiting process of step S204, and the processes after the sensor abnormality confirmation process among the processes are performed.

When the number of bets has reached the prescribed number, a mode transition notification process is executed in step S206. Such shift notification processing will be described later in detail.

After the processing of step S206 is performed, a bet command including information on the processing result of step S206 and information on the number of bets for which affirmative determination was made in step S205 is sent to the display control device 81 as a sub-side control device. set as the output target of The command set here is output to the display control device 81 at step S110 in the timer interrupt process. The processing of the display control device 81 that receives the bet command will be described later in detail.

After executing the processing of step S207, it is determined whether or not the start lever 41 has been operated in step S208. If the start lever 41 has not been operated, the process returns to the start waiting process of step S204, and the processes after the sensor abnormality confirmation process are performed.

On the other hand, when the start lever 41 is operated, the game is started when the start lever 41 is operated under the condition that the prescribed number of medals are betted. It means that a command has occurred. In such a case, in step S209, an effective line setting process for setting a combination line corresponding to the number of bets as an effective line is performed. That is, in the 3-bet game, only the downward-sloping line L4 is set as the active line, and in the 2-bet game, the downward-sloping line L3 and the downward-sloping line L4 are set as the active lines. Also, in the 1-bet game, the bent line L6 is set as the effective line. In step S210, the medal passage switching solenoid 46a is switched to the non-excited state to prohibit acceptance of bets. Thereafter, lottery processing in step S211, reel control processing in step S212, medal payout processing in step S213, RT state processing in step S214, and bonus state processing in step S215 are sequentially executed, and the process returns to step S203.

Next, lottery processing in step S211 will be described based on the flowchart of FIG.

In step S301, a random number to be used when judging whether a winning combination is right or wrong is obtained. In the slot machine 10, when the start lever 41 is operated, the hardware circuit latches the value of the free-run counter at that time. The free-run counter generates a random number from 0 to 65535, and after confirming the operation of the start lever 41, the CPU 102 stores the value latched by the hardware circuit in the RAM 106. FIG. By adopting such a configuration, it becomes possible to quickly obtain a random number at the timing when the start lever 41 is operated, and it is possible to avoid problems such as synchronization. The hardware circuit of the slot machine 10 is configured to latch the value of the free-run counter each time the start lever 41 is operated.

After obtaining the random number, in step S302, a lottery table for judging whether the winning combination is correct or not is selected. The slot machine 10 has six types of game states, namely, a normal game state, a first RT state, a second RT state, a third RT state, a fourth RT state, a BB state, and a CB state. A table is set for each game state.

That is, in step S302, the current game state of the slot machine 10 is determined based on the bet number and the setting flag set in the state information storage area 106c, and a lottery table corresponding to the bet number and the game state is selected. . For example, when the number of bets is "3" and the setting flag is not set in the state information storage area 106c, it is determined that the current game state is the normal game state, and the lottery table for the normal game state is displayed. select. In addition, in the slot machine 10, six levels of winning probabilities from "setting 1" to "setting 6" are prepared in advance, and a setting key is inserted into the setting key insertion hole and turned on, and a predetermined operation is performed. By doing so, it is possible to set on which winning probability the internal processing is to be executed. In step S302, when the setting state is "setting 1", the lottery table with the lowest expected value of medal payout is selected, and when the setting state is "setting 6", the lottery table with the highest expected value of medal payout is selected.

Here, a supplementary explanation will be given of the process for setting the winning probability.

The winning probability setting process is executed in the main process started by the main controller 101 when the power is turned on. More specifically, the winning probability setting process is performed when the power is turned on while the setting key detection sensor 73a detects that the setting key is inserted into the setting key insertion hole and is turned on. It is started after initialization processing. In the winning probability setting process, as a predetermined operation, the set value is updated by 1 each time the start lever 41 is operated. →"Setting 3"→"Setting 4"→"Setting 5"→"Setting 6"→"Setting 1". Each set value is displayed, for example, on the credit display section 60, and the display is updated each time the set value is updated. Then, when the setting key detection sensor 73a is turned off, the set value at that time is set as the current set value, and the winning probability setting process is terminated. The display of the credit display section 60 is also ended based on the end of the winning probability setting process. The set value set in the winning probability setting process is stored and retained in the RAM 106 until the next winning probability setting process is started. In step S302, processing for selecting a lottery table is performed based on the stored set values.

The lottery table will be briefly explained. FIG. 17 is a lottery table for normal game state selected in the normal game state of "setting 3". An index value IV is set in the lottery table, and each index value IV is uniquely associated with a winning combination and a point value PV is set.

After selecting the lottery table, the index value IV is set to 1 in step S303, and the determination value DV used when determining whether the winning combination is right or wrong is set in the subsequent step S304. In this determination value setting process, a new determination value DV is set by adding the current index value IV and the corresponding point value PV to the current determination value DV. In the initial determination value setting process, the random value obtained in step S301 is used as the current determination value DV, and the current index value IV of 1 and the corresponding point value PV are added to this random value to create a new value. Let it be the judgment value DV.

After that, in step S305, it is determined whether the winning combination corresponding to the index value IV is correct. Whether or not the judgment value DV exceeds 65535 is judged in the winning judgment. If it exceeds 65535, it is determined in step S306 whether or not any of the 1st BB, 2nd BB, and CB has been won. Specifically, it is determined whether an affirmative determination is made in step S305 with an index value IV (IV=34 to 54) including any one of the first BB, second BB, and CB. When an affirmative determination is made in step S306, a process of setting corresponding bonus winning flags (first BB winning flag, second BB winning flag, CB winning flag) in the winning flag storage area 106a is performed in step S307. If a negative determination is made in step S306 or after the processing of step S307 is performed, in step S308, the winning flag of each minor combination corresponding to the index value IV determined affirmatively in step S305 is stored in the winning flag storage area. 106a is set. For example, when the determination value DV exceeds 65535 when IV=34, the 1st BB winning flag is set in step S307, and the 28th minor winning flag, the 33rd minor winning flag and the 33rd minor winning winning flag are set in step S308. 35 Set a minor winning flag. When the determination value DV exceeds 65535 when IV=17, a winning flag indicating that the 30th and 41st minor wins have been won is set in the winning flag storage area 106a in step S308.

Incidentally, if the set winning flag is not a winning flag (1BB winning flag) indicating that the 1BB has been won or a winning flag (2BB winning flag) indicating that the 2BB has been won, the winning flag storage area 106a The winning flag that has been set is reset after the game in which the corresponding selection flag is set ends (see S203 of normal processing). On the other hand, if the winning flag is the 1st BB winning flag or the 2nd BB winning flag, these winning flags are reset under one of the conditions that the corresponding winning has been established. That is, the first BB winning flag and the second BB winning flag may be valid over a plurality of games.

It should be noted that in steps S306 to S308 in a state in which the 1BB winning flag or the 2BB winning flag is carried over, if a combination other than the 1BB, 2BB and CB is won, the corresponding winning flag is set, If a winning combination other than the second BB and CB is not won, the corresponding winning flag is not set.

That is, for example, in a state in which the 1st BB winning flag is carried over, for example, when the determination value DV exceeds 65535 when the index value IV=34, the 1st BB winning flag is not set, and the 28th minor combination winning flag is not set. , the 33rd minor winning combination winning flag and the 35th minor winning combination winning flag are set. In addition, in a state in which the 1st BB winning flag is carried over, for example, when the index value IV=35 and the determination value DV exceeds 65535, the 28th minor winning flag and the 33rd winning flag are not set. A small win flag and a 35th minor win win flag are set.

A lottery table is separately prepared in a state in which the 1st BB winning flag or the 2nd BB winning flag is carried over, and in the state where the 1st BB winning flag or the 2nd BB winning flag is carried over, the lottery processing is performed in the separately prepared lottery table. may be configured to perform In this case, in the separately prepared lottery table, each index value IV and point value PV should be set so as not to win the 1st BB, 2nd BB, and CB.

If the determination value DV does not exceed 65535 in step S305, it means that the role corresponding to the index value IV is lost. In such a case, 1 is added to the index value IV in step S309, and in the following step S310, it is determined whether or not there is a hand corresponding to the index value IV, that is, whether or not there is a determination target to be determined. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the index value IV to which 1 has been added exceeds the maximum value of the index value IV set in the lottery table. If there is a determination target to be determined, the process returns to step S304 to continue the determination of the winning combination. At this time, in step S304, the point value PV corresponding to the current index value IV is added to the judgment value DV used for the judgment of the previous winning combination (that is, the current judgment value DV) to obtain a new judgment value DV, In step S305, it is determined whether the winning combination is correct based on the determination value DV. By the way, when judging the winning combination using the lottery table shown in FIG. The probability of winning the lottery (the probability of winning when IV = 15) is about 1/300, and the probability of winning the low cherry (the probability of winning when IV = 16) is about 1/183. be. The probability of winning a strong watermelon (probability of winning when IV = 17) is about 1/300, and the probability of winning a weak watermelon (probability of winning when IV = 18) is about 218. 1. The probability of winning Chance A (probability of winning when IV=19) is about 1/252, and the probability of winning Chance B (probability of winning when IV=20) is about 252. 1/1. The probability of winning the middle bell (probability of winning when IV = 21) is about 1/32,800, and the probability of winning the no-question bell (probability of winning when IV = 22) is about 65,500. 1. The odds of winning forward push bell 1, forward push bell 2, sandwich push bell 1, and sandwich push bell 2 (probability of winning when IV = 23 to 26) are about 1/43.7, middle push bell The probability of winning 1, middle-pressed bell 2, right-pressed bell 1, and right-pressed bell 2 (probability of winning when IV=27 to 30) is about 1/21.8, respectively. The probability of winning the high cherry stack 1 (probability of winning when IV = 34) is about 1/21800, and the probability of winning the high cherry stack 2 (probability of winning when IV = 35) is About 1/21800, the probability of winning the weak cherry overlap 1 (probability of winning when IV=36) is about 1/32800, the probability of winning the weak cherry overlap 2 (when IV=37 The probability of winning is approximately 1 in 32,800. The probability of winning the strong watermelon overlap 1 (probability of winning when IV = 38) is about 1/32800, and the probability of winning the strong watermelon overlap 2 (probability of winning when IV = 39) is It is about 1/32800. The probability of winning the weak watermelon overlap 1 (probability of winning when IV = 40) is about 1/65500, the probability of winning the weak watermelon overlap 2 (probability of winning when IV = 41) is It is approximately 1 in 65,500. The probability of winning chance A overlap 1, chance A overlap 2, chance B overlap 1, and chance B overlap 2 (probability of winning when IV=42 to 45) is about 1/32800. The probability of winning middle bell overlap 1 and middle bell overlap 2 (probability of winning when IV=46, 47) is about 1/21800, respectively. The probability of winning Special Ap A Duplicate 1 (probability of winning when IV = 48) is about 1/1010, the probability of winning Special Ap A Duplicate 2 (probability of winning when IV = 49) ) is about 1/1310. The probability of winning Special Ab Duplication 1 (probability of winning when IV = 50) is about 1/1010, the probability of winning Special Ab Duplication 2 (probability of winning when IV = 51) ) is about 1/1310. The probability of winning the 1st BB and the 2nd BB alone (probability of winning when IV=52, 53) is about 1/32800, respectively. The probability of winning CB (probability of winning when IV=54) is about 1/19.9. Also, the probability of not winning any role is about 1/1.96.

Note that 0 is set for the point values PV of IV=2 to 14, 31 to 33, and 55 to 58 in the lottery table for the normal game state. Therefore, in the normal game state, winning is not possible with these index values IV.

After the winning flag is set in step S308, or when it is determined in step S310 that there is no determination target to be determined, it means that the determination of the winning combination has been completed. In such a case, the process proceeds to step S311, and a freeze lottery process is performed to determine whether or not to execute a freeze effect that disables the operation of the stop switches 42 to 44 for a predetermined period.

In subsequent step S312, lottery result correspondence processing is performed. In the lottery result handling process, a process for determining whether or not to shift the game state according to the lottery results in steps S301 to S311, a process for notifying the winning combination, and the like are performed. The lottery result handling process will be described later in detail.

After executing the process of step S312, a lottery result command is set in step S313. Here, the lottery result command is a command that is transmitted to the display control device 81 so as to grasp the result of the win/loss determination of the winning combination. However, in normal processing, various commands such as the lottery result command are only set in the ring buffer, and the commands are not transmitted to the display control device 81 . Command transmission to the display control device 81 is performed in the command output process (step S110) of the timer interrupt process described above.

Then, in step S314, stop information setting processing is executed for setting symbols that can be stopped on the respective reels 32L, 32M, and 32R based on the lottery result of the current game. In the stop information setting process, stop symbol information is set according to the winning combination based on the winning flag set in steps S306 to S308. For example, when a strong cherry is won (winning when IV=15) and the strong cherry winning flag is set, the symbols corresponding to the 28th small winning combination, the 32nd small winning combination to the 35th small winning combination are displayed on each reel 32L. , 32M, and 32R are set to stop symbol information. In addition, when the strong cherry overlap 1 is won (winning when IV=34) and the strong cherry winning flag and the 1 BB winning flag are set, the 28th minor winning combination, the 33rd minor winning combination, the 35th minor winning combination and the 1st minor winning combination are set. The stop symbol information is set so that the symbols corresponding to the 1BB winning can be stopped on the respective reels 32L, 32M and 32R.

In subsequent step S315, when a plurality of stoppable pattern information is set in step S314, a priority setting process for setting the priority is executed. For example, if a plurality of roles among the minor roles, replay, and bonus roles are won, the following priority order is set. Set the order of priority so that when a minor win and a bonus are won, the minor win wins preferentially, and when the minor win cannot be achieved, the bonus win wins. . When winning the replay and the bonus, the order of priority is set so that the replay win is preferentially established.

For example, when the strong cherry overlap 1 is won and the stop symbol information corresponding to the 28th small combination, the 33rd small combination, the 35th small combination and the 1BB winning is set, the 28th is selected rather than the 1BB winning. The order of priority is set so that the small winning combination, the 33rd small winning combination, and the 35th small winning combination are preferentially established. In addition, when special reply A duplication 1 is won and stop pattern information corresponding to the 9th replay and 1BB win is set, the 9th replay win is established with priority over the 1BB win. set the priority so that Then, for example, in a situation where the 1BB win is carried over, if the normal replay is won and the stop symbol information corresponding to the 1BB win and the 1st replay win is set, then the 1BB win is higher than the 1BB win. The order of priority is set so that 1 re-game winning is preferentially established.

Here, the winning symbol combination is set so that one of the winning re-games always wins when the re-game is won. In other words, when the replay is won, the replay win is always established, and no loss occurs. Therefore, when the stop symbol information for replay and bonus is set, replay winning in any of the set replays is always established, and bonus winning is not established.

Further, when a plurality of minor winning combinations or multiple replays are won in duplicate, which symbol corresponding to the minor winning combination or replay is stopped on the active line depends on the timing of the stop operation. For example, when the strong watermelon is won and the stop symbol information corresponding to the 30th and 41st minor wins is set, as described above, the left The target symbol of the reel 32L is commonly the "watermelon" symbol. Therefore, depending on the timing of the stop operation of the left reel 32L, it is not determined which minor win is established. On the other hand, the target symbols of the middle reel 32M and the right reel 32R are both "red bell" symbols for the 30th minor winning combination, and "cherry" and "black BAR" symbols for the middle reel 32M for the 41st minor winning combination. , the right reel 32R has a "watermelon" pattern. For example, in a 3-bet game, when the middle stop switch 43 is operated at the timing when the fourth "watermelon" symbol to the seventh "red bell" symbol reach the middle stage of the middle reel 32M, the 30th Both the 7th "red bell" symbol, which is the target symbol for the minor win, and the "black BAR" symbol, which is the target symbol for the 41st minor win, can be stopped in the middle row on the active line. becomes. In this case, in the present embodiment, stop symbol information is set so that a symbol with a small number of slips is preferentially stopped. As a result, in the above case, stop drive control is performed so that the "red bell" symbol stops in the middle row, the 41st minor winning combination is not established, and the 30th minor winning combination becomes possible.

On the other hand, in the middle reel 32M, when the stopping operation of the middle stop switch 43 is performed at the timing when the eighth "black BAR" symbol to the twelfth "red bell" symbol reach the middle stage, the target for the 41st minor winning combination Both the 8th "black BAR" and 11th "cherry" symbols, which are symbols, and the 12th "red bell" symbol, which is the target symbol for the 30th minor combination, should be stopped in the middle stage. becomes possible. In this case as well, the stop symbol information is set so that the symbol with the smaller number of slips is preferentially stopped, so the eighth "black BAR" symbol or the eleventh "cherry" symbol stops in the middle row, and the second symbol stops. The 30th minor winning combination is no longer established, and the 41st minor winning combination becomes possible.

The same applies to the right reel 32R. Depending on the timing at which the stop operation of the right stop switch 44 is performed, the "red bell" symbol that is the target symbol for the 30th minor win and the "watermelon" symbol that is the target symbol for the 41st minor win. The stop pattern information is set so that the pattern with a smaller number of slips is stopped on the lower stage, which is the effective line. In the right reel 32R, when the sixth "first replay" symbol and the seventh "black BAR" symbol reach the effective position, the stop operation of the right stop switch 44 is performed. Neither the symbol nor the "red bell" symbol can be stopped.

After executing the process of step S315, after executing the section display first process in step S316, the lottery process ends. The first section display processing is processing related to display control of the instruction monitor 68 and role ratio monitor 77, and such processing will be described later in detail.

Next, the reel control processing in step S212 will be described based on the flowchart of FIG.

In the reel control process, first, in step S401, a rotation effect process is performed. The rotation effect process is a process for performing an effect using reel control during the invalid period based on the result of the freeze lottery process performed in step S311. In the subsequent step S402, rotation start processing is performed to start rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R.

In the rotation start process, it is checked whether or not a predetermined wait time (for example, 4.1 seconds) has elapsed since the reel started rotating in the previous game. If not, the wait time has elapsed. wait until When the wait time has passed, the wait time for the next game is set again, and motor control initialization processing for setting rotation start information in the motor control storage area provided in the RAM 106 is performed. By performing such processing, the acceleration processing of the stepping motor is started in the stepping motor control processing (step S106) of the timer interrupt processing, and the reels 32L, 32M, 32R start rotating. Therefore, even if the player bets the prescribed number of medals and operates the start lever 41, the reels 32L, 32M and 32R may not immediately start rotating. Thereafter, the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R wait until they rotate at a predetermined rotational speed at a constant speed, and the rotation start processing ends. In addition, when the rotation speed of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R becomes constant, the CPU 102 can generate a stop command by turning on lamps (not shown) of each of the stop switches 42 to 44. is notified to players and the like.

Following the rotation start process, in step S403, it is determined whether or not any one of the stop switches 42 to 44 has been operated. If none of the stop switches 42-44 is operated, the process waits until one of the stop switches 42-44 is operated. If it is determined that any one of the stop switches 42 to 44 has been operated, the process proceeds to step S404, and it is determined whether or not the stop switch corresponding to the rotating reel has been operated, that is, whether or not a stop command has been generated. do. If no stop command has been generated, the process returns to step S403 and waits until any one of the stop switches 42 to 44 is operated. When a stop command is generated, a stop command is set in step S405. Here, the stop instruction command is a command sent to the display control device 81 in order to grasp which stop switch has been operated to generate the stop instruction. When the stop instruction command is set, stop control processing shown in steps S406 to S412 is performed to stop the rotating reel.

In step S406, the symbol number of the arrival symbol that has reached the base position (lower position in this embodiment) at the timing when the stop switch is operated is confirmed. Specifically, the pattern number of the arrival pattern that has reached the base position is confirmed based on the number of excitation pulses output from the time when the detection signal of the reel index sensor is input. In the subsequent step S407, the number of reel slips to be stopped this time is calculated based on the stop information stored in the stop information storage area 106b. In the slot machine 10, as the stop modes for stopping the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, when the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated, the arrival symbol that has reached the base position is stopped as it is. A stop mode in which the reel is stopped after sliding by one symbol, a stop mode in which the reel is stopped after sliding by two symbols, a stop mode in which the reel is stopped after sliding by three symbols, and a reel is stopped after sliding by four symbols. 5 patterns of stop modes are prepared. Therefore, in step S407, any value from 0 to 4 is calculated as the sliding number based on the stop information stored in the stop information storage area 106b. After that, in step S408, the calculated number of slips is added to the symbol number of the reached symbol to determine the symbol number of the stop symbol to actually stop at the base position. In step S409, it is determined whether or not the symbol number of the arrival symbol of the reel to be stopped this time is equal to the symbol number of the stop symbol. conduct. After that, in step S411, it is determined whether or not all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R have stopped. If all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are not stopped, stop information second setting processing is performed in step S412, and the process returns to step S403.

Here, the second stop information setting process is a process of changing the stop information stored in the stop information storage area 106b of the RAM 106 after the reels are stopped. In the second stop information setting process, the stop information is changed based on the winning flag that is set and the stop number of the stopped reel. In this slot machine 10, for example, when winning is achieved when IV=23 to 30, that is, forward push bell 1, forward push bell 2, sandwich push bell 1, pinch push bell 2, middle push bell 1, middle push bell 2, right When winning the push bell 1 and right push bell 2 (hereinafter collectively referred to as "push order bell") (see FIG. 17), the stop switches 42 to 44 that generate the stop command are selected. A stop information second setting process is performed in order to change the winning mode established by the order of operations.

FIG. 19 is an explanatory diagram showing the correspondence between the winning combination, the order of operation of the stop switches 42 to 44, and the winning mode established. For example, when the middle push bell 1 is won, the stop information is set so that when the left stop switch 42 is operated first, the 2nd minor winning prize, the 7th minor winning prize or the 9th minor winning prize is established. Then, when the middle stop switch 43 is operated first, the stop information is set so that the 1st small winning combination is established, and when the right stop switch 44 is operated first, the 2nd small winning combination and the 7th small winning combination are set. The stop information is set so that the winning combination or the ninth minor winning combination is established. However, even when the stop information is set in this manner, there are cases where corresponding winnings are not established depending on the operation timing of the stop switches 42-44.

The pattern arrangement of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R will be briefly described. In the slot machine 10, in a game state (3-bet game) other than the CB state, the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R can be stopped after sliding by a maximum of four symbols from the timing when the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated. , and only the downward-sloping line L4 is set as an effective line. For this reason, when the same kind of symbols are arranged on each of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R with an interval of 4 symbols or less, the winning symbol becomes effective regardless of the operation timing of the stop switch 43 when the winning symbol is obtained. You can stop on the line. On the other hand, as for the symbols arranged so as to form a section separated by five symbols or more, the player needs to aim at the symbols and operate the stop switches 42 to 44 when stopping on the effective line.

An example will be described in which the middle push bell 1 is won and the left stop switch 42→middle stop switch 43→right stop switch 44 is operated in this order. In such a case, each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is controlled to stop in order to establish the second minor winning combination, the seventh minor winning combination or the ninth minor winning combination.

The second minor combination symbols on the left reel 32L are the "red bell" symbol and the "white bell" symbol. In addition, the "red bell" symbol and the "white bell" symbol also function as the seventh minor symbol and also function as the ninth minor symbol. On the left reel 32L, the second minor combination symbols (between the seventh minor combination symbols, between the ninth minor combination symbols) are arranged so that the interval is 4 symbols or less. Therefore, when the left stop switch 42 is operated first, the "red bell" pattern or the "white bell" pattern stops on the upper stage regardless of the operation timing. For example, when the left stop switch 42 is operated at the timing when the number 4 "cherry" symbol of the left reel 32L reaches the middle row, number 7 "red bell" is displayed as shown in FIG. 20(a). The pattern stops at the upper stage. As a result, there remains room for establishing the second minor winning combination, the seventh minor winning combination, or the ninth minor winning combination on the right downward line L4.

The second minor combination symbol of the middle reel 32M is a "white BAR" symbol. The "white BAR" pattern is arranged only at the 18th position on the middle reel 32M. Also, the seventh minor combination symbol of the middle reel 32M is a "red 7" symbol. On the middle reel 32M, the "red 7" symbol is arranged only at the 14th position. The ninth minor combination symbol on the middle reel 32M is a "cherry" symbol. A "cherry" symbol is arranged only at the 11th position on the middle reel 32M. Therefore, depending on the operation timing of the middle stop switch 43, the second minor winning symbol, the seventh minor winning symbol or the ninth minor winning symbol may stop on the active line, or the second minor winning symbol, the seventh minor winning symbol and the None of the ninth minor winning symbols stop on the active line.

Specifically, when the middle stop switch 43 is operated at the timing when any one of the 13th "first replay" pattern to the 17th "first replay" pattern reaches the lower stage, the second small winning combination The symbol "white BAR" is stopped in the middle row. As a result, there remains room for the establishment of the second minor winning combination on the right downward line L4. When the middle stop switch 43 is operated at the timing when any one of the ninth “second replay” symbol to the thirteenth “first replay” symbol reaches the lower stage, as shown in FIG. , the seventh minor winning symbol "red 7" is stopped in the middle row. As a result, there remains room for the 7th minor winning combination to be established on the lower right line L4. If the middle stop switch 43 is operated at the timing when any one of the 6th "white bell" pattern to the 10th "young man" pattern reaches the lower row, the 9th minor winning pattern "cherry" pattern is in the middle row. to stop. When the middle stop switch 43 is operated at another timing, even if the middle reel 32M is stopped after being slid by four symbols, the second, seventh and ninth minor symbol symbols are displayed. Cannot be stopped in the middle. When the middle stop switch 43 is operated at such timing, the 2nd "LUCKY" pattern or the 6th "white bell" pattern stops in the middle stage.

When the seventh minor combination symbol of the middle reel 32M stops in the middle stage, the second stop information setting process changes the stop information so that the seventh minor combination winning can be established.

The seventh minor combination symbol on the right reel 32R is a "white bell" symbol. On the right reel 32R, the "white bell" pattern is arranged only at the 10th position. Therefore, depending on the operation timing of the right stop switch 44, the seventh minor combination symbol may or may not stop on the activated line. Specifically, when the right stop switch 44 is operated at the timing when any one of the 6th "first replay" symbol to the 10th "white bell" symbol has reached the lower stage, FIG. As shown in , the seventh minor winning symbol "white bell" is stopped at the lower stage. As a result, the seventh minor winning combination is established on the right downward line L4. When the right stop switch 44 is operated at another timing, the "watermelon" symbol or the "first replay" symbol stops at the lower row. For example, when the right stop switch 44 is operated at the timing when the "second replay" symbol No. 3 reaches the lower stage, the "watermelon" symbol No. 4 is displayed as shown in FIG. Stop downstairs. The combination of "red bell" symbol, "red 7" symbol and "watermelon" symbol from the left is a transition roll as shown in FIG.

When the ninth minor combination symbol of the middle reel 32M stops in the middle row, the second stop information setting process changes the stop information so that the ninth minor combination winning can be established.

The ninth minor combination symbol on the right reel 32R is a "youth" symbol. A "young man" symbol is arranged at the 15th position on the right reel 32R. Therefore, depending on the operation timing of the right stop switch 44, the ninth minor combination symbol may or may not stop on the activated line. Specifically, when the right stop switch 44 is operated at the timing when any one of the 11th "first replay" symbol to the 15th "youth" symbol reaches the lower row, the ninth minor winning symbol is obtained. The "young man" design stops at the bottom. As a result, the ninth minor winning combination is established on the right downward line L4. When the right stop switch 44 is operated at another timing, the "watermelon" symbol or the "first replay" symbol stops at the lower row. The combination of "white bell" symbol ("red bell" symbol), "cherry" symbol, and "watermelon" symbol ("first replay" symbol) from the left is a transition roll as shown in FIG.

When the second minor combination symbol on the middle reel 32M stops in the middle row, the second stop information setting process changes the stop information so that the second minor combination winning can be established.

The second minor combination symbol on the right reel 32R is a "white BAR" symbol. A "white BAR" symbol is arranged at the 18th position on the right reel 32R. Therefore, depending on the operation timing of the right stop switch 44, the second minor combination symbol may or may not stop on the activated line. Specifically, when the right stop switch 44 is operated at the timing when any one of the 14th "watermelon" symbol to the 18th "white BAR" symbol reaches the lower row, the second minor winning symbol " White BAR” pattern stops at the bottom. As a result, the second minor winning combination is established on the lower right line L4. When the right stop switch 44 is operated at another timing, the "watermelon" symbol or the "first replay" symbol stops at the lower row. The combination of the "white bell" symbol ("red bell" symbol), the "white BAR" symbol, and the "watermelon" symbol ("first replay" symbol) from the left is a transition roll as shown in FIG.

When the second minor winning symbol, the seventh minor winning symbol and the ninth minor winning symbol of the middle reel 32M do not stop at the middle stage, that is, the "LUCKY" symbol or the "white bell" symbol of the middle reel 32M stops at the middle stage. In this case, in the second stop information setting process, the stop information is changed so that the "watermelon" symbol or the "first replay" symbol stops at the lower stage.

On the right reel 32R, the "watermelon" symbols and the "first replay" symbols are arranged such that the interval between the "watermelon" symbols and the "first replay" is four symbols or less. Therefore, when the right stop switch 44 is operated, the "watermelon" symbol or the "first replay" symbol is stopped regardless of the operation timing. From the left, the combination of "white bell" pattern ("red bell" pattern), "LUCKY" pattern ("white bell" pattern), and "watermelon" pattern ("first replay" pattern) shifts as shown in FIG. It is a result.

In this way, when the middle push bell 1 is won and the left stop switch 42→middle stop switch 43→right stop switch 44 is operated in this order, the 2nd minor winning combination and the 7th minor winning combination are established. It is one of a case where a prize is established, a case where a ninth minor winning combination is established, and a case where the transition rolls are stopped.

Next, a case where the middle push bell 1 is won and the middle stop switch 43→left stop switch 42→right stop switch 44 is operated in this order will be described as an example. In such a case, the reels 32L, 32M and 32R are controlled to stop in order to establish the first minor winning combination.

On the middle reel 32M, the "red bell" symbols, which are the first minor combination symbols, are arranged so that the interval between the "red bell" symbols is 4 symbols or less. Therefore, when the middle stop switch 43 is operated first, the "red bell" pattern stops in the middle stage regardless of the operation timing.

On the left reel 32L, "red bell" symbols and "white bell" symbols, which are the first minor combination symbols, are arranged so that the interval between the first minor combination symbols is 4 symbols or less. Therefore, when the left stop switch 42 is operated second, the "red bell" pattern or the "white bell" pattern stops on the upper stage regardless of the operation timing.

A "red bell" symbol and a "white bell" symbol, which are first minor bonus symbols, are arranged on the right reel 32R such that an interval between the first minor bonus symbols is four symbols or less. Therefore, when the right stop switch 44 is operated for the third time, the "red bell" pattern or the "white bell" pattern stops at the lower stage regardless of the operation timing.

As described above, when the middle push bell 1 is won and the middle stop switch 43→left stop switch 42→right stop switch 44 is operated in this order, the first minor win is established regardless of the operation timing.

In the case of winning the pressing order bell, if the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in one or two predetermined operating sequences, the first minor winning prize is established regardless of the operation timing. If the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in another order of operation, depending on the timing of the operation, a small winning combination will be established or the transitional number will stop on the effective line. By the way, if the middle bell is won, the 38th minor winning prize is established regardless of the operation order and timing, and if the no-question bell is won, regardless of the operation order and timing. 1 small role winning is established.

Returning to the description of the reel control process, when it is determined in step S411 that all the reels 32L, 32M and 32R are stopped, payout determination process is performed in step S413. The payout determination process is a process of setting the number of medals to be paid out, with one of the conditions being that the combinations of winning symbols are arranged on the activated line. In the payout determination process, a combination of symbols formed on the active line is derived from the symbol numbers of the stopped symbols stopped on the lower stages of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, and whether or not winning is established on the active line is determined. judge. When the winning is established, it is further determined whether or not the winning combination corresponds to the winning flag set in the winning flag storage area 106a. When the winning combination corresponds to the winning flag, the winning combination and the number of payouts corresponding to the winning combination are set in a payout information storage area provided in the RAM 106.例文帳に追加On the other hand, when the winning combination does not correspond to the winning flag, the slot machine 10 is placed in an error state and an abnormality occurrence process is performed to report the occurrence of an error. This error state is maintained until the reset switch 72 is operated.

After performing the payout determination process, a winning result corresponding process is performed in step S414. In the winning result handling process, processing for shifting the game state based on the winning result, etc. are performed. The winning result handling process will be described later in detail.

After the winning result handling process is performed, the second section display process is performed in step S415. The second section display processing is processing related to display control of the instruction monitor 68, and such processing will be described later in detail. After that, in step S416, a winning result command is set so that the display control device 81 can grasp the winning combination in the current game, and the reel control process is terminated.

Next, the outline of the medal payout process in step S213 will be described.

In the medal payout process, it is determined whether or not the number of payouts set in the payout information storage area is zero. If the number of payouts is 0, it means that it has been determined in the previous payout determination process that a minor win has not been established. In such a case, it is determined whether or not any one of the first re-game winning to the eighth re-game winning has been established based on the winning combination set in the payout determination process. When none of the re-game wins are established, the medal payout processing is terminated as it is, and when any of the re-game wins are established, the re-game setting processing is performed to change the game state to the re-game state. , to end the medal payout process. In the above-described start waiting process (step S204), the automatic input process is performed when it is determined that the current game state is the replay state.

On the other hand, if the number of payouts set in the payout information storage area is not 0, the same number of medals as the number of payouts is paid out, and the medal payout process is terminated. Specifically, when the count value of the credit counter does not reach the upper limit (the number of accumulated medals is 50), the number of payouts is added to the count value of the credit counter, and the value after the addition is added. It is displayed on the credit display section 60 . When the count value of the credit counter reaches the upper limit, or when the count value reaches the upper limit while adding the number of payouts, the medal payout rotary plate is driven to eject the medals from the hopper device 51. It is paid out to the medal receiving tray 50 through the exit 49. - 特許庁In addition, in the medal payout process, a process of changing the number of payouts displayed on the payout number display section 62 in accordance with the payout of medals is also performed. Further, when the current gaming state is the BB state, the processing of subtracting the number of payouts from the value of the counter for the number of remaining payouts, which will be described later, and the remaining number of payouts displayed on the remaining number of payouts display section 61 is performed. .

Next, the RT state processing of step S214 will be described based on the flowchart of FIG.

In step S501, it is determined whether or not the game state is the fourth RT state by confirming whether or not the fourth RT setting flag is set in the state information storage area 106c of the RAM106. If it is in the fourth RT state, the process advances to step S502 to perform subtraction processing of the number of fixed RT games. Although a detailed description will be given later, the fourth RT state is an RT state in which the number of executable games is predetermined, and the process of step S502 is a process for subtracting the remaining number of executable games. be. In subsequent step S503, it is determined whether or not the number of remaining executable games in the fourth RT state has become 0 based on the processing result of step S502. If it becomes 0, the process of clearing the fourth RT setting flag is executed in step S504, and then the RT state process is terminated. By performing the process of step S504, the game state shifts to the normal game state. If a negative determination is made in step S503, the RT state processing is terminated. In this case, the fourth RT state continues.

If a negative determination is made in step S501, it is determined in step S505 whether or not the transition roll has stopped on the active line. When the transition roll has stopped, the process proceeds to step S506, and it is determined whether or not the current game state is the normal game state. When the current gaming state is the normal gaming state, the first RT setting flag is set in the state information storage area 106c of the RAM 106 in step S507. After that, this process is terminated. If it is determined in step S505 that the transitional number has not stopped on the activated line, the process proceeds to step S508, and the second replay winning is determined based on the winning combination set in the previous payout determination process. Determine whether or not it is established. If the second replay win is established, the RT setting flag set in the state information storage area 106c is cleared in step S509, and the first RT setting flag is set in step S507. After that, this process is terminated. In addition, when the transition rolls stop on the activated line under a game state other than the fourth RT state and the normal game state, the RT setting flag set in the state information storage area 106c is cleared in step S509. , the first RT setting flag is set in step S507, and the process ends.

When the first RT setting flag is set in step S507, the game state shifts to the first RT state. Then, in step S302 of the lottery process, it is determined that the current gaming state is the first RT state based on the fact that the first RT setting flag is set in the state information storage area 106c, and the lottery table for the first RT state is selected. do.

FIG. 22 is a lottery table for the first RT state selected in the "setting 3" first RT state. When compared with the lottery table for the normal game state (see FIG. 17), the lottery table for the first RT state has different point values PV for IV=1 to 5, and the same point value PV for the other index values IV. is set. Therefore, when judging whether or not a role is appropriate using such a lottery table, the probability of winning at IV=6 to 58 is equal to each winning probability in the normal game state, and winning at IV=1. The probability of winning is about 1/67.0, and the probability of winning when IV=2 to 5 is about 1/32.8. The odds of not winning any hand are about 1 in 1.94.

Here, as shown in FIG. 22 , when IV=1 is won, normal replay is won, and when IV=2 is won, first promotion replay 1 is won, and IV If it is won at IV = 3, it will be won in the 1st promotion replay 2, if it is won at IV = 4, it will be won in the 1st promotion replay 3, and it will be won at IV = 5 If you do, you will win the first promotion replay 4. The probability of winning at any of IV=1-5 is about 1 in 7.30. The probability of winning the normal replay under the normal game state is also about 1/7.30. In other words, when the game state shifts to the 1st RT state, each type of small combination, replay, and bonus is won with the same probability as in the normal game state, and a prize-winning mode in which the benefit of replay is given. changes to something different from the normal game state. More specifically, in the normal game state, only the first re-game winning that does not transition to the game state is established, and in the first RT state, in addition to the first re-game winning, the third re-game winning that shifts to the second RT state is established. To establish.

In the second stop information setting process (step S409), a stop command is generated when winning the first promotion replay 1 to the first promotion replay 4 in addition to winning the pressing order bell described above. Stop information is set so as to change the winning mode established by the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44 that are turned on.

FIG. 23(a) is an explanatory diagram showing the correspondence relationship between the winning combination, the order of operation of the stop switches 42 to 44, and the winning mode established. When winning the first promotion replay 1 to 4 The third replay win is always established. In the first promotion replay 1 to the first promotion replay 4, the third replay is associated with one operation order among the six operation orders, and the first replay corresponds to the other operation orders. attached.

In addition, in the first promotion replays 2 to 4, in addition to the first replay and the third replay, the sixth replay, the seventh replay, and the eighth replay are also distributed as winning combinations. However, these 6th to 8th replays are not associated with any of the above 6 types of operation sequences. Therefore, in the sixth to eighth replays, even if the first promoted replays 2 to 4 are won, no prizes are won regardless of the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44.例文帳に追加

More specifically, in the first promotion replays 1 to 4, the first promotion replay 1 is divided into the first replay and the third replay, and the first promotion replay 2 is divided into the first replay and the third replay. In addition to the 3rd replay, the 6th replay is distributed, in the first promotion replay 3, the 7th replay is distributed in addition to the 1st replay and the 3rd replay, and in the first promotion replay 4 Although the 8th replay is distributed in addition to the 1st replay and the 3rd replay, in any of the 1st promotion replays 1 to 4, the winning replays are the 1st replay and the 3rd replay. It is one of the games. This is to make it difficult to understand the order of operations in which the third replay win is established. That is, for example, if there is one type of first promotion replay, there is also one type of operation sequence corresponding to the third replay winning, and when the first promotion replay is won, the third replay winning is intentionally established. This is because it may be possible to Note that this relationship is not limited to the relationship of the first promotion replays 1 to 4, and the same can be said for other overlapping roles.

Returning to the description of the RT state process, if it is determined in step S508 that the second regame winning has not been established, the process proceeds to step S510, based on the winning combination set in the previous payout determination process, It is determined whether or not the third replay win has been established. When the third replay winning prize is established, the RT setting flag set in the state information storage area 106c is cleared in step S511, and the second RT setting flag is set in step S512, and this processing ends. do.

When the second RT setting flag is set in step S512, the game state shifts to the second RT state. Then, in step S302 of the lottery process, it is determined that the current gaming state is the second RT state based on the fact that the second RT setting flag is set in the state information storage area 106c, and the lottery table for the second RT state is selected. do.

FIG. 24 is a lottery table for the second RT state selected in the second RT state of "setting 3". When the second RT state lottery table is compared with the first RT state lottery table (see FIG. 22), the point values PV for IV=1 to 10, 13, and 14 are different, and the other index values IV are the same. point value PV is set. Therefore, when judging whether a role is appropriate using such a lottery table, the probability of winning at IV=11, 12, 15 to 58 is equal to each winning probability in the first RT state, and IV=1. The probability of winning is about 1/13.2 when IV = 2 to 5, and the probability of winning when IV = 6 to 8 is about 1/15.5. , IV=9 and 10, the probability of winning is approximately 1/8.90. The probability of winning when IV=13 is about 1/6.90, and the probability of winning when IV=14 is about 1/131. The odds of not winning any hand are about 1 in 150. That is, in the case of shifting to the second RT state, the probability of losing is lower than in the normal game state and the first RT state, which is advantageous to the player. In addition, in the second RT state, in addition to the first re-game winning that does not change the game state, the second re-game winning that shifts to the first RT state, the fourth re-game winning that shifts to the third RT state, and the fifth re-game winning The winning, the 11th re-game winning and the 12th re-game winning that shift to the 4th RT state are established.

In the stop information second setting process (step S409), in addition to the case where the above-described first promotion replay 1 to first promotion replay 4 are won, fall replay 1 to fall replay 3, second promotion replay 1, and second promotion replay 1 Stop information is set so as to change the winning mode established by the order of operation of the stop switches 42 to 44 that generate the stop command even when winning the 2 promotion replay 2, transition replay 1 and transition replay 2.例文帳に追加

FIG. 23(b) is an explanatory diagram showing the correspondence between winning combinations, the order of operation of the stop switches 42 to 44, and the winning modes established. When fall replay 1 to fall replay 3 are won, regardless of the operation timing of the stop switches 42 to 44, the first replay win or the second replay win is established without fail. When the second promotion replay 1 is won, regardless of the operation timing of the stop switches 42 to 44, any one of the first regame winning, the fourth replay winning, and the fifth replay winning is established without fail. . When the second promotion replay 2 is won, regardless of the operation timing of the stop switches 42-44, the first re-game winning or the fourth re-game winning is established without fail.

Incidentally, the number attached to the fourth replay in the figure corresponds to the symbol combination when the fourth replay win is established. "1" corresponds to a symbol combination of loose stitches, and "2" corresponds to a symbol combination of red 7, red 7, and black BAR middle stop (see FIG. 11). For example, when the left stop switch 42 is operated first when the second promotion replay 1 is won, the symbol combination that becomes a loose eye stops and the fourth replay win is established, or the red 7・The red 7 and black BAR middle stop symbol combination is stopped, and the 4th replay win is established.

Further, as shown in FIG. 23(d), when transition replays 1 and 2 are won, the first replay win, second replay win, And the 11th re-game winning prize or the 12th re-game winning prize is established. In other words, when transition replays 1 and 2 are won, regardless of the operation timing of the stop switches 42 to 44, the first replay winning prize is established and the game state transition does not occur, or the second replay Either a win is established and a shift to the 1st RT state occurs, or an 11th regame win or a 12th regame win is established and a shift to the 4th RT state occurs.

Returning to the description of the RT state process, if it is determined in step S510 that the third replay winning has not been established, the process proceeds to step S513, based on the winning combination set in the previous payout determination process, It is determined whether or not the fourth re-game winning prize or the fifth re-game winning prize has been established. When the fourth re-game winning prize or the fifth re-game winning prize is established, the RT setting flag set in the state information storage area 106c is cleared in step S514, and the third RT setting flag is set in step S515. and terminate this process.

When the third RT setting flag is set in step S515, the game state shifts to the third RT state. Then, in step S302 of the lottery process, it is determined that the current game state is the 3RT state based on the fact that the 3RT setting flag is set in the state information storage area 106c, and the lottery table for the 3RT state is selected. do.

FIG. 25 is a lottery table for the 3rd RT state selected in the 3rd RT state of "setting 3". When compared with the lottery table for the 2nd RT state (see FIG. 24), the lottery table for the 3rd RT state has different point values PV for IV=9 to 12, and the same point values PV for the other index values IV. is set. Therefore, when judging whether a role is appropriate using such a lottery table, the probability of winning at IV=1-8, 13-58 is equal to each winning probability in the second RT state, IV=9, 10 , and the probability of winning at IV=11 and 12 is about 1/7.00. The odds of not winning any hand are about 1 in 150. In other words, when the game state shifts to the 3rd RT state, each role type of small combination, replay, and bonus is won with the same probability as in the 2nd RT state, and a prize-winning mode in which the privilege of replay is given. changes to something different from the second RT state. More specifically, in the 3rd RT state, the 1st re-game winning that does not shift the game state, the 2nd re-game winning that shifts to the 1st RT state, the 11th re-game winning and the 12th re-game winning that shifts to the 4th RT state. In addition to , the 6th re-game winning, 7th re-game winning, 8th re-game winning in which the game state does not shift, and the 3rd re-game winning in which the game state shifts to the 2nd RT state are established.

In the second stop information setting process (step S409), even when BAR replay 1 and BAR replay 2 are won, the winning mode established by the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44 that generated the stop command is changed. Set stop information as much as possible.

FIG. 23(c) is an explanatory diagram showing the correspondence between the winning combination, the order of operation of the stop switches 42 to 44, and the winning mode established. When the BAR replay 1 is won, regardless of the operation timing of the stop switches 42 to 44, any of the first replay winning prize, the sixth replay winning prize, the seventh replay winning prize, or the third replay winning prize. is always established. When the BAR replay 2 is won, regardless of the operation timing of the stop switches 42 to 44, any one of the first replay winning prize, the sixth replay winning prize, the eighth replay winning prize, and the third replay winning prize. is always established.

Returning to the description of the RT state process, if it is determined in step S513 that the fourth re-game winning prize or the fifth re-game winning prize has not been established, the process proceeds to step S516, and the winning prize set in the previous payout determination processing Based on the established hand, it is determined whether or not the 11th re-game winning prize or the 12th re-game winning prize has been established. When neither the 11th re-game winning nor the 12th re-game winning has been established, the RT state processing is terminated as it is. When the 11th re-game winning prize or the 12th re-game winning prize is established, the RT setting flag set in the state information storage area 106c is cleared in step S517, and the 4th RT setting flag is set in step S518. Then, in step S519, fixed RT game number setting processing is executed, and then this processing ends. Step S519 is processing for setting the number of games that can be executed in the fourth RT state, and this processing will be described in detail later along with the description of the fourth RT state.

As described above, by the RT state processing, transitions among the normal game state, the first RT state, the second RT state, the third RT state and the fourth RT state are performed. FIG. 26 collectively shows the presence or absence of transitions between states, along with the transition triggers and termination triggers for each state.

If the gaming state is the normal gaming state, the 1st RT state and the 4th RT state, the probability of winning any replay except for IV = 48 to 51 (Special Rep A duplicate 1, etc.) that will be duplicated with the bonus (hereinafter (also referred to simply as the "replay probability" in the discussion of ) is approximately 1 in 7.30. On the other hand, in the 2nd RT state and the 3rd RT state, the replay probability is about 1/1.53, and it is possible to play the game while suppressing the decrease of medals compared to the normal game state, the 1st RT state and the 4th RT state. Become. The state is shifted from the normal game state to the first RT state by stopping the transition roll, and the state is shifted to the second RT state by winning the third regame. In the second RT state, when the second re-game winning is established, the state is shifted to the first RT state, and basically, the state stays in the normal game state and the first RT state in the normal time. In the following description, the normal game state is also referred to as the 0RT state for comparison with the 1RT state to the 4th RT state.

In the second RT state and the third RT state, the RT state continues until the second regame winning is established. The configuration for preventing the establishment of the second re-game winning will be described later, but the number of staying games in the second RT state and the third RT state is variable as the number of games until the second re-game winning is established. Therefore, these second and third RT states are also referred to as infinite RT states. On the other hand, the 4th RT state, which is shifted by the 11th re-game winning or the 12th re-game winning, is a fixed type in which the number of staying games is 10 games or 30 games, and is also called a fixed RT state.

In the following description, the 0RT state (normal game state) and the 1st RT state are referred to as normal RT states in order to compare with the infinite RT state and fixed RT state. Also, in order to make it easier to understand that the replay probability is higher in the 2nd RT state and the 3rd RT state than in the 0th RT state, the 1st RT state and the 4th RT state, the 2nd RT state and the 3rd RT state are referred to as high RT states. The 0 RT state, the 1 RT state and the 4 RT state are also referred to as low RT states.

By the way, the 0RT state and the 1st RT state are also included in the infinite RT state because the number of games in which they stay is variable, but they are classified as described above for easier explanation.

In the normal RT state and the infinite RT state (the 0th RT state to the 3rd RT state), it is possible to move from the staying state to another infinite RT state, while in the fixed RT state (the 4th RT state), the infinite RT state It is not possible to move to In addition, while the transition to the fixed RT state (4th RT state) does not occur in the normal RT state (0RT state, 1st RT state), it is set so that it can occur in the infinite RT state (2nd RT state, 3rd RT state). It is

Incidentally, in the present slot machine 10, the fourth RT state has a characteristic configuration, and in the following description, the fourth RT state may also be referred to as a special RT state.

Next, the bonus state processing in step S215 will be described with reference to the flow chart of FIG.

First, in step S601, it is determined whether or not the current game state is the bonus state, that is, whether or not the current game state is the BB state or the CB state. If it is not in the bonus state, bonus determination processing shown in steps S602 to S613 is performed.

In the bonus determination process, in step S602, it is determined whether or not any one of the first BB winning flag, second BB winning flag and CB winning flag is set. If any winning flag is set, the process proceeds to step S603, and it is determined whether or not CB winning has been established based on the winning combination set in the previous payout determination process. When CB winning is established, a CB setting flag is set in the state information storage area 106c in step S604. In step S605, 15 is set in a remaining payout number counter for counting the number of remaining medals that can be paid out during the bonus state provided in the state information storage area 106c. By performing the processing of steps S604 and S605, the game state shifts to the CB state.

Here, CB and CB state will be briefly described.

"Red Bell" or "White Bell" symbols on the left reel 32L, "Red Bell" symbols on the middle reel 32M, "Watermelon" symbols, "First Replay" symbols or "Black BAR" symbols on the right reel 32R , stops on the active line, it is a CB prize. The CB symbols are arranged on each of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R such that the interval between the CB symbols is 4 symbols or less. Therefore, when the CB is won, the CB prize is established regardless of the operation order and operation timing of the stop switches 42-44.

The main controller 101 determines that the gaming state is the CB state when the CB setting flag is set in the state information storage area 106c. Then, in step S205 of normal processing, it is determined whether or not the number of bets on medals has reached "2" instead of "3". is set as a valid line.

At step S302 of the lottery process, a CB state lottery table is selected. Although illustration of the lottery table for the CB state is omitted, in the lottery table for the CB state, "0" is set as the point value PV for IV=1 to 52, and "16384" is set as the point value for IV=55 to 58. is set (see FIG. 17, etc. for the correspondence between the IV and the winning combination). Therefore, in the CB state, the probability of winning CB small and medium hand 1 (probability of winning when IV=55) is about 1/4.00, and the probability of winning CB small and medium hand 2 (IV=56 The probability of winning at the time of ) is about 1/4.00, and the probability of winning the CB small and medium role 3 (the probability of winning at IV = 57) is about 1/4.00, and the CB The probability of winning the small and medium combination 4 (probability of winning when IV=58) is about 1/4.00. No outlier events occur.

FIG. 28(a) is an explanatory diagram showing the correspondence between winning combinations, the order of operation of the stop switches 42 to 44, and the winning modes established. Although detailed explanation is omitted, even if any of the CB small and medium winning combination 1 to CB small and medium winning combination 4 is won, regardless of the operation order and operation timing of the stop switches 42 to 44, some kind of small winning combination will be won. It will definitely come true. Since the CB state is a 2-bet game, 15 medals will be awarded when the 1st minor winning combination, 27th minor winning combination, 31st minor winning combination, 36th minor winning combination to 38th minor winning combination are established. When the payout is performed and the 2nd minor role winning ~ 26th minor role winning, the 28th minor role winning ~ 30th minor role winning, and the 32nd minor role winning ~ 35th minor role winning are established, 14 sheets Medals are paid out. In other words, 14 or 15 medals are always paid out when the state is shifted to the CB state.

In place of or in addition to the CB as the winning hand and the CB state as the gaming state, a single bonus (SB) that enables the execution of one game (JAC game) as the winning hand, and the winning of the single bonus (winning a prize) ) may be provided.

Returning to the description of the bonus state processing, if it is determined in step S603 that the CB winning has not been established, it means that the bonus winning flag other than the CB has been set. In such a case, the RT setting flag set in the state information storage area 106c is cleared in step S608, and it is determined in step S609 whether or not the 1st BB prize or the 2nd BB prize has been established.

Then, when any BB prize is established, the BB winning flag set in the winning flag storage area 106a of the RAM 106 is cleared in step S610, and BB is set in the status information storage area 106c in step S611. flag is set. Thereafter, in step S612, 216 is set in the remaining payout number counter, and 216 is displayed on the remaining payout number display section 61. FIG. The numerical value set in step S612 is a numerical value corresponding to the maximum number of payouts in the BB state, and the BB state is terminated on condition that medals equal to or greater than the numerical value are paid out in the BB state.

By performing the processing of steps S610 to S612, the game state shifts to the BB state. Then, in step S302 of the lottery process, it is determined that the current game state is the BB state based on the fact that the BB setting flag is set in the state information storage area 106c, and the corresponding BB state lottery table is selected. .

FIG. 29 is a lottery table for the BB state selected in the BB state transitioning to the 1st BB or the 2nd BB. In the BB state lottery table, "0" is set as the point value PV for IV=1-30 and 34-58, and "21845" is set as the point value for IV=31-33. Therefore, in the BB state, the probability of winning the first role in BB (probability of winning when IV = 31) is about 1/1.11, and the probability of winning the second role in BB (IV = 32) is about 1/20.0, and the probability of winning the 3rd role in BB (probability of winning when IV=33) is about 1/20.0. becomes. The odds of not winning any hand are about 1 in 65500.

The winning probabilities of the 1st BB hand, the 2nd BB hand and the 3rd BB hand are the winning probabilities common to the 1st BB and the 2nd BB. In addition, the winning probabilities of the 1st BB hand, the 2nd BB hand, and the 3rd BB hand are common winning probabilities regardless of the timing of the transition to the BB state of the 1st BB or the 2nd BB. The probability of winning the 3rd role in BB in the 1st BB based on 1 win in the special reply A and the 3rd role in BB in the 1 BB based on 1 win in the special reply AB is the same probability. That is, in any BB state, the lottery processing is performed with reference to the common BB state lottery table.

FIG. 28(b) is an explanatory diagram showing the correspondence between winning combinations, the order of operation of the stop switches 42 to 44, and the winning modes established. As described above, the first minor winning combination is a winning mode that can be established regardless of the operation timing of the stop switches 42-44. Therefore, if the 1st role in the BB is won, any of the 1st minor role winning, 39th minor role winning, or 40th minor role winning will be awarded regardless of the operation order and operation timing of the stop switches 42-44. It will definitely come true. In addition, the ninth regame winning is also a winning mode that can be established regardless of the operation timing of the stop switches 42-44. Therefore, when the second winning combination in the BB is won, the ninth re-game win is always established regardless of the operation order and operation timing of the stop switches 42-44.

In the 3rd combination of BB, in which the 9th re-game win and the 10th re-game win are possible, which re-game win is established depends on the operation timing of the stop switches 42-44. When the stop operation is performed, if all of them can win a prize, stop drive control is performed so that the replay with a smaller number of slips wins a prize. More specifically, the combination of symbols for winning the ninth replay and tenth replay is common to both the "first replay" symbol and the "second replay" symbol for both the middle reel 32M and the right reel 32R. However, the left reel 32L is different. That is, on the left reel 32L, the target symbols for the ninth replay are the "red bell" symbol and the "white bell" symbol, while the target symbols for the tenth replay are the "youth" symbol and the "watermelon" symbol. .

For example, in a 3-bet game, when the left stop switch 42 is operated to stop at the timing when the fourth "cherry" symbol to the seventh "red bell" symbol on the left reel 32L reach the upper row, the ninth replay is performed. Both the seventh "red bell" symbol, which is the target symbol, and the eighth "watermelon" symbol, which is the target symbol of the tenth replay, can be stopped at the upper stage on the activated line. In this case, stop drive control is performed so as to stop the 7th "red bell" symbol with a small number of slips on the upper stage. As a result, the ninth re-game win can be established instead of the tenth re-game win. In addition, when the left stop switch 42 is operated to stop at the timing when the 9th "red 7" symbol to the 12th "white bell" symbol reach the upper stage on the left reel 32L, the 13th "youth The ninth re-game is set so that the ninth re-game is more likely to win than the 10th re-game, for example, the 12th 'white bell' symbol is driven and controlled to stop at the upper stage instead of the ' symbol. In other words, if the 10th replay is to be won, the 0th "Youth" symbol, the 8th "Watermelon" symbol, and the 13th "Youth" symbol reach the upper stage of the left reel 32L. It is necessary to perform the stop operation of the stop switch 42, and if it is other timing, the ninth regame winning will be established.

Since the BB state is a 3-bet game, the 1st winning combination is won in the BB, and if the 1st minor winning combination, the 39th minor winning combination, and the 40th minor winning combination are established, 9 medals are paid out. . Also, when the second combination is won during BB, the ninth re-game winning is established, and even when the third combination during BB is won, the ninth re-game winning is often established. In other words, in the BB state, either the bell winning such as the first small winning combination or the replay winning such as the ninth replay is frequently established. When a replay win is established, no medals are paid out, but a replay is given, and the next game can be played without medals. Since the probability of being out in the BB state is about 1/65500, it can be said that the BB state is a game state in which 9 medals are paid out with a very high probability.

If a negative determination is made in step S609 and any BB prize is established, a carryover command is set in step S613. The carry-over command is a command sent to the display control device 81 in order to make it known that the bonus winning has not been established in the bonus winning game and a so-called carry-over state has occurred, and the carry-over command is a timer interrupt process. is output to the display control device 81 in the command output process (step S110).

As already explained, winning other bonuses is restricted in games played in the carryover state. More specifically, in the lottery table for the normal game state (FIG. 17), if a winning combination with a bonus of IV=34 to 51 (1st BB, 2nd BB, CB) is won, the bonuses corresponding to these bonuses are selected. Winning flag is not set. Therefore, for example, when winning a small combination of IV = 34 to 51 or a duplicate combination with a replay, the winning flag for each small combination or replay is set, but the winning flag corresponding to the bonus is set. It is not set, and only small wins are valid. In other words, the carry-over state can also be said to be a state in which bonus lottery is restricted.

When the gaming state has shifted to the CB state or the BB state, an affirmative determination is made in step S601, and end determination processing is performed in step S614. In the end determination process, it is determined whether or not the value of the counter for the number of remaining payouts has become 0, and when it has become 0, the process of clearing the CB setting flag or the BB setting flag is performed. Also, in the end determination process, when the BB setting flag is cleared, the end flag indicating that the BB state has ended in the current game is set. Note that the end determination processing will be described later in detail.

As shown in steps S602 to S614, when the CB is won and the CB prize is established, the CB setting flag is set without clearing the RT setting flag. Therefore, when the CB setting flag is cleared, that is, when the CB state ends, the game state is returned to the game state when the CB winning was established. For example, when the CB winning is established under the normal game state, the normal gaming state is restored after the CB state is ended, and when the CB winning is established under the 3RT state, the 3RT state is established after the CB state is ended. return to On the other hand, if the 1st BB or the 2nd BB is won, the RT setting flag is cleared in step S608 regardless of whether the corresponding BB prize is established. Therefore, when the BB setting flag is cleared, that is, when the BB state ends, even if the 1st BB prize is established under the 2nd RT state, the normal game state is entered. When transitioning to the CB state, the player can expect an increase of 13 (=15-2) or 25 (=14-2+15-2) medals until the end of the CB state. When transitioning to the BB state, the player can expect an increase of approximately 144 (=9×24-3×24) medals until the BB state ends.

Incidentally, in the BB state, if the 2nd BB hand or the 3rd BB hand is won and a replay is awarded, the remaining payout counter is not decremented. In other words, the number of times the 2nd BB hand or the 3rd BB hand is won in the BB state does not affect the number of medals that can be expected in the BB state.

When none of the first BB winning flag, second BB winning flag, and CB winning flag are set (NO in step S602), and none of the first BB winning prize, second BB winning prize, and CB winning prize are established, carry over. When a command is set (when the processing of step S613 is executed), when a predetermined value is set in the remaining payout number counter in steps S605 and S612, when end determination processing is performed in step S614, , the process advances to step S606 to set the status command. Here, the state command is a command sent to the display control device 81 to grasp the game state at the end of the game (that is, the game state of the next game). Set the status command corresponding to the set flag set in 106c. After setting the state command, in step S607, an external signal setting process for setting an external signal to be output from the external centralized terminal board 121 to the outside of the slot machine 10 is performed. After that, this process is terminated.

<Outline of game state transition and display mode>
Here, the game state transition will be described with reference to FIG. Illustration of the CB state is omitted.

When the game state is the BB state, the BB state ends when the number of medals paid out under the BB state reaches 216, and the game state shifts to the normal game state.

When the game state is the normal game state, the game state shifts to the first RT state by stopping the shift roll on the effective line, and the game state shifts to the BB state when the BB prize is established. The transition roll is stopped on the effective line when a game in which the pushing order bell is won is lost. In the lottery process using the lottery table for the normal game state, the first promotion replays 1 to 4 that trigger the transition to the 2nd RT state, and the second promotion replays 1, 2 and 4th RT that trigger the transition to the 3rd RT state. Since the transition replays 1 and 2 that trigger the transition to the state are not won, the normal game state does not transition to the 2nd RT state to the 4th RT state (see FIG. 17).

When the game state is the first RT state, the game state shifts to the second RT state when the third replay win is established. The third replay win is established when one of the first promoted replays 1 to 4 is won and the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in a predetermined order of operation (see FIG. 23(a)). . In the lottery process using the lottery table for the 1st RT state, the second promotion replays 1 and 2 that trigger the transition to the 3rd RT state and the transition replays 1 and 2 that trigger the transition to the 4th RT state are not won. The 1RT state does not transition to the 3rd RT state or the 4th RT state.

Further, when the corresponding BB prize is not established in the game in which each BB winning flag is set, that is, when the BB winning flag is carried over, the game state shifts to the normal game state, and each 1BB winning flag is set. When the corresponding BB prize is established in the set game, the game state shifts to the BB state.

When the gaming state is the second RT state, the gaming state shifts to the third RT state when the fourth re-game winning prize or the fifth re-game winning prize is established. In addition, when the second re-game win is established and when the transition roll is stopped on the activated line, the game state shifts to the first RT state. The fourth replay winning prize and the fifth replay winning prize are established when the second promotion replay 1 or the second promotion replay 2 is won and the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in a predetermined operation order (Fig. 23 (b) )reference). The second replay winning prize is established when one of fall replays 1 to 3 is won and the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in a predetermined order (see FIG. 23(b)). The transition roll is stopped on the effective line when a game in which the pushing order bell is won is lost. In addition, when the corresponding BB prize is not established in the game in which each BB winning flag is set, that is, when the BB winning flag is carried over, the game state shifts to the normal game state, and each BB winning flag is set. When the corresponding BB prize is established in the game in which is set, the game state shifts to the BB state.

When the game state is the 3rd RT state, the game state shifts to the 2nd RT state when the third re-game winning is established. In addition, when the second re-game win is established and when the transition roll is stopped on the activated line, the game state shifts to the first RT state. The third replay win is established when BAR Replay 1 or BAR Replay 2 is won and the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in a predetermined order (see FIG. 23(c)). The second replay winning prize is established when one of fall replays 1 to 3 is won and the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in a predetermined order (see FIG. 23(b)). The transition roll is stopped on the effective line when a game in which the pushing order bell is won is lost. In addition, when the corresponding BB prize is not established in the game in which each winning flag is set, that is, when the BB winning flag is carried over, the game state shifts to the normal game state, and each BB winning flag is set. When the corresponding BB prize is established in the set game, the game state shifts to the BB state.

Further, when the game state is the second RT state or the third RT state, the game state shifts to the fourth RT state when the eleventh regame win or the twelfth regame win is established. The 11th replay winning prize and the 12th replay winning prize are established when transition replay 1 or transition replay 2 is won and the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in a predetermined operation order (see FIG. 23(d)). . As already explained, the fourth RT state is a fixed RT state in which the number of games is fixed. Therefore, even if the number for transition is stopped in the fourth RT state, the transition to the first RT state does not occur. Although the lottery table for the fourth RT state will be described later, the second replay is not won in the fourth RT state. Therefore, the transition to the first RT state caused by the second regame winning does not occur. Further, when the corresponding BB prize is not established in the game in which each BB winning flag is set, that is, when the BB winning flag is carried over, the game state shifts to the normal game state, and each BB winning flag is set. Similar to the first RT state to the third RT state, the game state shifts to the BB state when the corresponding BB prize is established in the set game.

In the slot machine 10, the main controller 101 manages six types of game states: normal game state, first RT state, second RT state, third RT state, fourth RT state, BB state, and CB state. The main controller 101 manages five types of display modes: mode, AT mode (assist time mode), VB mode (virtual bonus mode, pseudo bonus mode), and BB mode.

FIG. 31 is a diagram showing transition of each display mode.

The BB mode is a display mode that shifts when the first BB prize or the second BB prize is established, and ends when the BB state ends. That is, the BB mode is a display mode corresponding to the BB state. Therefore, when shifting to the BB mode, the player can expect an increase of about 144 medals.

When the normal mode is shifted to the BB mode, a lottery for shifting to the AT mode may be performed in the BB mode. If the lottery for shifting to AT mode is won, the mode shifts to AT mode after the BB mode ends. If the lottery for shifting to the AT mode is not won, the mode shifts to the normal mode after the BB mode ends. When the AT mode is shifted to the BB mode, the AT mode is restored after the BB mode ends. When the VB mode is shifted to the BB mode, the VB mode is restored after the BB mode is terminated.

Normal mode is when the push order bell is won, 1st promotion replay 1 to 1st promotion replay 4, fall replay 1 to fall replay 3, 2nd promotion replay 1, 2nd promotion replay 2, BAR replay 1, BAR replay 2. Transition replay 1, transition replay 2 (hereinafter collectively referred to as "push order replay"). This is a display mode in which the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44 is not reported at the time of winning. In the normal mode, a lottery for switching to the AT mode is performed. If the lottery for shifting to AT mode is won, the normal mode shifts to AT mode. The normal mode does not shift to the VB mode.

The normal mode corresponds to each game state of normal game state, 1st RT state, 2nd RT state, 3rd RT state, 4th RT state and CB state. However, in the normal mode, the order of operation of the stop switches 42 to 44 is not notified when the push order bell is won and when the push order replay is won, so it is rare to shift to the 2nd RT state to the 4th RT state. It almost corresponds to the normal game state or the first RT state. In the normal mode, if the game state at that time is the normal game state, the 1st RT state or the 4th RT state, it can be expected that the number of medals will decrease by about 1.59 each time one game is played, and the game state at that time can be expected to decrease by 1.59. In the case of the second RT state to the third RT state, it can be expected that the number of medals decreases by about 0.06 each time one game is played.

The AT mode is a display mode in which the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44 is notified both when the pressing order bell wins and when the pressing order replay wins. LV.AT mode has different transition probabilities to VB mode. 1 mode to LV. It is composed of four AT modes out of four modes, and any AT mode has a higher probability of transition to the VB mode than the normal mode. When the lottery for shifting to VB mode is won, the AT mode is shifted to the VB mode. Shift to VB mode When the game is played a predetermined number of times (for example, 50 times) without winning the lottery, the AT mode shifts to the normal mode.

LV. 1 mode to LV. The 4 modes are set so that the probabilities of winning the lottery for transition to the VB mode are different. More specifically, the probability of winning the lottery to switch to the VB mode is LV. 4 mode is the highest, LV. 1 mode is set to be the lowest, and LV. 1 mode, LV. 2 mode, LV. 3 mode, LV. The order of the 4 modes is set so that the probability of winning the lottery to switch to the VB mode increases.

The AT mode corresponds to each game state of normal game state, 1st RT state, 2nd RT state, 3rd RT state, 4th RT state and CB state. However, in the AT mode, the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44 is notified both when the pressing order bell wins and when the pressing order replay wins. 44 corresponds to the second RT state and the third RT state. In the AT mode, when the game state at that time is the normal game state, the first RT state, or the fourth RT state, it can be expected that the number of medals increases by about 0.61 each time one game is played, and the game state at that time is In the case of the second RT state or the third RT state, it can be expected that the number of medals increases by about 1.90 each time one game is played. Since the AT mode continues at least 50 games after the gaming state shifts to the second RT state, the player can expect an increase of about 100 medals when shifting to the AT mode. In addition, in the AT mode and in the second RT state or the third RT state, if the transition replay 1 or the transition replay 2 is won, the operation order for the first replay win is notified, and the eleventh regame win or the second 12. There are cases where the operation sequence leading to the replay winning prize is announced, and there are cases where the state does not shift to the fourth RT state, and there are cases where it shifts. These configurations will be described in detail later, but in this slot machine 10, the AT mode is terminated by shifting to the fourth RT state.

The VB mode, like the AT mode, is a display mode in which the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44 is notified both when the push order bell wins and when the push order replay wins. The difference between the VB mode and the AT mode is that when the second promotion replay 1 or the second promotion replay 2 is won, in the AT mode the operation order for establishing the first replay winning prize is notified. , in the VB mode, the order of operations for establishing the fourth re-game winning or the fifth re-game winning is announced (see FIG. 23(b)).

The VB mode corresponds to the normal game state, first RT state, second RT state, third RT state, fourth RT state, and CB state. However, in the VB mode, the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44 is notified both when the pressing order bell wins and when the pressing order replay wins. Therefore, the VB mode corresponds to the third RT state when the player operates the stop switches 42 to 44 in the reported operation order. In the VB mode, if the game state at that time is the normal game state, the first RT state, or the fourth RT state, it can be expected that the number of medals will increase by about 0.61 each time one game is played, and the game state at that time can be expected to increase by 0.61. In the case of the second RT state or the third RT state, it can be expected that the number of medals increases by about 1.90 each time one game is played. Since the VB mode continues at least 25 games after the game state shifts to the third RT state, the player can expect an increase of about 50 medals when shifting to the VB mode. In the VB mode as well, when transition replay 1 or transition replay 2 is won, there are cases where transition to the 4th RT state is not made and there are cases where transition is made due to notification of the operation order. The point that the VB mode ends by shifting to the fourth RT state is the same as the AT mode, and such a configuration will also be described in detail later.

Regarding the shift of the display mode when the number of medals possessed by the player increases, the general flow is to shift from the normal mode to the AT mode, and then return from the AT mode to the normal mode. In the AT mode, a lottery for switching to the VB mode is performed, so if a loop occurs in which the AT mode is switched to the VB mode, and then the VB mode is returned to the AT mode, the player expects an increase in the number of owned medals. can.

Also, in AT mode, LV. 1 mode to LV. Four modes are set, and the probability of winning the lottery for transition to the VB mode differs in each AT mode. When shifting from the normal mode to the AT mode, basically LV. 1 mode. LV. 1 mode, a lottery for transition to VB mode is performed, and LV. A lottery for transition to 2 modes is performed. LV. If you win the lottery to switch to 2 mode, LV. 2 mode, and the winning probability of the lottery for shifting to the VB mode is increased. LV. 2 mode, a lottery for transition to VB mode is performed, and LV. A lottery for transition to 3 modes is performed. LV. If you win the lottery to switch to 3 modes, LV. 3 mode, and the winning probability of the lottery for shifting to the VB mode is increased. And LV. 3 mode, a lottery for transition to VB mode is performed, and LV. A lottery for transition to the 4 mode is performed. ATLV. If you win the lottery to switch to 4 mode, LV. 4 mode, and the winning probability of the lottery for shifting to the VB mode is increased.

Therefore, when shifting to AT mode, LV. 1 mode → LV. 2 mode → LV. 3 mode → LV. By promoting the 4 mode and the AT mode, the probability of transition to the VB mode increases, and a loop between the AT mode and the VB mode is likely to occur.

As described above, the slot machine 10 is configured so that the player can increase the number of owned medals in each display mode of the AT mode, VB mode, and BB mode. In conjunction with each display mode, a plurality of states such as a plurality of RT states, a BB state, and a CB state are alternated by winning a prize in each replay or by stopping a transitional result. As described above, depending on the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 43 when the push order replay is won or when the push order bell is won, the corresponding re-game winning is established or the transition roll is stopped. In addition, in the AT mode and VB mode, when the bell is won in the order of pressing, the operation order that enables the establishment of the first minor winning combination is announced, so that an increase in owned medals can be expected.

Here, when the display mode is the AT mode or the VB mode, the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44 is notified when the push order bell or the push order replay is won as described above. There is no notification of the order of operation when winning the order bell or the push order replay. Therefore, the AT mode and the VB mode are more advantageous to the player than the normal mode in terms of whether or not there is notification of the push order bell and the operation order at the time of winning the push order replay. That is, the AT mode and the VB mode are included in the advantageous section, which is a section in which the game can be progressed in an advantageous situation for the player by changing the winning rate of small wins and the like by notifying the operation sequence. . In this slot machine 10, a lottery for transition to AT mode is performed by shifting to an advantageous section, and a transition to AT mode or VB mode can occur. is configured so as not to cause transition to the AT mode or the VB mode.

In contrast to the AT mode transition lottery in the advantageous section, the AT mode transition lottery is not performed in the normal section. The state and the state before winning the AT mode can also be referred to as a chance zone (CZ) as a state in which the transition to the AT mode is likely to occur.

The configuration related to the display mode will be described below.

The configuration related to the display mode can be roughly divided into (1) processing related to the display mode transition lottery, (2) processing for shifting the game state based on the result of the display mode transition lottery, and (3) processing based on the winning result. and (4) processing related to the notification effect on the sub side. The steps will be described in order below.

<Processing related to display mode transition lottery>
<Lottery result handling process>
(1) Display mode transition lottery processing is performed in the lottery result correspondence processing (step S312) of the lottery processing (FIG. 16) by the main controller 101. FIG. Therefore, the lottery result handling process will be described below with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In step S701, it is determined whether or not the advantageous interval flag is set in the flag storage area 106d of the RAM 106 to determine whether the current game is in the advantageous interval. The advantageous section flag is a flag that is set based on winning a lottery for transition to an advantageous section including the AT mode and VB mode, and is cleared when the advantageous section ends. If the advantageous section flag is not set, the process advances to step S702 to execute the advantageous section transition lottery process, and then terminates the lottery result handling process.

In the advantageous section shift lottery process, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 33, first, in step S801, the lottery result of the current game is grasped. Then, in step S802, the advantageous section transition lottery table is acquired from the various table storage area 105a of the ROM 105. FIG. As shown in FIG. 40, the advantageous interval transition lottery table is set so that the transition rate to the advantageous interval (winning probability of the advantageous interval transition lottery) differs according to the lottery result of each game. As shown in FIG. 39, strong cherry, weak cherry, strong watermelon, weak watermelon, chance A, chance B, middle bell, strong cherry overlap 1, weak cherry overlap 1, as shown in FIG. , Strong watermelon overlap 1, weak watermelon overlap 1, chance A overlap 1, chance B overlap 1, middle bell overlap 1, special reply A overlap 1, special reply A overlap 2, single 1st BB, single 2nd BB are set (Hereinafter, these are also collectively referred to as “transition triggers”). These transition triggers have the same point value PV set regardless of the set value, and there is no set difference in winning probability. Also, the probability of winning the lottery for transition to the advantageous section is set so that there is no set difference. On the other hand, strong cherry overlap 2, weak cherry overlap 2, strong watermelon overlap 2, weak watermelon overlap 2, chance A overlap 2, chance B overlap 2, middle bell overlap 2, special reply AB overlap 1, special reply AB overlap 2 are set so that there is a set difference in the winning probability, and the point value PV is set so that setting 1 generally has the lowest winning probability and setting 6 has the highest winning probability (hereinafter, these are collectively referred to as “non-trigger”). Then, in the non-trigger hand having a setting difference in the winning probability, the advantageous section transition lottery is not executed. In other words, the configuration is such that the advantageous interval transition lottery is performed with no set difference in the winning probability for the transition trigger role having the same appearance rate, and the transition rate to the advantageous interval is the same. By doing so, regardless of the set values of the gaming machines that can be installed in multiple gaming halls, the chances of shifting to the advantageous section become equal, and the inequality between players can be eliminated. Become.

After obtaining the lottery table in step S802, the lottery for transition to the advantageous section is executed in step S803. Then, in step S804, it is determined whether or not the transfer lottery has been won. If the transfer lottery has been won, in step S805, the process of setting the above-mentioned advantageous section flag is executed. With this processing, it is possible to make an affirmative determination in step S701 of the lottery result correspondence processing (FIG. 32) for the next game and thereafter. In the subsequent step S806, a process of setting an advantageous zone winning game flag in the various flag storage area 106d is executed. The advantageous zone winning game flag is a flag for the CPU 102 to recognize that the lottery for transition to the advantageous zone has been won in the current game. Then, in step S807, after executing the advantageous section transition winning process, the advantageous section transition lottery process is terminated. The advantageous section transition winning process will be described later in detail.

In the lottery result handling process, if it is determined in step S701 that the advantageous zone flag is set, that is, if the lottery for transition to the advantageous zone has been won before the previous game, the process proceeds to step S703. In step S703, it is determined whether or not either the AT mode winning flag or the AT mode flag is set in the various flag storage area 106d of the RAM 106. FIG. The AT mode winning flag is a flag for the CPU 102 to specify that the lottery for shifting to the AT mode has been won, and is set when the lottery for shifting to the AT mode has been won, and the mode is shifted to the AT mode. A flag that is cleared when The AT mode flag is a flag for the CPU 102 to specify that the display mode is the AT mode. This is a flag that is cleared in special zones (except when shifting to BB mode). When a negative determination is made in step S703, the first special combination process is executed in step S704.

<1st Special Win Process>
The first special combination processing will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In the first special combination process, a transition lottery is performed as to whether or not the display mode should be transitioned to the AT mode. That is, in step S901, the AT mode transition lottery table is acquired from the various table storage area 105a of the ROM 105. FIG. In the AT mode transition lottery table, the probability of transition to AT mode is set according to the type of lottery result (winning combination).

Specifically, in the mode lottery table in the advantageous section stored in the various table storage area 105a, the probability of winning each mode transition lottery depends on the current display mode and the type of game result that triggers the lottery. configured differently.

As shown in FIG. 40, the game results that trigger the mode transition lottery in the advantageous section include normal replays, push order replays, and push order bells in addition to the above-described shift trigger role and non-trigger role. is set. In other words, the lottery for transition to the advantageous section is set so that there is no difference in the transition rate due to the set value, while the lottery for the transition to AT mode, etc. included in the advantageous section has a difference in the transition rate due to the set value. is set so that By doing so, it is possible to diversify the increase/decrease mode and increase rate of medals in the advantageous section while equalizing the chances of transition to the advantageous section. In the following explanation, these normal replays, push order replays, push order bells, transition trigger roles and non-trigger roles are collectively referred to as "specific roles" as the role that triggers the lottery related to the instruction function in the advantageous section. called.

In the AT mode transition lottery table, the winning probability of the transition lottery is set according to the type of the specific combination. Also, in the AT mode transition lottery table, the winning probability of the transition lottery is set to differ depending on the RT state in which the player stays, even for the same type of special combination. As shown in FIG. 40, for example, if the specific combination is a strong cherry, the AT mode shift lottery has a probability of 90% to 100%, while if the specific combination is a weak cherry, it is 30% to 60%. %, and the lower the winning probability (appearance rate) in each game, the easier it is to win the AT mode transition lottery. The configuration in which the winning probability of the shift lottery differs depending on the staying RT state will be described later in detail.

After acquiring the AT mode transition lottery table in step S901, AT mode lottery processing is executed in step S902. In this processing, the lottery counter is obtained from the various counter areas 106e of the RAM 106 and compared with the lottery table obtained in step S901 to perform a lottery for switching to the AT mode.

In step S903, based on the processing result of step S902, it is determined whether or not the lottery for switching to the AT mode has been won. If the lottery for switching to the AT mode is won, in step S904, a process of setting an AT mode winning flag in the various flag storage area 106d is executed. By setting the AT mode winning flag, affirmative determination is made in step S703 in the lottery result handling process (FIG. 32). In the subsequent step S905, a process of clearing the AT non-winning flag in the various flag storage area 106d is executed. The AT non-win flag is a flag that is set when the AT mode transition lottery is not won. In step S905, if the AT non-winning flag is set, it is cleared, and if it is not set, the state is maintained.

In the subsequent step S906, it is determined whether or not the AT mode won this time is the SAT mode. The SAT mode is an AT mode that starts after passing through a special zone for adding on. For example, if the initial number of games in the normal AT mode is 50, in the SAT mode the AT mode is started with the number of games added to the initial number of games of 50 plus the number of games added in the special zone for addition. . Therefore, the normal AT mode and the SAT mode have different advantages for the player, and the SAT mode is more advantageous for the player than the AT mode.

A lottery for transition to SAT mode is performed when a lottery for transition to AT mode is won (when a lottery is won in lottery processing in step S902), and this lottery for transition is set according to the type of transition trigger role and display mode. It is done based on the transition lottery table for the SAT mode that has been set. In the SAT mode transition lottery table, as shown in FIG. 40, the probability of winning the AT mode transition lottery triggered by a strong watermelon is 50% to 100%, and the probability of winning the transition lottery is 5%. Win ~10% SAT mode.

If it is determined in step S906 that the SAT mode has been won, then in step S907 a process of setting a special zone winning flag is executed. If a negative determination is made in step S906, or if the process of step S907 has been executed, the process proceeds to step S908. The processing of steps S908 to S911 is processing for setting the precursor mode.

Omen mode is a mode in which a winning suggestion effect that suggests that you have won an AT mode or the like is likely to occur. . The portent mode continues from 0 game to 32 games, and the number of games to be continued in the portent mode is set to differ depending on the type of winning AT mode or the like and whether or not a bonus is simultaneously won. In addition, when the AT mode and the like are won at the same time as the bonus, the winning notification of the bonus is performed after passing through the omen mode, and after the bonus state ends, the notification that the AT mode etc. was won is announced. done. Further, when the number of portent games is set to 0 games, winning notification is performed without going through the portent mode.

Specifically, in step S908, first, a process of acquiring the precursor game number table from the various table storage area 105a of the ROM 105 is performed. As shown in FIG. 41, the number of precursor games table is set so that the number of precursor games to be selected is different depending on whether or not a win is made at the same time as the bonus. Specifically, for example, when the AT mode is won, if the bonus is simultaneously won, the 0 game is selected at 80% and the 1st to 5th games are selected at 20%, while the bonus is simultaneously selected. If no winning is made, the 0 game is always selected. In addition, when winning the SAT mode, if the bonus is simultaneously won, the 0 game is selected at 30% and the 1st to 5th games are selected at 70%, while if the bonus is not simultaneously won 0 game is always selected. That is, in both the AT mode and the SAT mode, if the bonus is not simultaneously won, the winning notification is performed in the winning game without going through the omen mode. The number of omen mode games is more likely to increase than when the AT mode is won.

It should be noted that the number of predictive games may be varied depending on the game result that triggered the winning. For example, a combination of replay (9th replay) and a bonus, such as Special Rep A Duplication 1 and Special Rep A Duplication 2, is a smaller combination such as Strong Cherry Duplication 1 and Weak Cherry Duplication 1 (Strong Cherry, It may be configured such that an indication mode that is longer than overlapping combination of low cherry, etc.) and bonus is more likely to be selected, or vice versa.

In step S909, based on the precursor game number table obtained in step S908 and lottery counters obtained from the various counter areas 106e of the RAM 106, a lottery process for the number of games in the current precursor mode is performed. Then, in step S910, a process of inputting the number of precursor games to the precursor counters provided in the various counter areas 106e of the RAM 106 is performed. The omen counter is a counter that is decremented by 1 for each game, and when the omen counter reaches 0, the omen mode ends, and winning notification of winning a lottery for shifting to the AT mode or the like is performed.

In step S911, a process of setting the portent command as an output target to the display control device 81, which is a sub-side control device, is executed. The portent command includes information on the lottery result and the number of portent games that triggered the portent mode. Processing on the display control device 81 side based on reception of the portent command will be described later in detail. After executing the process of step S911, the first special combination process is terminated.

If it is determined in step S903 that the lottery for shifting to AT mode has not been won, the process advances to step S912 to execute the first process when AT is not won, and then the first special combination process is terminated. In the present embodiment, when a lottery for transition to the AT mode is performed, if the transition lottery is not won, then the advantageous section is terminated, and the first process when AT mode is not won is This is a process for ending such an advantageous section. The AT non-winning first process will be described later in detail.

Returning to the description of the lottery result handling process (FIG. 32), if the determination in step S703 is affirmative, the process proceeds to step S705. In step S705, it is determined whether or not either the VB mode winning flag or the VB mode flag is set in the various flag storage area 106d of the RAM 106. FIG. The VB mode winning flag is a flag that is set when winning the VB mode transition lottery and is cleared when shifting to the VB mode. The VB mode flag is a flag for the CPU 102 to specify that the display mode is the VB mode, is set when shifting to the VB mode, and is cleared when the VB mode ends. If a negative determination is made in step S705, then in step S706 a second special combination process is executed. Also, if the determination in step S705 is affirmative, then in step S707, the third special combination process is executed.

<Second Special Win Process>
The second special combination processing will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In the second special winning process, an addition lottery for the AT mode is performed, and a transition lottery for whether or not to shift the display mode to the VB mode or the addition specialized zone is performed. It should be noted that adding means adding (increasing) the number of continuous games (remaining number) such as AT mode, and the number of additional games corresponds to the value added (increased value) to the number of continuous games. . Further, the zone specializing in addition indicates a state in which the number of continuous AT mode games is increased with a high probability over a plurality of games. In addition, in the second special winning process, an AT mode level promotion lottery is performed, and a process for increasing the number of continuous AT mode games is performed.

That is, in step S1001, a process of grasping the AT mode level is performed. As already explained, in this embodiment, LV. 1 mode to LV. Four AT mode levels of four modes are provided, and each level has a different probability of transition to the VB mode. Therefore, in step S1001, if the current AT mode level is LV. 1 mode to LV. 4 modes are determined.

In step S1002, the VB mode lottery table corresponding to the AT mode level ascertained in step S1001 is obtained from the table storage area 105a of the ROM 105. FIG. In the VB mode lottery table, the probability of transition to the VB mode is set according to the type of game result that triggers the lottery. As shown in FIG. 40, for example, between strong cherry 1 and weak cherry, the probability of transition to the VB mode is set higher for strong cherry 1 than for weak cherry. Also, in the VB mode lottery table for each level, the probabilities of transition to the VB mode are different as a whole. LV.1 than that of 1 mode. The LV. LV.2 than that of 2 modes. The LV.3 mode has a higher probability of transition to the VB mode. LV. The four modes are set so that the probability of transition to the VB mode is higher.

In step S1003, the table acquired in step S1002 and the lottery counters acquired from the various counter areas 106e of the RAM 106 are used to perform a VB mode transition lottery. Then, in step S1004, it is determined whether or not the result of the lottery in step S1003 corresponds to VB mode winning. In the present embodiment, when a VB mode shift lottery is conducted with a combination of a bonus combination as a trigger, the VB mode shift lottery is not won. In other words, the transition to the BB mode and the transition to the VB mode are prevented from being duplicated as much as possible, so that the advantages of overlapping roles with these bonuses are not too high.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S1004, a process of setting a VB mode winning flag in the various flag storage area 106d of the RAM 106 is performed in step S1005. After that, in steps S1006 to S1009, processing for setting the number of precursor games is performed. That is, the number of precursor games table is acquired in step S1006, the number of precursor games is drawn in step S1007, the number of precursor games is set in step S1008, and the precursor command is set in step S1009. End the role process.

If it is determined in step S1004 that the result of the VB mode lottery process is not VB mode winning, the process proceeds to step S1010. Steps S1010 to S1013 are processes for upgrading the AT mode level.

In step S1010, an AT mode promotion lottery process is performed. In this process, a promotion lottery table is acquired from the various table storage area 105 a of the ROM 105 and a lottery counter is acquired from the various counter areas 106 e of the RAM 106 . A plurality of promotion lottery tables are provided according to AT mode levels. 1 mode table, LV. 2 mode table, LV. Tables for 3 modes and a total of 3 (the promotion lottery is not performed when staying in LV.4 mode) are provided. In each table, the probability of winning the promotion lottery is set according to the type of game result that triggers the lottery. For example, between strong cherries and weak cherries, the probability of winning the promotion lottery is set higher for strong cherries than for weak cherries. Also, in the table for each AT mode, LV. LV.1 than the table for 1 mode. The LV. LV. than the table for 2 modes. The table for 3 modes is set so that the promotion probability is lower, and as the AT mode level is promoted, it is set so that it becomes more difficult to be promoted to the next level.

In step S1011, it is determined whether or not the result of the lottery in step S1010 was promotion winning. In the case of promotion winning, AT mode promotion processing is performed in step S1012. In this processing, the level flags provided in the various flag storage area 106d of the RAM 106 are rewritten to a level flag one level higher than the level flag corresponding to the current AT mode level. Thereafter, in step S1013, a process of setting the promotion command as an object to be output to the display control device 81 is performed. The promotion command includes information on the AT mode to be promoted. Upon receiving the promotion command, the display control device 81 controls the auxiliary display section 65 and the like so as to perform an effect for the AT mode of the level to be promoted. As an effect for the AT mode in the auxiliary display section 65, for example, different background color effects are set according to the level of the AT mode. In addition to notifying that the level has been promoted, control is performed so that the background color for the AT mode is performed in accordance with the level of the destination of the promotion.

When it is determined in step S1011 that the promotion lottery is not won, or after the processing of step S1013 is executed, processing for adding the number of continuous games in AT mode is performed in steps S1014 to S1021.

That is, in step S1014, lottery processing for adding the number of AT mode games is performed. In such an additional lottery process, a table for AT mode additional lottery is acquired from various table storage area 105a of ROM 105, and a lottery counter is acquired from various counter areas 106e of RAM 106. FIG. As shown in FIG. 42, the table for the AT mode additional lottery is set so that the probability of winning the additional lottery differs depending on the type of lottery result.

Here, in the present embodiment, the lottery for adding the number of games in the AT mode is set so that a specific role including a push-order bell, a push-order replay, and a normal replay as a transition trigger role and a non-trigger role will trigger the lottery. there is As shown in FIG. 42, among the specific roles, the push-order bell, push-order replay (hereinafter collectively referred to as "push-order role") and normal replay are compared to transition trigger role and non-trigger role. The probability of winning the lottery for adding the number of games in the AT mode is set low. Therefore, the number of games in the AT mode can be expected to increase more when a transition trigger role or a non-opportunity role appears than when a push-up role or normal replay appears as a lottery result of each game. Then, it is conceivable that the player advances the game on the premise that he/she expects to win a transitional opportunity role or a non-initiative role win. On the other hand, the winning combination and the normal replay have a higher probability of winning in each game than the transition opportunity and non-opportunity, and can be said to be a game result that appears relatively easily. By adopting such a combination, it is possible to reduce the presence of the push-up combination and normal replay as an additional opportunity combination, and to increase the unexpectedness when an additional combination occurs. In addition, the chances of these push-ups and additions based on normal replays are realistically possible during AT mode (more specifically, if the initial number of games, 50, is played 2 or 3 times, only 1 is the rate of appearance that will occur). Therefore, it is possible to favorably generate unexpected additions, such as the above-mentioned push-up and additions triggered by normal replays.

In the subsequent step S1015, it is determined whether or not the additional lottery has been won. If it is determined that the additional lottery has been won, it is determined in step S1016 whether or not the bonus winning flag is set. If the bonus winning flag is not set, the process advances to step S1017 to perform lottery processing for the number of additional games in the AT mode. In the lottery process for the number of added games, a table for lottery for the number of AT mode added games is acquired from various table storage area 105a of ROM 105, and a lottery counter is acquired from various counter areas 106e of RAM 106. FIG. The table for the lottery for the number of additional games in the AT mode is set so that the number of additional games differs according to the type of the specific combination, as shown in FIG. For example, in the high cherry game, 20 to 200 games are added to the AT mode, and the average number of added games is 30 games. In addition, with weak cherries, 5 to 300 games are added, and the average number of games added is 20 games. The average value is set so that the number of games with strong cherries is larger.

In step S1018, AT mode game number addition processing is performed. In this process, a counter for managing the number of continuous AT mode games (more specifically, an AT mode continuous counter provided in the various counter areas 106e of the RAM 106) is set to a value corresponding to the number of additional games selected in step S1017. Perform addition processing. In the subsequent step S1019, an addition notification process is performed for notifying that the addition lottery has been won and the number of games.

<Additional notification processing>
Here, in the slot machine 10, a plurality of modes of addition notification are set when an increase in the number of continuous games in the AT mode occurs. More specifically, there are a plurality of modes in which the game in which the additional notification is performed is different as the mode of the additional notification, and the additional notification is given in the game in which the additional notification occurs or in a series of games triggered by the game in which the additional notification occurs. (In the following description, also referred to as "immediate addition notification"), and in the case of performing an additional notification in which the game is later than the game in which the addition occurred and the notification game is determined after the fact (In the following description, " (Also referred to as "post-boarding notification") is set.

In the instant addition notification, a series of games triggered by a game in which an addition has occurred means, for example, a case in which a sign mode or a continuous effect occurs in response to a game in which an addition has occurred. A series of games is defined as a series of games that can be continued over a plurality of games from the game in which the addition occurred. The series of games includes cases where continuous effects do not occur. The game in which the addition occurs and the game until the addition notification occurs are regarded as a series of games, and the aspect of the addition notification is also included in the immediate addition notification.

On the other hand, in the post-addition notification, the game that is determined after the game after the game in which the addition occurred is not determined in the game in which the addition occurred, but for example, just before the end of the AT mode. This is different from the series of games in the immediate boarding notification in that the notification timing is determined ex post facto as the AT mode progresses, such as a game. In other words, the notification game can be said to be a game that is set without being triggered by a game in which an addition has occurred.

An overview of the display contents of the auxiliary display section 65 will be described with reference to FIG.

As described above, the immediate boarding notification is for notifying a part of the number of remaining games in the AT mode, etc. (the number of remaining games in the advantageous section ZG), and the post-boarding notification is for the remaining games in the AT mode, etc. The number will be reported later. Assuming that the number of games to be notified first is a display remaining number counter HG, and the number of games to be notified later is a counter BG, the number of remaining games in AT mode, etc. (the number of remaining games in the advantageous section ZG) is It is equal to the total value of the display remaining number counter HG and the post-adding counter BG. The display remaining number counter HG is decremented by 1 each time the game is completed, and the post-loading counter BG is not decremented unless the post-loading notification occurs even if the game is completed.

As shown in FIG. 43, in this embodiment, the number of remaining games displayed on the auxiliary display section 65 (remaining game number display ZGP) is a predetermined number (1) while the AT mode is being executed. When this is the case, that is, when the display remaining number counter HG reaches a predetermined number (1), the post-loading notification is generated. In the post-addition notification, it is reported that the number of games corresponding to the post-addition counter BG (150 in the figure) has been added. In this case, the post-addition counter BG is decremented by the reported amount (becomes 0 in the figure), and the display remaining number counter HG is updated by adding the post-addition report to the remaining game on the auxiliary display section 65. The number display ZGP also becomes a value corresponding to the display remaining number counter HG (150 in the figure after completing one game).

In this way, when the extra winning is selected, a difference can occur between the display remaining number counter HG and the actual number of remaining games in the AT mode or the like (the number of remaining games in the advantageous section ZG). On the other hand, when the immediate boarding notification is selected, there is no difference between the display remaining number counter HG and the actual number of remaining games in the AT mode or the like (the number of remaining games in the advantageous section ZG). In the slot machine 10, the add-on counter BG is referred to when the add-on win is made, and whether the add-on notification is selected or the immediate add-on notification is selected depends on the current value of the add-on counter BG.

In the above-described addition notification processing in step S1019, the game for which the addition notification is to be performed is set, and when the addition notification is to be performed in the game, the execution timing of the addition notification is set. That is, as shown in FIG. 36, first, in step S1101, a process of grasping the trailing counter BG of the various counter areas 106e is performed. In subsequent step S1102, a notification game lottery process is executed. The notification game lottery process is a lottery process for determining whether the current addition notification should be a post-addition notification or an immediate addition notification. In the notification game lottery process, a post-addition lottery table is obtained from the various table storage area 105a, and a lottery is performed to determine whether or not post-addition notification is performed according to the value of the post-addition counter BG grasped in step S1101.

As shown in FIG. 44, the add-on lottery table is set so that the probability of selecting the add-on notification differs depending on the value of the add-on counter BG and the type of the specific combination that triggered the add-on win. there is For example, at the time of addition triggered by a strong cherry, if the subsequent addition counter BG is less than 30, the subsequent addition notification is selected at 20% (the immediate addition notification is selected at 80%). When the add-on counter BG is 30 or more and less than 100, the add-on notification is selected at 10%, and when the add-on counter BG is 100 or more, the add-on notification is selected at 5%, so that the value of the add-on counter BG is large. It is set so that the selection rate of the post-boarding notification becomes lower as the number increases.

In addition, as the type of specific role that triggered the additional winning, there are various types rather than so-called rare roles (low probability trigger result, low probability result) with relatively low winning probability such as strong cherry, weak cherry, strong watermelon, and weak watermelon. So-called normal roles (high-probability trigger result, high-probability result) with a relatively high winning probability, such as push-order replay and various push-order bells, have a higher pick-up selection rate when the pick-up counter BG value is small. is set. More specifically, in notification game lottery processing triggered by various push order replays and various push order bells, in a situation where the post-addition counter BG is less than 30, the post-addition notification is selected with a probability of 100%.

As described above, the post-addition counter BG is decremented by the addition notification after the display remaining number counter HG reaches a predetermined number. Therefore, basically, as the AT mode game progresses, the value of the trailing counter BG often increases. It is likely to be a small value.

That is, when an additional winning is made in the early stages of the AT mode game, the probability that the subsequent addition notification is selected is high, especially when an additional winning is triggered by a normal combination that is not a rare combination such as a push order replay or a push order bell. If it is the early stages of the AT mode, the subsequent notification is always selected. As a result, after the AT mode is started, the trailing counter BG tends to accumulate relatively early.

After the notification game lottery process is executed in step S1102, it is determined in step S1103 whether or not the additional lottery has been won. If the additional winning game is not won and the immediate addition notification is selected, in step S1104, the process of adding the current additional winning game to the display remaining number counter HG provided in the various counter areas 106e is performed. Then, in step S1105, notification timing setting processing is executed for setting at which timing the additional notification is to be performed in the current game. The notification timing setting process is a process of setting at what timing in the current game the additional notification is to be performed.

In one game, the addition notification is set so that the execution timing differs according to the number of addition games. Specifically, as shown in the execution timing table of FIG. 45, as the execution timing of the addition notification in the current game, the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped in the order of stop operation, reel 1, reel 2, and reel 3. Then, the stop operation of the first reel, the stop operation of the second reel, and the stop operation of the third reel are set. Then, among the stop operations of each reel, the timing at which the stop ON operation is performed when the stop switches 42 to 44 are pressed, the timing when the stop OFF operation is performed when the pressing operation is completed, is set.

Here, a supplementary description will be given of the operating mode of the stop switches 42-44. The stop switches 42 to 44 can be displaced from an initial position arranged on the frontmost side to an operating position arranged on the farthest side. In the state of being arranged at the initial position, the detection signals from the stop detection sensors 42a to 44a are in a LOW state, and by operating from the initial position to the operation position, the detection signals from the stop detection sensors 42a to 44a are lowered. The LOW signal is switched to the HI signal. Then, main controller 101 recognizes that a stop ON operation has been performed, which means that the stop switches 42 to 44 have been pressed, based on the fact that the detection signal has switched from the LOW signal to the HI signal.

Also, the stop switches 42 to 44 are biased toward their initial positions by springs or the like. Therefore, when the stop switches 42 to 44 are released from the hand and the operation force (pressing force) pushed toward the operation position is not applied, the stop switches 42 to 44 are moved to the initial position by the urging force of the spring or the like. return to In this case, the detection signals from the stop detection sensors 42a to 44a are switched from HI signals to LOW signals. Based on the fact that the detection signal has switched from the HI signal to the LOW signal, the main controller 101 recognizes that the stop OFF operation has been performed, ie, the pressing operation of the stop switches 42 to 44 has ended.

The addition notification is set so that it can occur both when the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated to stop ON and when the stop is OFF. In other words, in a game in which an additional notification occurs, the additional effect can occur not only at the timing when the stop switches 42 to 44 are pressed, but also at the timing when the pressing operation ends.

In the addition notification execution timing table, when the number of games to be added is relatively small, for example, 5 games to 10 games are added, the timing at which the stop ON operation of the first reel is performed is selected at 5%. , the timing of the stop OFF operation of the first reel is 10%, the stop ON operation of the second reel is 15%, the stop OFF operation of the second reel is 20%, the stop ON operation of the third reel is 20%, The stop OFF operation of the third reel (when all reels are stopped) is 30%, and each is selected. In this case, the stop OFF operation of each reel is more likely to be selected than the stop ON operation of each reel, and the operation on the rear side is more likely to be selected.

On the other hand, when the number of games with a relatively large number of games to be added is, for example, 100 games or more, the timing at which the stop ON operation of the first reel is performed is selected at 5%, and the stop OFF operation of the first reel is selected. is performed 10%, the stop ON operation of the second reel is 5%, the stop OFF operation of the second reel is 30%, the stop ON operation of the third reel is 5%, the stop OFF operation of the third reel ( When all reels are stopped) is 45%, and each is selected. In this case as well, the stop OFF operation of each reel is more likely to be selected than the stop ON operation, and the operation on the rear side is relatively easier to be selected.

In other words, in the present embodiment, it is set so that the additional notification is more likely to occur when the stop OFF operation is performed than when the stop ON operation of each reel is performed. Further, when comparing the first to third reels, the stop operation (ON operation, OFF operation) of the third reel is most likely to be selected, the stop operation of the second reel is second most likely to be selected, and the first reel is stopped. It is set so that it is the least likely to be selected during operation.

In terms of the relationship with the number of additional games, the greater the number of additional games, the more likely it is that the third reel stop OFF operation will be selected. In other words, when the player is aware of the occurrence of the additional notification in advance, if the additional notification does not occur by the time the third reel stop ON operation is performed, the player is greatly affected by the occurrence of the addition of a large number of games. It is considered that the third reel stop OFF operation is executed while expecting.

In step S1105, the execution timing of the addition notification in the current game is set based on the execution timing table of the addition notification. After that, the process for addition notification is terminated. In this case, the information that the current addition is notified in the current game as an immediate addition notification, and the information regarding the execution timing of the addition notification in the current game are executed following the addition notification processing. It is set as an add-on command in the add-on command setting process (step S1020). The display control device 81 that receives the add-on command including these information sets the add-on notification effect based on these information. This processing will be described later.

If it is determined in step S1103 that the post-addition lottery has been won, the process proceeds to step S1106. In step S1106, a process of adding the current number of additional games to the post-addition counter BG provided in the various counter areas 106e is executed. Then, in step S1107, after performing the process of setting the post-add flag in the various flag storage area 106d, the add-on notification process is terminated.

The post-boarding flag is set by the CPU 102 of the main control unit 101 to indicate that the post-boarding notification should be performed when the value of the post-boarding counter BG is greater than 0 and the display remaining number counter HG reaches a predetermined value. It is a flag for grasping. Further, in this case, in the addition command setting process executed subsequent to the addition notification process, information indicating that the addition notification will not occur in the current game is set in the addition command. The display control device 81 that receives the add-on command including this information performs control so that the add-on notification is not generated in the current game.

Returning to the description of the second special combination process (FIG. 35), after the addition notification process is executed in step S1019, an addition command including the processing result of the addition notification process is sent to the display control device 81 in step S1020. After performing the process of setting it as an output target, the process of the second special combination ends. The add-on command includes information that the add-on has occurred, the number of add-on games, and the target of the add-on.

If the bonus winning flag is set in step S1016, the process proceeds to step S1021. In step S1021, the AT mode addition flag is set in the various flag storage area 106d of the RAM 106, and then the second special combination process is terminated. The AT mode addition flag is a flag for the CPU 102 to recognize that the condition for adding the number of games in the AT mode is satisfied. Although the details will be described later, if the bonus ends in a situation where the AT mode add-on flag is set, the AT mode is added on at the end of the bonus. That is, it is set so that the game to which the additional notification is performed differs depending on whether or not the bonus is simultaneously won.

If it is determined in step S1015 that the additional lottery is not won, the process proceeds to step S1022. In step S1022, a lottery for transition to the specialized zone is executed. That is, when a player wins a special role in the AT mode and does not win a lottery for transition to the VB mode or a lottery for adding the number of games in the AT mode, etc., a lottery for transition to a specialized zone is performed. In the special zone lottery process, a special zone transfer lottery table is acquired from the various table storage area 105a of the ROM 105, and a lottery for whether or not to shift the display mode to the special zone is performed by a lottery counter or the like. conduct. As shown in FIG. 40, the special zone transfer lottery table is set so that the probability of winning the transfer lottery differs depending on the type of specific combination. As already explained, among the transition trigger roles that overlap with the bonus, while it is not possible to win the VB mode transition lottery, as shown in FIG. It is set so that the number-adding lottery will always be won (with a probability of 100%). Therefore, the special zone transfer lottery will not be performed with the overlapping roles with these bonuses as a trigger, and the special zone transfer lottery will be at the time of winning a strong cherry or a weak cherry that does not overlap with the bonus, It is set so that the player can win the lottery for transition to the VB mode and the lottery for adding the number of games when the player does not win the lottery. For example, a special zone transfer lottery based on strong cherries wins with a probability of 5%, and a special zone transfer lottery based on weak cherries wins with a probability of 0.5%. On the other hand, in the special zone transfer lottery based on the strong watermelon, the player wins with a probability of 15%, and in the special zone transfer lottery based on the weak watermelon, the player wins with a probability of 5%.

In step S1023, based on the result of the process in step S1022, it is determined whether or not the lottery for moving to the specialized zone has been won. When winning, in step S1024, a process of setting a special zone winning flag in the various flag storage area 106d is performed. Then, in step S1025, a process for obtaining a precursor game number table is performed, in step S1026, a lottery process for the number of precursor games is performed, in step S1027, a process for setting the number of precursor games is performed, and in step S1028, a precursor command is executed. is set, the second special combination process is terminated. The processes of steps S1025 to S1028 are similar to the processes of steps S1006 to S1009, for example, and are processes for setting the portent mode.

If a negative determination is made in step S1023 and none of the lottery for transition to VB mode, the lottery for adding the number of games in AT mode, or the lottery for transition to specialized zone is not won, pseudo-addition notification is performed in step S1029. After performing the processing, the second special combination processing is terminated. The pseudo-additional notification process is a process for sustaining the sense of expectation by generating an effect similar to that at the time of winning even if the lottery is not won.

<Third Special Win Process>
Next, the third special combination process executed in step S707 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In the third special combination process, a process for adding the number of continuous games in the AT mode and a lottery for transition to a specialized zone are performed. That is, in step S1201, AT mode game number addition lottery processing is performed. Such processing is the same as the processing in step S1014. Note that the odds of winning the additional lottery may differ between the lottery process in step S1014 and the lottery process in step S1201.

In step S1202, it is determined whether or not the result of the lottery in step S1201 was an additional winning result. If it is determined that the additional lottery has been won, it is determined in step S1203 whether or not the bonus winning flag is set. If the bonus winning flag is not set, the process advances to step S1204 to perform lottery processing for the number of additional games in the AT mode. Then, in step S1205, AT mode game number addition processing is performed, in step S1206, addition notification processing is performed, and in step S1207, the addition command is set as an object to be output to the display control device 81. , ends the third special combination processing. The processing of steps S1203 to S1207 is the same as the processing of steps S1016 to S1020. The number of additional games may differ between the lottery process in step S1016 and the lottery process in step S1204.

If a negative determination is made in step S1202, the process proceeds to step S1209. In step S1209, a lottery for transition to the specialized zone is executed. In other words, even if a special winning combination is won in the VB mode and the lottery for adding the number of games in the AT mode is not won, the lottery for transition to the specialized zone is performed. The specialized zone lottery process is the same as the process of step S1022, and is performed based on the table for the specialized zone transfer lottery (FIG. 40). The processing of steps S1210 to S1216 is the same as the processing of steps S1023 to S1029. Also, if it is determined in step S1203 that the bonus winning flag is set, the AT mode addition flag is set in step S1207, and then the third special combination processing is terminated. The AT mode addition flag is as described above.

Returning to the description of the lottery result handling process (FIG. 31). After any one of steps S704, S706, and S707 is executed, it is determined in step S708 whether or not the result of the current lottery process is a push order replay or a push order win for the push order bell. . In the case of winning the pushing first hand, the pushing first hand process is executed in step S709. The pushing process will be described later in detail.

If a negative determination is made in step S708, or if the process of step S709 has been executed, the process proceeds to step S710. In step S710, it is determined whether or not the special zone flag corresponding to the additional special zone is set in the various flag storage area 106d of the RAM 106. FIG. As described above, after the specialized zone winning flag is set based on winning the lottery for transition to the SAT mode or the lottery for transition to the specialized zone, the transition to the specialized zone occurs. This is a flag that is set when the player wins (when the 7th regame win is established). If the specialized zone flag is set in step S710, the specialized zone processing is executed in step S711. When a negative determination is made in step S710, or after the process of step S711 is executed, this lottery result corresponding process is ended.

<Processing for specialized zone>
The specialized zone processing will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In the special zone processing, first, in step S1301, the result of the current lottery processing is grasped. In the subsequent step S1302, AT mode add-on game number lottery processing is performed. In the following step S1303, AT mode game number addition processing is performed. Then, in step S1304, an addition notification process is executed, and after an addition command is set in step S1305, the special zone process ends. The processing of steps S1302 to S1305 is the same as the processing of steps S1017 to S1020. However, the number of games to be selected is larger in the number-of-addition-games lottery process in step S1302 than in the number-of-addition-games lottery process in step S1017 (FIG. 42). In addition, in the specialized zone, regardless of the game result, it is set so that the number of AT mode games is always added (FIG. 42).

As described above, in the lottery result handling process, if it is not in the advantageous section, a lottery for transition to the advantageous section is performed, and if it is in the advantageous section, a lottery for transition to AT mode or VB mode or continuation of AT mode is performed. Processing for adding the number of games and the like are performed. In other words, even if you win a special combination, if it is a normal section instead of an advantageous section, the lottery for transition to AT mode or VB mode, processing for adding the number of continuous games in AT mode, etc. will basically not be performed. and limits its implementation. In other words, the normal section can be said to be a section in which execution of processing related to the instruction function such as the AT mode is restricted compared to the advantageous section. When the lottery for transition to the AT mode or VB mode is won, the fact that the lottery for transition is won is notified after the premonitory game is played. Therefore, the processing for shifting the game state based on the result of the display mode transition lottery will be described below.

<Processing for transitioning the game state based on the result of the display mode transition lottery>
(2) In the processing for transitioning the game state based on the result of the display mode transition lottery, the processing for notifying that the display mode transition lottery has been won and the notification for transitioning the game state are performed. A process for performing is performed. Therefore, first, a description will be given of the processing related to the notification that the transfer lottery has been won.

<Mode transition notification processing>
Notification of winning the transition lottery is performed in the mode transition notification process (step S206) in the normal process (FIG. 15). The mode change notification process is a process that is executed when a predetermined bet operation is performed (when it is determined that the number of bets in step S205 is the specified number). The mode change notification process will be described below with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In step S1401, it is determined whether or not the number of precursor games is zero. The number of precursory games is counted in a prize-winning result handling process to be described later, and the number of precursory games is decremented by one each time one game is played. If the number of precursor games is not 0, the mode transition notification process is terminated.

If the number of precursor games is 0, it is determined in step S1402 whether or not the bonus winning flag is set. That is, it is determined whether or not the current portent mode is a portent mode triggered by winning a bonus. If the bonus winning flag is set, the bonus winning notification command is set as an object to be output to the display control device 81 in step S1403, and then this mode transition notification processing is terminated. The display control device 81 that has received the bonus winning notification command notifies that the bonus has been won by, for example, displaying "Bonus confirmed!!" It should be noted that the type of the winning bonus (either the first BB or the second BB) may be notified together.

Incidentally, in the present embodiment, when the bonus and the AT mode are won at the same time, the AT mode and the like are announced when the bonus announced in step S1403 ends. The processing related to the winning notification will be described in detail later, but when the winning notification such as AT mode is performed in accordance with the bonus winning notification, the winning notification such as AT mode is performed in accordance with the bonus winning notification command set in step S1403. A configuration in which a command is set is preferable.

If a negative determination is made in step S1402, the process proceeds to step S1404. In step S1404, it is determined whether or not the AT mode winning flag is set. That is, it is determined whether or not the current portent mode is a portent mode triggered by winning the AT mode. If the AT mode winning flag is set, the AT mode winning flag is cleared in step S1405. Then, in step S1406, the AT notification flag is set in the various flag storage area 106d of the RAM 106. FIG. The AT notification flag is a flag for shifting the gaming state to the second RT state in accordance with winning the AT mode shift lottery. After that, in step S1407, an AT mode winning notification command is set as an object to be output to the display control device 81. FIG. The display control device 81 that has received the AT mode winning notification command uses the auxiliary display unit 65 or the like to notify that the player has won the AT mode transition lottery. Such notification will be described later in detail. After executing the process of step S1407, this mode shift notification process is terminated.

Incidentally, in the present embodiment, the mode of notification of winning in the SAT mode is different from the mode of notification of winning in the AT mode. Therefore, in step S1407, it is preferable to set the AT mode winning notification command so as to include information as to whether it is the SAT mode or not. The AT mode winning notification mode and the SAT mode winning notification mode may be different as long as they are identifiable by the player, and more preferably, the winning notification mode for the SAT mode, which has a higher degree of advantage. It is preferable that the mode is more flashy than the mode of notification of winning in the AT mode.

It should be noted that the AT mode and the SAT mode may be configured to share the winning notification mode. By doing so, it is possible to make it look as if the content of winning has been promoted from the AT mode to the SAT mode from the AT mode winning notification game to the start notification game, and the AT mode winning notification is made. It is possible to eliminate delay due to the difference between the game and the start notification game.

If it is determined in step S1404 that the AT mode winning flag is not set, it is determined in step S1408 whether or not the VB mode winning flag is set. That is, it is determined whether or not the current portent mode is a portent mode triggered by winning the VB mode. If the VB mode winning flag is set, the VB mode winning flag is cleared in step S1409. Then, in step S1410, the VB notification flag is set in the various flag storage area 106d of the RAM 106. FIG. The VB notification flag is a flag for shifting the game state to the 3rd RT state when the lottery for transition to the VB mode is won. After that, in step S1411, a VB mode winning notification command is set as an object to be output to the display control device 81. FIG. The display control device 81 that has received the VB mode winning notification command uses the auxiliary display unit 65 or the like to notify that the player has won the VB mode transition lottery. Such notification will be described later in detail. After executing the process of step S1411, this mode shift notification process is terminated.

If it is determined in step S1408 that the VB mode winning flag is not set, the process proceeds to step S1412. In step S1412, it is determined whether or not the special zone winning flag is set. If it is not set, the mode change notification process is terminated. When it is set, in step S1413, processing for clearing the special zone winning flag is performed. Then, in step S1414, a process of setting a specialized zone notification flag in the various flag storage area 106d is performed. The specialized zone notification flag is a flag for executing the pressing order notification corresponding to the seventh regame winning. After the process of step S1414 is executed, the special zone winning notification command is set as an output target to the display control device 81 in step S1415, and then this mode transition notification process is terminated. The display control device 81 that has received the specialized zone winning notification command controls the auxiliary display section 65 and the speaker 64 so as to notify that the specialized zone has been won.

That is, for the AT mode, VB mode, and special zone that transition through the precursor mode, the AT mode transition lottery and the VB mode transition lottery are won based on the bet operation when the number of precursor games in the precursor mode becomes 0. Even if the number of precursor games becomes 0, the AT mode, VB mode, and specialized zone are not started. This is because the AT mode and VB mode as display modes are accompanied by the transition of the game state. Specifically, the AT mode is started by shifting to the 2nd RT state, and the VB mode is started by shifting to the 3rd RT state. It is due to being As for the specialized zone, there are cases where the transition of the game state is not accompanied (from the 3rd RT state to the 3rd RT state). The processing configuration is as described above.

As already explained, the 2nd RT state is entered when the first promoted replays 1 to 4 are won and the third replay winning is established, and the 3rd RT state is entered into the second promoted replays 1 and 2. , and when the fourth and fifth replay wins are established. Then, when the first promotion replays 1 to 4 are won and the third replay win is established, or when the second promotion replays 1 and 2 are won and the fourth and fifth replay wins are established, This is the case where the order of operation of the stop switches 42 to 44 at the time of winning the promotion replay corresponds to the third replay win or the like. Therefore, when a lottery for shifting to the AT mode or VB mode is won, the order of operation of the stop switches 42 to 44 is reported in the game in which the player wins the winning combination for shifting the game state. It is configured to allow the game state to be shifted. It should be noted that from the notification of winning the AT mode or VB mode transition lottery to the start of the AT mode or VB mode (until the game state transitions), notification as a preparation state (for example, " In preparation") is performed.

<Description on transition of display mode>
The notification process for shifting the game state is performed in the pushing process (step S709) in the lottery result handling process (FIG. 32). Here, prior to the description of the pushing process, the outline of the case where the order of operation of the stop switches 42 to 44 is notified will be described with reference to FIG.

<Overview of push order notification effect>
Notification of the order of operations at the time of winning a winning hand (push order notification, push order notification effect, order notification, mode notification) is mainly performed by the auxiliary display section 65 and the instruction monitor 68 . Here, the pressing order notification effect on the auxiliary display section 65 will be described by taking as an example the case where the pressing order combination is won in the case where the operation order to be notified this time is middle→right→left. Notification of the pressing order on the instruction monitor 68 will be described later in detail.

As shown in FIG. 47(a), in the auxiliary display section 65, among the three buttons displayed in parallel corresponding to the stop switches 42 to 44, the button display corresponding to the stop switch to be operated first (middle stop in the figure) is displayed. The middle button display corresponding to the switch 43) is given the number 1 and displayed larger than the other button displays. Each button is displayed in a color corresponding to the winning combination (yellow for bell, blue for replay, etc.). As a result, the player can recognize the combination that has been won in the current game and that the stop switch to be operated first is the middle stop switch 43 . In the auxiliary display section 65, the right stop switch 44 is the next stop switch to be operated, and the left stop switch 42 is the last stop switch to be operated. 2 is added and displayed, and the left button display is displayed with the number 3 added.

When the player operates the middle stop switch 43, as shown in FIG. Larger button display. Thereby, the player can confirm that the operation of the middle stop switch 43 is completed and that the stop switch to be operated next is the right stop switch 44 .

When the player operates the right stop switch 44, as shown in FIG. Button display is displayed large. Thereby, the player can confirm that the operation of the right stop switch 44 is completed and that the next stop switch to be operated is the left stop switch 42 .

Explaining the execution timing of the pressing order notification, the pressing order notification is performed during the invalid period of the stop switches 42 to 44 from the start of rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R to constant speed rotation through the acceleration period. is set to run. In this way, by adopting a configuration in which the pressing order notification is executed before the operation of the stop switches 42 to 44 becomes effective, the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44 is recognized and the stop switches 42 to 44 are recognized. , and the game can be progressed at a good tempo.

<Push-in process>
Next, referring to the flow chart of FIG. 48, the pushing process executed in step S709 in the lottery result handling process (FIG. 32) will be described.

In step S1501, it is determined whether or not the current lottery result is one of the first promotion replays 1-4. The affirmative determination in step S1501 means that the first replay or the third replay wins according to the operation sequence of the current game. In this case, the process advances to step S1502 to determine whether or not the AT notification flag is set in the various flag storage area 106d of the RAM 106 or not. As already explained, the AT notification flag is a flag that is set when the number of precursor games in the precursor mode becomes 0 after winning the AT mode transition lottery in the mode transition notification process (FIG. 46). be.

When the notification flag for AT is set, in step S1503, processing for notifying the pressing order of the third replay is executed. Specifically, of the first replay and the third replay, the operation order corresponding to the third replay win is reported (see FIG. 23(a)). After that, in step S1504, a process of setting a push order notification command as an output target to the display control device 81, which is a control device on the sub side, is performed, and then the main push order process is terminated. The pressing order notification command includes information on the current display mode and information on the lottery result. The processing on the display control device 81 side based on the reception of the pressing order notification command will be described later in detail.

In step S1503, the operation order corresponding to the third replay winning is notified, basically, when the AT mode transition lottery is won, and the AT mode winning notification is performed after the precursor mode. It is assumed that it is after switching to the AT mode and before the transition to the AT mode. That is, in the lottery table in the 2nd RT state and the 3rd RT state, the first promoted replays 1 to 4 are not won, and the first promoted replays 1 to 4 are won only in the 1st RT state. However, even in the AT mode, the game state may fall from the 2nd RT state to the 1st RT state due to an erroneous operation, etc. Even in such a case, the first promotion replay 1 to 4 will be won. By doing so, it is possible to quickly return to the second RT state.

If a negative determination is made in step S1501, it is determined in step S1505 whether or not the lottery result of this time is one of fall replays 1-3. The affirmative determination in step S1505 means that the first replay or the second replay wins according to the operation order of the current game. In this case, in step S1506, it is determined whether or not the AT notification flag is set. When the notification flag for AT is set, in step S1507, processing for notifying the pressing order of the first re-game is executed. Specifically, of the first replay and the second replay, the operation order corresponding to the first replay win is reported (see FIG. 23(b)). After that, in step S1508, after a process of setting a push order notification command is performed, the actual push order process is terminated.

In this way, when the first promotion replays 1 to 4 are won in the state where the lottery for transition to the AT mode is won, the operation order corresponding to the third replay win is notified, thereby changing the game state to the third. It becomes possible to shift to the 2RT state. On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S1502, the pushing order process is terminated without performing the pushing order notification process. Therefore, for example, in the first RT state, even if the first promotion replays 1 to 4 are won without winning the AT mode, there are cases where the first replay win is established and cases where the third replay win is established. , there is.

In addition, when falling replays 1 to 3 are won in a situation where the notification flag for AT is set, the game state is shifted to the first RT state by notifying the operation sequence corresponding to the first replay winning prize. It is possible to prevent it from happening. On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S1506, the pushing order process is terminated as it is without performing the pushing order notification process. Therefore, for example, when the AT mode ends, the AT notification flag is cleared, and the display mode shifts to the normal mode, the second replay winning may be established by winning the fall replays 1 to 3, and the RT state will transition from the second RT state or the third RT state to the first RT state.

Also, for example, in the 1st RT state, the first promoted replays 1 to 4 are won without winning the AT mode, and the operation order happens to correspond to the 3rd replay winning, and the 3rd replay winning is established. Even in the case of (even in the case of shifting to the second RT state), the second replay winning prize can be established by winning fall replays 1 to 3. Therefore, as described above, even if the AT mode is not won by chance and the game shifts to the second RT state, the game immediately shifts to the first RT state thereafter.

If a negative determination is made in step S1505, it is determined in step S1509 whether or not the current lottery result is one of the second promotion replays 1 and 2. A positive determination in step S1509 means that the first replay, the fourth replay, or the fifth replay wins according to the operation sequence of the current game. In this case, in step S1510, it is determined whether or not the AT notification flag is set. If the AT notification flag is set, it is determined in step S1511 whether or not the VB notification flag or the specialized zone notification flag is set in the various flag storage area 106d of the RAM 106. FIG. As already explained, the VB notification flag is a flag that is set when the number of precursor games in the precursor mode becomes 0 after winning the VB mode transition lottery in the mode transition notification processing (FIG. 46). be. The specialized zone notification flag is a flag that is set when the number of precursory games in the precursory mode becomes 0 after winning the special zone transition lottery in the mode transition notification processing (FIG. 46). be.

When the notification flag for VB or the notification flag for specialized zone is set, in step S1512, the process for notifying the pressing order of the fourth re-game or fifth re-game is executed. Specifically, of the first replay, the fourth replay, and the fifth replay, the operation sequence corresponding to the fourth regame winning or the fifth replay winning is notified (see FIG. 23(b)). After that, in step S1513, a process of setting a pressing order notification command is performed, and then the actual pressing order process is terminated.

If a negative determination is made in step S1510, the pushing order process is terminated as it is without performing the pushing order notification process. On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S1511, then in step S1507 the process for notifying the pressing order of the first replay is executed, and in step S1508 the process of setting the pressing order notifying command is performed. Terminates the regular running process. Therefore, when winning the second promotion replays 1 and 2 without winning the VB mode or the special zone, if the AT mode is in effect, the pressing order notification effect corresponding to the first replay winning prize is performed, and the AT mode is performed. If it is not in the mode, the pressing order notification effect is not performed.

If a negative determination is made in step S1509, it is determined in step S1514 whether or not the current lottery result is BAR replay. Affirmative determination in step S1514 means that one of the first replay, third replay, and sixth to eighth replays wins depending on the operation sequence of the current game. In this case, in step S1515, it is determined whether or not the AT notification flag is set. If the AT notification flag is set, it is determined in step S1516 whether or not the specialized zone notification flag is set. When the notification flag for AT is set and the notification flag for special zone is set, in step S1517, the process for notification of the pressing order of the seventh regame is executed. Specifically, among the first replay, the third replay, and the sixth to eighth regames, the operation order corresponding to the seventh regame win is reported (see FIG. 23(c)). After that, in step S1518, a process of setting a pressing order notification command is performed, and then the actual pressing order process is terminated.

If a negative determination is made in step S1515, the pushing order process is terminated as it is without performing the pushing order notification process. On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S1516, then in step S1503 processing for notifying the pressing order of the third replay is executed, and in step S1504 processing for setting the pressing order notification command is performed. Terminates the regular running process. Therefore, in the case of winning the BAR replay without winning the VB mode or the specialized zone, if the AT mode is in effect, the pushing order notification effect corresponding to the third replay winning prize is performed, and the state shifts to the second RT state. is generated, and if the AT mode is not in effect, the pressing order notification effect is not performed.

If a negative determination is made in step S1514, it is determined in step S1519 whether or not the current lottery result is transition replay 1 or transition replay 2. Affirmative determination in step S1519 means that any one of the first replay, second replay, eleventh replay, and twelfth replay wins depending on the operation sequence of the current game. In this case, in step S1520, it is determined whether or not the AT notification flag is set. When the notification flag for AT is set, it is determined whether or not the notification flag for shift is set in the various flag storage area 106d of the RAM 106 in step S1521. The transition notification flag is a flag that is set when a condition that enables transition to the fourth RT state is established. Processing for setting the shift notification flag will be described later in detail. When the notification flag for AT is set and the notification flag for transition is set, in step S1522, the 11th re-game or 12th re-game push order notification process is executed. Specifically, of the first regame, second regame, eleventh regame, and twelfth regame, the operation order corresponding to the eleventh regame win or the twelfth regame win is reported (FIG. 23 ( d) see). Thereafter, in step S1523, a process of setting a push order notification command is performed, and then the actual push order process is terminated.

If a negative determination is made in step S1520, the pushing order process is terminated as it is without performing the process for informing the pushing order. On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S1521, then in step S1507 the process for notifying the pressing order of the first replay is executed, and in step S1508 the process of setting the pressing order notifying command is performed. Terminates the regular running process. Therefore, when transition replays 1 and 2 are won without the conditions enabling transition to the 4th RT state being established, if the AT mode is in effect, the pressing order notification effect corresponding to the first regame winning prize is performed. If it is not in the AT mode, the pressing order notification effect is not performed.

If a negative determination is made in step S1519, it is determined in step S1524 whether or not the lottery result of this time is the pressing order bell winning. If the pressing order bell is won, it is determined in step S1525 whether or not the AT notification flag is set. When it is set, in step S1526, a process for notifying the order of pushing for notifying the operation order corresponding to the winning of the first minor combination is executed (see FIG. 19). After that, in step S1527, a process of setting a pressing order notification command is performed, and then the actual pressing order process is terminated. If a negative determination is made in step S1524 or step S1525, the main pushing order process is terminated without performing the pushing order notification process.

It should be noted that, if the pressing order bell is won in the situation where the notification flag for AT is set (if the negative determination is made in step S1525), if the game state of this time is the normal game state, it corresponds to the first minor winning prize. It is preferable not to notify the pressing order. By doing so, the transition output is stopped, and the game state is shifted to the 1st RT state, that is, after that, the first promotion replay 1 to 4 wins and the transition to the high RT state is possible. It becomes possible.

<Processing for switching the display mode based on the winning result>
<Processing for Winning Results>
Next, as a result of performing the notification for shifting the game state as described above, the processing when the winning combination corresponding to the shift of the game state is won will be described (3). This process is performed in the winning result handling process (step S414) in the reel control process (FIG. 18). The winning result handling process will be described below with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In step S1601, game number management processing is executed. Although the details will be described later, in this game number management process, in addition to counting the number of precursor games in the precursor mode, the number of continued games in the AT mode, VB mode, and specialized zone, etc. are counted. In the following step S1602, a post-loading notification process is executed. The post-addition notification process is a process for performing the post-addition notification described with reference to FIG. On the condition that there is a post-loading counter BG, the post-loading notification (post-loading notification) is executed. Then, the value corresponding to the executed addition notification is added to the display remaining number counter HG and subtracted from the addition counter BG, and the addition flag is cleared under the condition that the addition counter BG is 0.

In the following step S1603, it is determined whether or not the result of this stop is the third replay winning. As described above, when the third regame winning has been established, in the RT state processing (FIG. 21), the processing for shifting the game state to the second RT state is performed. In this case, in step S1604, it is determined whether or not the AT notification flag is set. The case where the AT notification flag is not set is the case where the third re-game winning is established without the condition for shifting to the AT mode being established. The winning result handling process is terminated as it is. If the AT notification flag is set, it is determined in step S1605 whether or not the current display mode is the AT mode. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the AT mode flag is set in the various flag storage area 106d. As described above, the AT mode flag is a flag for the CPU 102 to specify that the display mode is the AT mode. In addition to the AT mode flag, a VB mode flag, a specialized zone flag, and a BB mode flag are provided as flags for specifying the display mode. In this embodiment, when the display mode is a mode (VB mode, additional specialized zone) corresponding to the RT state higher than the AT mode, the AT mode flag is the flag corresponding to that mode (VB mode flag, specialized zone flag). Therefore, for example, in step S1605, when it is determined that the AT mode flag is set, in addition to the AT mode, the VB mode and the specialized zone are included. .

At step S1605, if the AT mode flag is set, the display mode is already the AT mode, so the process for dealing with the winning result is terminated. On the other hand, if the AT mode flag is not set, the process for starting the AT mode is performed in steps S1606 to S1609.

That is, in step S1606, the AT mode flag is set. In the subsequent step S1607, the AT mode start command is set as an object to be output to the display control device 81. FIG. The display control device 81 that has received the AT mode start command uses the auxiliary display unit 65 or the like to notify that the AT mode will start from the next game. Such notification will be described later in detail. After that, in step S1608, counting of the number of AT mode continuations is started. Specifically, the AT mode continuation counter provided in the various counter areas 106e of the RAM 106 is set to the initial value (for example, 50) of the number of continuation games in the AT mode.

After performing the process of step S1608, it is determined whether or not the specialized zone flag is set in step S1609. A positive determination in step S1609 means that the AT mode won this time is the SAT mode. In this case, after clearing the special zone winning flag in step S1610, (steps S1619 to S1621). The processing for starting the additional specialized zone will be described later. If a negative determination is made in step S1609, the winning result handling process is terminated.

When it is determined in step S1603 that the third replay winning has not been established, the process proceeds to step S1611. In step S1611, it is determined whether or not the fourth and fifth replay wins have been established as a result of this stop. As described above, when the fourth and fifth replay wins are established, the RT state processing (FIG. 21) performs processing for shifting the game state to the third RT state. In this case, in step S1612, it is determined whether or not the VB notification flag is set. If the VB notification flag is not set, it means that the fourth and fifth re-game wins are established without winning the VB mode transition lottery. , the winning result handling process is terminated. If the VB notification flag has been set, it is determined in step S1613 whether or not the VB mode flag has been set. If the VB mode flag is set, the display mode is already the VB mode, so the process for dealing with the winning result is terminated. On the other hand, if the VB mode flag is not set, processing for starting the VB mode is performed in steps S1614 to S1616.

That is, in step S1614, processing for setting the VB mode flag is performed. In this case, the AT mode flag and the VB mode flag coexist in the various flag storage area 106d. This is because the VB mode is a mode that shifts through the AT mode, and the shift to the AT mode is always made after the VB mode ends.

After that, in step S1615, a VB mode start command is set as an object to be output to the display control device 81. FIG. The display control device 81 that has received the VB mode start command uses the auxiliary display section 65 or the like to notify that the VB mode will start from the next game. Such notification will be described later in detail. Then, in step S1616, counting of the number of VB mode continuations is started. Specifically, an initial value (for example, 25) of the number of continuous games in the VB mode is set in a VB mode continuous counter provided in the various counter areas 106e of the RAM 106. FIG. After performing the process of step S1616, the process for dealing with the winning result is terminated.

If it is determined in step S1611 that the fourth and fifth replay winnings have not been established, the process proceeds to step S1617. In step S1617, it is determined whether or not the seventh regame winning has been established as a result of this stop. In this embodiment, when the seventh replay winning has been established, that is, the middle stage of the left reel 32L has a "black BAR" symbol, the middle stage of the middle reel 32M has a "black BAR" symbol, and the middle stage of the right reel 32R has a "black BAR" symbol. When the "black BAR" pattern stops and the "black BAR" pattern stops on the middle combination line, it is configured to shift to the special addition zone. The case where the 7th re-game win is established means the case where BAR Replay 1 is won and the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in the operation order corresponding to the 7th re-game win. There is (Fig. 23(c)).

If the seventh replay winning has been established, it is determined in step S1618 whether or not the specialized zone notification flag is set. When the specialized zone notification flag is set, processing for starting the specialized zone is performed in steps S1619 to S1621. As already described, when the SAT mode is started, even if the affirmative determination is made in step S1609 and the process of step S1610 is performed, the process of steps S1619 to S1621 is performed.

Specifically, in step S1619, a process of setting a specialized zone flag in various flag storage area 106d of RAM 106 is performed. The specialized zone flag is a flag for the CPU 102 to recognize that it is an additional specialized zone. By setting the specialized zone flag, the number of continuous games in AT mode or VB mode is counted. be stopped. In this case, an AT mode flag, a VB mode flag, and a specialized zone flag may coexist in the various flag storage area 106d.

After that, in step S 1620 , the specialized zone start command is set as an object to be output to the display control device 81 . The display control device 81 that has received the special zone start command uses the auxiliary display unit 65 or the like to notify that the special zone will start from the next game. Such notification will be described later in detail. Then, in step S1621, counting of the number of continuous specialized zones is started. Specifically, the initial value (for example, 5) of the number of continuous games in the special zone is set in the special zone continuation counter provided in the various counter areas 106e of the RAM 106. FIG. After performing the process of step S1621, the process for dealing with the winning result is terminated. If a negative determination is made in step S1618, the winning result handling process is terminated.

When it is determined in step S1617 that the seventh regame winning has not been established, the process proceeds to step S1622. In step S1622, it is determined whether or not the 11th and 12th regame wins have been established as the result of this stop. As described above, when the 11th and 12th regame winnings are established, the RT state processing (FIG. 21) performs processing for shifting the game state to the fourth RT state. In this case, in step S1623, it is determined whether or not the shift notification flag is set. If the notification flag for transition is set, it means that the 11th and 12th regame wins are established after the condition enabling the transition to the 4th RT state is established. , the special RT start A command is set as an object to be output to the display control device 81 . The display control device 81 that has received the special RT start A command uses the auxiliary display section 65 or the like to notify that the transition to the fourth RT state has occurred. Such notification will be described later in detail. On the other hand, when the notification flag for transition is not set in step S1623, when the 11th and 12th re-game wins are established in a situation where the condition enabling transition to the 4th RT state is not established. In this case, the special RT start B command is set as an object to be output to the display control device 81 in step S1625. The display control device 81 that has received the special RT start B command uses the auxiliary display unit 65 or the like to notify that the transition to the fourth RT state has occurred. This notification will be described in detail later, but the notification when the special RT start A command is received differs from the notification when the special RT start B command is received to such an extent that the player can distinguish between them. If a negative determination is made in step S1622, the winning result handling process is terminated.

After one of the processes of step S1622 and step S1625 is executed, AT end process is executed in step S1626, and then the winning result corresponding process is ended. In the AT termination processing, processing for terminating the AT mode or the like is performed when shifting to the fourth RT state. Specifically, in the AT end processing, the winning flags of various display modes such as the AT mode winning flag, the VB mode winning flag, and the specialized zone winning flag are cleared, and the AT mode flag, the VB mode flag, and the specialized zone flag are cleared. clears flags for various display modes in . Furthermore, the flags for shifting the RT state, such as the AT notification flag, the VB notification flag, and the transition notification flag, are cleared. Then, the AT mode end command is set as an object to be output to the display control device 81 . The display control device 81 that has received the AT mode end command uses the auxiliary display unit 65 or the like to notify that the AT mode will be ended in the current game. The processing on the display control device 81 side will be described later in detail.

As described above, in particular, processing for shifting the display mode separately from the RT state processing (FIG. 21) based on the winning of the combination corresponding to shifting the gaming state from the 2nd RT state to the 4th RT state. I do. This is to avoid the AT mode or the like from being started based on the winning of a winning combination corresponding to changing the game state by chance even though the display mode transition lottery has not been won. is.

In addition, at the time of transition of the display mode, among those accompanied by the transition of the game state, transition to a higher mode, that is, when shifting from the normal mode to the AT mode, when shifting from the AT mode to the VB mode, or when shifting from the AT mode When shifting from the or VB mode to the special zone, the shift is made based on the winning result of the corresponding combination. Therefore, the transition of the display mode and the transition of the game state are performed as a set in the same game. On the other hand, in the case of transition to a lower mode, except for the case where the AT mode is terminated based on the 11th replay win or the 12th replay win, for example, the second replay win as a fall replay When the game state changes due to the stoppage of the transition roll, the display mode does not change. When shifting to such a lower mode, the game state is managed by the winning result (process for RT state), while the display mode is managed by the number of games. Therefore, when shifting to these lower modes, there is a possibility that the transition of the game state and the transition of the display mode are performed in separate games.

<Number of games management process>
The number-of-games management process executed in step S1601 of the winning result handling process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. In the game number management process, the number of precursor games in the precursor mode is counted, and the number of continuous games in the AT mode, VB mode, and special zone is counted, and the number of continuous games in these display modes becomes 0. Based on this, a process for terminating the corresponding display mode is performed.

In the number-of-games management process, first, in step S1701, it is determined whether or not the number of bets is a specific number. As already described, in the present embodiment, each game can be played with the number of bets from 1 to 3, and in step S1701, it is determined whether or not the number of bets is 3 as the specific number. If the bet is not 3 bet, the game number management process is terminated. In other words, the number of omen mode games is not counted in 1-bet or 2-bet games. Note that the counting may be performed regardless of the number of bets.

If the current game is a 3-bet game, the process proceeds to step S1702. In step S1702, it is determined whether or not the bonus winning flag is set or the game is in a bonus state. If the determination in step S1702 is affirmative, in step S1703 the AT mode flag, the VB mode flag, and the special zone flag for various display modes are cleared, after which the game count management process ends. In other words, when the bonus win flag is set or during the bonus, the number of games in the AT mode or the like is not counted. If each flag is not set in step S1703, that state is maintained.

Incidentally, in step S1703, while the AT mode flag, the VB mode flag, etc. are cleared, the AT notification flag and the VB notification flag are not cleared. Therefore, after the end of the bonus, after going through a preparation state such as an AT mode, these flags are used to notify the pressing order for shifting the game state, and the game state before the bonus can be restored. On the other hand, when a bonus is won in a special zone, the special zone is terminated by the bonus win. Also, in step S1703, the AT mode winning flag and the like are not cleared. Therefore, when the AT mode or the like and the bonus are won at the same time, the winning notification based on these winning flags is performed after the bonus is finished.

If the determination in step S1702 is negative, it is determined in step S1704 whether or not the number of precursor games is zero. If not 0, a process of subtracting 1 from the number of precursor games is performed in step S1705. If the number of precursor games is 0 in step S1704 (not in precursor mode), or after the process of step S1705 is executed, the number of continuous games in each mode is counted in steps S1706 to S1723. .

That is, in step S1706, it is determined whether or not the current display mode is the AT mode. If it is in AT mode, the process advances to step S1707 to determine whether it is a specialized zone in AT mode. That is, in the case of shifting to the specialized zone at the start of the AT mode as in the SAT mode, an affirmative determination is made in step S1707. If it is in the special zone, the game number management process for the special zone is performed in steps S1720 to S1723. These processes will be described later.

If it is determined in step S1707 that the zone is not a specialized zone, in step S1708 the AT mode continuation counter is decremented by 1 to decrement the number of AT mode continuation games. Then, in step S1709, it is determined whether or not the AT mode continuation counter is zero. If not 0, the number-of-games management process is terminated. If it is 0, the AT mode flag is cleared in step S1710, and the AT notification flag is cleared in step S1711. After that, in step S1712, an AT mode end command is set as an object to be output to the display control device 81. FIG. After performing the process of step S1712, the number-of-games management process is terminated.

If it is determined in step S1706 that the mode is not the AT mode, the process advances to step S1713. In step S1713, it is determined whether or not the current display mode is the VB mode. If it is the VB mode, the process advances to step S1714 to determine whether or not it is an additional specialized zone. If it is not the special zone for addition, in step S1715 the VB mode continuation counter is decremented by 1, thereby decrementing the number of VB mode continuation games. Then, in step S1716, it is determined whether or not the VB mode continuation counter is zero. If not 0, the number-of-games management process is terminated. If it is 0, the VB mode flag is cleared in step S1717, and the VB notification flag is cleared in step S1718. After that, in step S1719, a VB mode end command is set as an object to be output to the display control device 81. FIG. Upon receiving the VB mode end command, the display control device 81 uses the auxiliary display section 65 or the like to notify that the VB mode will end in the current game. Such notification will be described later in detail. After performing the process of step S1719, the number-of-games management process is terminated.

If it is determined in step S1714 that the zone is an additional special zone, the process proceeds to step S1720. As already explained, even if it is determined in step S1707 that the zone is the specialized zone in the AT mode, the process proceeds to step S1720. In step S1720, the special zone continuation game number is decremented by performing a process of subtracting 1 from the special zone continuation counter. Then, in step S1721, it is determined whether or not the special zone continuation counter is zero. If it is 0, the special zone flag is cleared in step S1722, and the special zone end command is set as an object to be output to the display control device 81 in step S1723. In the display control device 81 that has received the special zone end command, the auxiliary display unit 65 or the like notifies that the special zone ends in the current game. As such notification, for example, the number of games successfully added in total in the special zone this time is notified. After performing the process of step S1723, the number-of-games management process is terminated. If a negative determination is made in step S1713 or step S1721, the game count management process is terminated.

<End determination processing>
Next, as the processing at the end of the bonus, the end determination processing will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. As already explained, the end determination process is a process executed in step S614 in the bonus state process (FIG. 27). In the termination determination process, it is determined whether or not the bonus termination condition is satisfied, and when the bonus is to be terminated, processing for notification of winning such as the AT mode in which the bonus and the duplicate winning are performed, and the AT mode in which the bonus and the duplicate winning are performed. For example, processing for adding the number of games is performed.

That is, in step S1801, it is determined whether or not a minor winning combination has been established. During the bonus of the 1st BB and the 2nd BB, the 1st hand in the BB is established with a high probability, and the 2nd hand in the BB and the 3rd hand in the BB are partially established (FIG. 28). When the 1st role in the BB is won, the 1st minor role is mainly won, and a predetermined number (9 medals) of medals are paid out. This is a replay of the 10th replay, and medals are not paid out even if a prize is established. Also, during the CB, any of the CB medium and small wins 1 to CB small and medium wins 4 is won, and even if you win any of them, the first small win is mainly established and the predetermined number (15) of medals will be paid out. Step S1801 is a process for determining whether or not a small winning combination that causes a medal payout has been established among the winning combinations during the bonus or CB.

If it is determined in step S1801 that a small winning combination has been won, then in step S1802 processing is performed to subtract the current game payout number from the remaining payout number. If a negative determination is made in step S1801, or after the processing of step S1802 is executed, it is determined in step S1803 whether or not the remaining number of payouts has become 0. If it is not 0, the end determination process is terminated as it is. If it is 0, after the bonus end command is set as an object to be output to the display control device 81 in step S1804, in steps S1805 to S1814, processing for notification of winning such as AT mode, AT mode, etc. Processing for adding the number of continuous games is performed.

In step S1805, it is determined whether or not the AT mode winning flag is set. If the AT mode win flag is set, the number of precursor games is selected in step S1806, the number of precursor games is set in step S1807, and the precursor command is set in step S1808. Incidentally, in the present embodiment, in the lottery process for the number of precursory games in step S1806, a lottery is performed in which the number of precursory games is 0 with a probability of 100%. That is, in step S1807, the number of premonitory games of 0 game is always set, and the success of the AT mode or the like is announced in the next game after the bonus ending game. After executing the process of step S1808, the end determination process is terminated.

If the AT mode winning flag is not set in step S1805, it is determined in step S1809 whether or not the VB mode winning flag is set. If the VB mode win flag is set, the process for the precursor mode of steps S1806 to S1808 is performed, and then the end determination process is terminated.

Note that the case where the bonus is terminated while the AT mode win flag is set means that the AT mode and the bonus are won at the same time, or that the bonus is won during the premonition mode of the AT mode win notification. On the other hand, when the bonus is terminated while the VB mode winning flag is set, the VB mode and the bonus are simultaneously won in the AT mode, or during the premonitory mode of the VB mode winning notification (in this case, This is a case where the bonus is won in the next game after winning the VB mode, because the premonition mode of the 0 game is selected.

If the VB mode winning flag is not set in step S1809, the process proceeds to step S1810. In step S1810, it is determined whether or not the AT mode addition flag is set. If the AT mode addition flag is not set, the end determination process is terminated. If the AT mode addition flag is set, AT mode addition game number lottery processing is performed in step S1811, AT mode game addition processing is performed in step S1812, and addition notification processing is performed in step S1813. , and an addition command is set in step S1814. The processes of steps S1811 to S1814 are the same as the processes of steps S1017 to S1020. After executing the process of step S1814, the end determination process ends.

As described above, on the main controller 101 side, (1) processing related to the display mode transition lottery, (2) processing for shifting the game state based on the result of the display mode transition lottery, and (3) winning result. As a result of the processing for shifting the display mode based on , the pressing order notification effect is generated by the auxiliary display section 65, the game state is shifted so as to follow the transition of the display mode, and further, A pressing order bell winning can be generated by the pressing order notification performance by the auxiliary display section 65, and a large amount of medals can be expected to be obtained.

Here, when the pressing order replay or the pressing order bell win is performed, if the pressing order notification effect by the auxiliary display unit 65 (the pressing order notification effect by the display control device 81) is performed, in addition to the pressing order notification effect, the main control The instruction monitor 68 connected to the device 101 also informs of the pressing order. The configuration of this instruction monitor 68 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 52(a) is a front view of the instruction monitor 68, and FIG. 52(b) is a diagram for explaining the relationship between the display mode of the instruction monitor 68 and the display contents.

As shown in FIG. 52(a), the instruction monitor 68 is provided with eight display segments N1 to N8. Each of the display segments N1 to N8 has an individual light source composed of an LED, and by controlling the on/off of these individual light sources, it is possible to light only one arbitrary display segment, Any combination of indicator segments can be illuminated. As a result, the instruction monitor 68 individually displays predetermined symbols (including alphabets and numbers). Since all of the individual light sources irradiate light of the same color, the display segments N1 to N8 display the same color.

Specifically, the first display segment N1 to the seventh display segment N7 are all linear display segments. The segment N7 is arranged so that at least the numbers "1" to "6" can be displayed. The eighth display segment N8 is a circular display segment, and is arranged laterally in the lower right portion of the region in which the first display segment N1 to the seventh display segment N7 are provided. Therefore, the indication monitor 68 can display at least "1" to "6", "1." to "6.", and ".".

Note that the display segments N1 to N8 may have any shape and layout as long as the indication monitor 68 can individually display a plurality of patterns of symbols. A configuration using one segment, nine segments, or the like may also be used. Further, it is not essential that the colors displayed in the respective display segments N1 to N8 be the same, and a configuration may be adopted in which the colors displayed in the respective display segments N1 to N8 can be changed as appropriate. In addition, the configuration for controlling the lighting or extinguishing of each of the display segments N1 to N8 by controlling the on/off of the light source is not essential. A segmented display may be constructed with a single backlight and liquid crystal display. Further, instead of applying the segment display to each display area, the symbols may be displayed by other types of display devices such as a liquid crystal display device, an organic EL display device, a CRT, and a dot matrix.

The first display segment N1 to the seventh display segment N7 are display segments used for informing of the order of operations for pushing down. For example, as shown in FIG. 52(b), the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in the order of "left"→"middle"→"right", which is advantageous for the player to achieve a winning mode. In this case, the sixth display segment N6 and the seventh display segment N7 are illuminated and "1" is displayed. Further, when the winning mode advantageous to the player is obtained by performing the stop operation in the order of "right" → "left" → "middle" as the order of operation of the stop switches 42 to 44, the first display segment N1, The second display segment N2, the third display segment N3, the fifth display segment N5, and the sixth display segment N6 are illuminated to display "5". That is, the numbers (symbols) displayed in the display segments N1 to N7 are associated one-to-one with the operating order of the stop switches 42 to 44, and are displayed in the display segments N1 to N7. By stopping the stop switches 42 to 44 based on the numbers (symbols), it is possible for the player to win in an advantageous manner.

The eighth display segment N8 is a transition to an advantageous section, and a predetermined start condition including a notification condition in which an AT mode winning notification is performed and an AT notification flag is set, etc. is established, the light is lit in the game in which the start condition is established. Also, when the AT mode or SAT mode ends and the advantageous section shifts to the normal section, the light is turned off.

In other words, the navigation state (AT mode, SAT mode, high frequency mode) in which the operation order of the push order bell and the push order replay can be easily reported to the player in an advantageous manner to facilitate winning, and the navigation state can be activated. A chance state (CZ mode, first BB, high probability mode) that makes it easier to win the transition lottery, or a winning state that has won the lottery but has not transitioned to the navigation state or chance state. (Winning mode) is defined as an advantageous interval (specific game state, specific mode), and the eighth display segment N8 is illuminated during the specific interval in which the benefits of the push order notification can be obtained in the advantageous interval. , a section indicator (specific notification means) that is turned off during a normal section that is not an advantageous section or during a non-specific section that is an advantageous section but is not a specific section.

As already explained, the instruction monitor 68 having the first display segment N1 to the seventh display segment N7 as the push order display and the eighth display segment N8 as the interval display displays the payout number on the game panel 25. It is arranged near the side of the display unit 62 . That is, the instruction monitor 68 is arranged above the stop switches 42 to 44 and the like operated by the player. is not placed on the decorative panel that is Therefore, it can be said that the eighth display segment N8 is prevented from being hidden by a hand or the like that operates the stop switches 42 to 44, etc., and is arranged at a position where the player can easily visually recognize it. In addition, since it is arranged near the number-of-payouts display section 62, which is easy for the player who advances the game to win medals, it can be said that overlooking by the player is suppressed.

Furthermore, in the instruction monitor 68, the eighth display segment N8 in particular has a brightness higher than the brightness of the surrounding display portions (for example, the payout number display portion 62 and the backlight of the game panel 25). The brightness of the corresponding LED is determined so that the brightness is twice the brightness of the surrounding display. Therefore, even when both the eighth display segment N8 and the surrounding display units are under light emission control (when they are in a lighting state), the eighth display segment N8 is conspicuous. ing. Regarding the illuminance toward the front of the game machine, the 8th display segment N8 has a higher illuminance toward the front of the game machine than the surrounding display units (more specifically, the illuminance toward the front of the game machine is 2/2 of the illuminance of the surrounding display units. The illuminance of the corresponding LED is determined so that the illuminance is doubled). With such a configuration as well, the visibility of the eighth display segment N8 is improved, and overlooking when the eighth display segment N8 is in the lighting state is suppressed.

The section display first process and the section display second process will be described below as processes related to turning on/off the eighth display segment N8.

<Section display first process>
First, the section display first process will be described with reference to FIG. The first section display process is a process executed in step S316 in the lottery process (FIG. 16), in which the lottery result of the game is determined based on the operation of the start lever 41, and This is performed after the display mode transition lottery, etc. (lottery result handling process) is performed.

In step S1901, it is determined whether or not the eighth display segment N8 as the interval display is being displayed, more specifically, whether or not the eighth display segment N8 is being lit. As described above, the case where the eighth display segment N8 is being lit indicates the case in which, among the advantageous sections, the specific section satisfies at least the notification condition that the push order notification may occur. If a negative determination is made in step S1901 and it is determined that the eighth display segment N8 is being turned off, the process proceeds to step S1902.

In step S1902, it is determined whether or not the advantageous section flag is set in the various flag storage area 106d. As already explained, the advantageous section flag is a flag that is set in the advantageous section transition lottery process (FIG. 33) when the lottery for transition to the advantageous section is won. If the advantageous section flag has been set, it is determined in step S1903 whether or not the advantageous section winning game flag has been set. The advantageous zone winning game flag is a flag that is set when the advantageous zone transition lottery is won in the advantageous zone transition lottery process, and is a flag for the CPU 102 to identify the winning game. If the advantageous section winning game flag is set, a process of clearing the advantageous section winning game flag is executed in step S1904. If the advantageous section winning game flag is not set in step S1903, the process proceeds to step S1905.

In step S1905, it is determined whether or not the counting of the number of games in the advantageous interval, more specifically, the counting of the number of advantageous interval games AG in the various counter areas 106e has started. If the measurement of the number of games in the advantageous interval AG has not started, processing for starting the measurement of the number of games in the advantageous interval AG is performed in step S1906. The number of games in the advantageous interval AG corresponds to grasping means for grasping the number of games executed in the advantageous interval, and a process of adding one to each game in the advantageous interval is executed.

If it is determined in step S1905 that the measurement has already started, or if the process of step S1906 has been executed, the process advances to step S1907. In step S1907, it is determined whether or not the AT notification flag is set. As already explained, when the AT mode winning notification is performed and the AT notification flag is set, the pushing order notification when the pushing winning role is won becomes possible, and the above notification conditions are satisfied. . If it is determined in step S1907 that the AT notification flag is set, then in step S1908 the eighth display segment N8 is turned on to start displaying the section display. In addition, in the main controller 101, when starting to display the eighth display segment N8 as the section indicator in the lighting state, a predetermined sound effect (for example, a mechanical sound "Gago!") is emitted from the speaker 64. A command for sound output is output to the display control device 81 so that sound) is output. The display control device 81 controls the speaker 64 so as to emit the predetermined sound effect based on the sound output command. Incidentally, when the display of the eighth display segment N8 is started, an effect may be generated in the auxiliary display section 65 or another display section. The configuration may be such that the display control device 81 controls the auxiliary display section 65 and the like so that the corresponding effect is performed.

If it is determined in step S1901 that the eighth display segment N8 as the section display is being displayed, then in step S1909 processing is executed to continue the display during the advantageous section. Specifically, in step S1909, processing is performed to continue the state in which the eighth display segment N8 is in the lighting state. That is, the processing for ending the display of the section indicator is not performed in the first section display processing.

If it is determined in step S1902 that the advantageous interval flag is not set, or if the game is a winning game even if the advantageous interval flag is set (after executing the processing of step S1904), the winning game Even if not, if the situation does not allow the pressing order notification to occur (if it is determined in step S1907 that the AT notification flag is not set), the process proceeds to step S1910. In step S1910, a process of adding 1 to the role ratio first counter provided in the various counter areas 106e is executed. The role ratio first counter is a counter for counting the number of games in which the pressing order notification does not occur, that is, the number of games in the normal section and the non-specific section.

After executing the display start processing of the section indicator in step S1908 and after executing the display continuation processing in step S1909, the process proceeds to step S1911. In step S1911, a process of adding 1 to the role ratio second counter provided in the various counter areas 106e is executed. The role ratio second counter is a counter for counting the number of games in which the pressing order notification can occur, that is, the number of games in a specific section.

After executing the process of step S1910 or step S1911, the role ratio calculation process is executed in step S1912. In this process, the value of the second role ratio counter is divided by the added value (total number of games) of the first role ratio counter and the second role ratio counter. That is, the role ratio calculation process is a process of calculating the ratio of the number of games in which the pressing order notification can occur among the total number of games. Then, in step S1913, a process for displaying the calculation result of step S1912 on the role ratio monitor 77 is executed.

As shown in FIG. 5, the role ratio monitor 77 has a plurality of 7-segment display sections each composed of 7 segments for display. Specifically, the role ratio monitor 77 has a first display section 77a, a second display section 77b, a third display section 77c, a fourth display section 77d, and a fifth display section 77e as seven-segment display sections. there is The display segments in the first display portion 77a to the fifth display portion 77e have individual light sources composed of LEDs, similarly to the display segments N1 to N7 of the instruction monitor 68, and these individual light sources are controlled on and off. By doing so, only one arbitrary display segment can be lit, and an arbitrary combination of display segments can be lit. As a result, the role ratio monitor 77 can individually display a predetermined symbol (including alphabets and numbers), and in particular, the role ratio monitor 77 can display a five-digit number. there is

In step S1913, the result of the arithmetic processing in step S1912 is output to the role ratio monitor 77, and each display section 77a to 77e in the role ratio monitor 77 is displayed so that a four-digit number is displayed on the role ratio monitor 77. Control the display. Specifically, out of the total number of games, the ratio of the number of games in which the push order notification can occur is a number smaller than 1, such as "0.5012", and up to four decimal places. A number is displayed on the role ratio monitor 77 . After executing the process of step S1913, the section display first process ends.

It should be noted that the display control of the role ratio monitor 77 may be performed after rounding off the fifth digit below the decimal point in the arithmetic processing of step S1912. In addition, since the first display portion 77a of the role ratio monitor 77 basically displays "0", the first display portion 77a may be omitted, or the first display portion 77a may be printed. A configuration may be adopted in which "0" is always displayed by . A decimal point may be displayed by printing or the like between the first display portion 77a and the second display portion 77b.

<Second section display processing>
Next, the section display second process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. As already explained, the second section display process is a process executed in step S415 of the reel control process. etc. (processing for dealing with winning results) is performed.

In step S2001, it is determined whether or not the advantageous section flag is set. If it is not set, the section display second process is terminated. If the advantageous interval flag is set, in step S2002, a process of counting the number of games during the advantageous interval is executed. Specifically, a process of adding 1 to the number of games in the advantageous section AG is performed. After executing the process of step S2002, in step S2003, the process of updating the advantageous section increase/decrease number ZM provided in the various counter areas 106e is executed. The advantageous interval increase/decrease number ZM is a counter for the CPU 102 to grasp the increase/decrease number of medals in the advantageous interval (the difference between the number of medals betted and the number of medals paid out in each game in the advantageous interval). In S2003, based on the winning result of the current game (previous winning result handling process and payout determination process), the number of medals increased or decreased (the number of medals paid out in the current game - the number of bets in the current game) is grasped. Then, a process of adding the medal increase/decrease number to the advantageous section increase/decrease number ZM is performed. For example, if the current game is a 3-bet game and nine medals are paid out, the medal increase/decrease number is +6, and in step S2003, +6 is added to the advantageous section increase/decrease number ZM. If the current game is a 3-bet game and medals are not paid out, the medal increase/decrease number is -3, and in step S2003, -3 is added to the advantageous section increase/decrease number ZM.

After executing the process of step S2003, the remaining game number management process is executed in step S2004, and the remaining number management process is executed in the following step S2005. The number-of-remaining-games management process is a process for managing whether or not the advantageous section reaches the upper limit number of games based on the number of remaining games in the AT mode. The number-of-remaining-numbers management process is a process for managing whether or not the number of remaining games in the current number of remaining games has reached the upper limit number of increases in the advantageous section based on the number of remaining games in the AT mode.

Regarding the remaining game number management process, specifically, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 55, first, in step S2101, the precursor game number G1 is grasped. The number of precursor games G1 indicates the number of remaining precursor mode games, for example, when the current state is the precursor mode in the advantageous section, and is decremented by 1 for each game in the game number management process (FIG. 50). . In step S2102, the AT mode continuation number G2 is grasped. The AT mode continuation number G2 represents the number of remaining AT mode games, for example, when the current state is the AT mode in the advantageous section, and is subtracted by 1 for each game in the game number management process (FIG. 50). . In step S2103, the VB mode continuation count G3 is grasped. The VB mode continuation number G3 represents the number of remaining VB mode games, for example, when the current state is the VB mode in the advantageous section, and is subtracted by 1 for each game in the game number management process (FIG. 50). . In step S2104, the specialized zone continuation number G4 is grasped. The specialized zone continuation count G4 represents the number of games remaining in the specialized zone, for example, when the current status is the specialized zone in the advantageous section, and is set by one for each game in the game number management process (FIG. 50). subtracted. In step S2105, the number of remaining BB games G5 is grasped. The number of remaining BB games G5 indicates the number of remaining BB mode games, for example, when the current state is the BB mode (bonus state) in the advantageous section, and is performed each time the number-of-games management process (FIG. 50) is started. Then, it is decremented by 1 in a subtraction process (not shown) on condition that the BB mode is on.

Here, values of 0 or more may be input for these continuation numbers G1 to G5 even if the mode or zone does not correspond to the current situation. Specifically, for example, in the VB mode, the specialized zone, or the BB mode, the counting of the number of remaining games in the AT mode is stopped. When a transition occurs, a value of 0 or more is input to the AT mode continuation count G2 and the continuation count of each mode.

In step S2106, a process of calculating the number of remaining games ZG in the advantageous section is performed by integrating G1 to G5 grasped in each process of steps S2101 to S2105. By performing such processing, it is possible to grasp how many games the advantageous section continues. In the following step S2107, the number of games in the advantageous interval (the number of games in the advantageous interval AG) and the remaining number of games ZG are added to calculate the total number of games in the advantageous interval SG. Then, in step S2108, the number of vacant games (the number of vacant games that can be added, the number of remaining games) FG is calculated by subtracting the above-mentioned total number of games SG in the advantageous interval from 1500G, which is the upper limit number of continuous games in the advantageous interval. process.

After the processing of step S2108 is performed, it is determined in step S2109 whether or not the number of idle games FG is greater than 0, that is, whether or not there is the number of idle games and can be added. If the free game number FG is greater than 0, the remaining game number management process is terminated. On the other hand, if the free game number FG is 0 or less, the process of setting the first excess flag in the various flag storage area 106d is executed in step S2110, and then the remaining game number management process is terminated. The first excess flag is a flag for the CPU 102 to recognize that it is specified that the first condition for forced termination of the advantageous section is satisfied.

In the remaining number management process, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 56, first, in step S2201, the advantageous section increase/decrease number ZM updated in step S2003 is grasped. In the subsequent step S2202, the number of games remaining in the advantageous section ZG (step S2106) calculated in the remaining game management processing in step S2004 and the expected net increase in the number of games in the advantageous section stored in the ROM 105 (expected increase/decrease number KM), a process of calculating the expected number of remaining increase/decrease numbers NM that can be obtained in the number of remaining games in the advantageous section is executed. In the present embodiment, the expected increase/decrease number of sheets KM is the net increase in number of sheets (approximately +2.46 ) is used. That is, for example, if the number of games remaining in the advantageous section ZG is 500 games, the expected remaining increase/decrease number of cards NM is 500 games×2.46 cards=1230 cards.

In step S2203, based on the advantageous section increase/decrease number ZM grasped in step S2201 and the expected remaining increase/decrease number NM calculated in step S2202, the current number of remaining games in the advantageous section is taken into consideration to obtain during the current advantageous section. A process of calculating the number of sheets expected to increase or decrease (total increase/decrease expected number of sheets SM) is performed. Then, in step S2204, a process of calculating the number of blank sheets FM that can be increased is performed. The processing of step S2204 corresponds to the processing of calculating the number of vacant games FG that can be added in step S2108 in the number-of-remaining-games management processing. The process of step S2204 predicts in advance that the advantageous section will be forcibly terminated under the second forced termination condition in the subsequent game. It is a process to That is, in step S2204, the total expected increase/decrease number of sheets SM calculated in step S2203 is subtracted from 2400 sheets, which is the upper limit increase in the advantageous section.

In step S2205, based on the result of processing in step S2204, it is determined whether or not the number of available blank sheets FM that can be increased is 0 or less, and the process will be forcibly terminated under the second forced termination condition in the future. If the number of empty sheets FM is equal to or greater than 1, it is determined that the number of increments has not reached the upper limit, and the remaining number management processing is terminated. If the empty number FM is 0 or less, the process advances to step S2206 to set the second excess flag in the various flag storage area 106d, and then the remaining number management process ends. The second excess flag is a flag for the CPU 102 to recognize that the second forced termination condition can be satisfied thereafter.

By setting the first excess flag and the second excess flag, in this embodiment, even if a specific role is won during the advantageous section, the execution of the game number addition lottery etc. during the AT mode is limited. . More specifically, for example, in step S1014 or step S1201 AT mode game number addition lottery process, if the first excess flag or the second excess flag is set, the lottery process is executed. Restricted, no additional wins (or even if won, 0 games added). As a result, it is possible to prevent the misunderstanding that the advantageous section will continue for the upper limit number of games or more by adding the game to the amount that cannot be continued.

It should be noted that once the first excess flag and the second excess flag are set, the remaining game number management process may not be executed in the current advantageous section.

Returning to the description of the second section display process (FIG. 54), after executing the process of step S2005, the process for RT transition is executed in step S2006. The RT transition process determines whether or not the conditions that make it possible to transition to the fourth RT state are met, and sets a flag for notifying the transition to the fourth RT state (notification flag for transition) based on the satisfaction of the conditions. processing. Such processing will be described later in detail.

After the processing of step S2006 is executed, in step S2007, it is determined whether or not the number of games AG in the advantageous interval has reached the upper limit number of games of 1500, or whether the number of increase/decrease number of advantageous interval games ZM is equal to or greater than 2400 which is the upper limit increase in number of games. Determine whether or not. If any of these forced termination conditions are satisfied, the number of games in the advantageous section AG and the number of increased/decreased number of advantageous section games ZM are cleared to 0 in step S2008. In the subsequent step S2009, processing for ending the display of the eighth display segment N8 as the section display is performed. Then, in step S2010, after performing a process of initializing parameters and information such as various flags and counters in the advantageous section, the section display second process ends.

More specifically, the data initialization process in step S2010 is a process of resetting the flags and counters set upon transition to the current advantageous section and the flags and counters set during the current advantageous section to their initial values. . For example, if the AT mode winning flag or the like is set at the time of transition to the advantageous section, or the VB mode winning flag is set during the AT mode, and if the flag remains set until this initialization process, these winning clear the flag. Also, in the initialization processing, if the AT notification flag, AT mode flag, VB mode flag, special zone flag, etc. are set, these flags are also cleared. Furthermore, if the omen counter, the counter for the number of continued games such as the attack mode, etc. are greater than zero, these counters are all reset to zero. In other words, the initialization process initializes all variables and parameters affecting the performance related to the push order notification regarding the advantageous section as an advantageous state using the push order notification, and clears the RAM for such variables and parameters. This is the process of performing

If it is determined in step S2007 that the number of games in the advantageous section AG has not reached the upper limit value, or if it is determined that the number of increase/decrease numbers in the advantageous section ZM has not reached the upper limit increase number, the process proceeds to step S2011, and the various flag storage area 106d. determines whether or not the AT non-winning flag is set. As already explained, the AT non-win flag is a flag that is set when the lottery for shifting to the AT mode is not won. When the AT non-election flag is set, in step S2012 AT non-election third processing is executed, and then the section display second processing is terminated. The AT non-winning third process will be described later in detail.

If the AT non-election flag is not set, in step S2013, it is determined whether or not the normal end condition of the advantageous section is established. More specifically, neither the AT mode winning flag nor the AT mode flag is set, and it is determined whether or not the number of remaining continuous games including the mode higher than the AT mode is 0. If neither the AT mode winning flag nor the AT mode flag is set, the process advances to step S2008, and after the advantageous section end processing of steps S2008 to S2010 is performed, the section display second processing is ended. If a negative determination is made in both steps S2011 and S2013, the second section display process is terminated. In this case, the lighting display of the section indicator (the eighth display segment N8) continues.

Here, when the AT end processing is performed based on the 11th re-game winning or the 12th re-game winning in the above step S1626, the AT mode flag is cleared as already explained. Therefore, when the 11th re-game winning or the 12th re-game winning is established during the AT mode, the affirmative determination is made in the above step S2013, and the processing for ending the advantageous interval is performed. In other words, when the transition to the fourth RT state occurs in the advantageous section, not only the AT mode but also the advantageous section ends.

<About the display of the push order indicator and section indicator and the progress of the game>
The relationship between the start and end of the advantageous section and the display of the eighth display segment N8 as the section indicator will be described with reference to FIG.

In the present slot machine 10, as shown in FIG. 57, the eighth display segment N8 as the section indicator is extinguished (not lit) in the normal section which is not the advantageous section. In this normal section, push order notification is not performed. In other words, it can be said that the normal section is a section that does not have such an instruction function as opposed to an advantageous section that has an instruction function such as the pressing order notification. A situation where the display mode is the normal mode mainly corresponds to the normal section.

In the normal section, for example, if you win a lottery to transition to the advantageous section by winning a weak watermelon role, etc., the number of games executed in the advantageous section from the game next to the game in which the game result that triggered the winning is established (advantageous section game counting of number AG) is started. Then, in the advantageous section, when the lottery for shifting to AT mode is won, and the winning notification and the AT notification flag are set, etc., when the push order notification can occur, the condition for starting the display of the section indicator is set. The eighth display segment N8 lights up assuming that it has been established.

After that, under the condition that the eighth display segment N8 is lit, the pressing order notification is generated using the first display segment N1 to the seventh display segment N7. In this case, as described above, the pressing order information (“1” to “6”) is displayed by the first display segment N1 to the seventh display segment N7. You can understand the order. In the push order notification, the display of the push order information starts when the start lever 41 is operated in the game, and the display ends when the third reel stop ON operation is performed in the game. If this game is not the final game of the advantageous section, only the display of the pushing order information by the first display segment N1 to the seventh display segment N7 is terminated when the third reel stop ON operation is performed, and the eighth display is displayed. The display of the advantageous section by the segment N8 is continued. Then, when the pushing order is won again in the next game and thereafter, the pushing order information corresponding to the pushing order is displayed in the first display segment N1 to the seventh display segment N7.

When the number of consecutive games in the advantageous section reaches the upper limit, or the number of increased medals in the advantageous section reaches the upper limit increase number, etc., when the final game of the advantageous section is reached, the eighth display segment N8 is also turned off to notify the advantageous section. ends. In the present embodiment, the eighth display segment N8 is turned off at the timing when the payout of medals is finished in the final game of the advantageous section (by the second section display process which is the process after the payout determination process). If medals are not paid out in the final game, the eighth display segment N8 is extinguished when the third reel stop OFF operation is performed. This allows the player to clearly understand that the game was the last game in the advantageous section.

As described above, the number of games in the advantageous interval is counted from the game following the game in which the lottery for transition to the advantageous interval has been won, while the pressing order is announced only during the period when the eighth display segment N8 is illuminated. Occur. In other words, even if it is an advantageous section, in a section (non-specific section) in which the eighth display segment N8 is turned off, the push order notification does not occur. In other words, by confirming whether or not the eighth display segment N8 as a section indicator is lit, it is possible to enjoy at least the benefits of the pushing order notification among the advantageous sections (specific section, substantial increase section). can be clearly understood. By doing so, there is no difference in the degree of advantage between a player who finishes the game without knowing that the situation is such that he/she can enjoy the benefits of the pushing order notification and a succeeding player who takes a seat after that. can be made In other words, in a situation where the eighth display segment N8 is not lit, the pressing order notification does not occur, so the game can be gracefully ended.

In addition, in the slot machine 10, regarding the game property of changing the degree of advantage by informing of the pressing order, especially regarding the lottery for transition to the advantageous section, the advantage is configured so that there is no difference in the degree of advantage due to the set value. Situations such as the AT mode where push order notification can occur are included in the advantageous section, and push order notification does not occur not only in the situation where the section display is not displayed in the advantageous section, but also in the normal section. In other words, in the game in which the benefits of the pressing order information are to be obtained, there is no difference in the degree of advantage depending on the set value for the lottery for transition to the advantageous section as the first stage. By doing so, the slot machine 10 provides a uniform advantage level for each gaming table (set value) and each game (situation), eliminates advantage/disadvantage between players, and obtains a privilege by aiming for a pattern. It is possible to realize a well-balanced game machine while fully enjoying the original game property and the relationship with the game property by the accompanying pushing order information.

<Processing related to notification effects on the sub side>
Next, as (4) processing related to notification effect on the sub side, processing for various notifications performed by the display control device 81 on the sub side will be described. As processing for various notifications, effect setting processing that is executed at a predetermined cycle (1.49 msec cycle) is provided. Therefore, the effect setting process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In the effect setting process, first, in step S2301, it is determined whether or not a new command has been received from the main controller 101. FIG. If a new command has been received, processing for storing the received command in RAM 183 is executed in step S2302. A command storage area is provided in the RAM 183, and the command storage area is configured as a ring buffer capable of individually storing a plurality of commands and reading out from previously stored commands.

If a negative determination is made in step S2301, or if the process of step S2302 has been executed, it is determined in step S2303 whether or not the newly received command was a command at the time of betting. The betting time command is a command output from the main controller 101 based on the betting operation being performed. In addition to the betting command set in step S207 of the normal processing, the mode transition notification processing (see 46) includes an AT mode winning notification command, a VB mode winning notification command, a bonus winning notification command, and the like. In the case of these bet time commands, a bet time effect setting process is executed in step S2304.

If a negative determination is made in step S2303, or if the processing of step S2304 has been executed, it is determined in step S2305 whether or not the newly received command was the start command. The command at the start is a command output from the main controller 101 based on the operation of the start lever 41. In addition to the lottery result command set in step S313 of the lottery process, the first to There are precursor commands and additional commands set in the third special combination process (FIGS. 34 to 37), push order notification commands set in the push order process (FIG. 48), and the like. In the case of these start time commands, a start time effect setting process is executed in step S2306.

If a negative determination is made in step S2305, or if the processing of step S2306 has been executed, it is determined in step S2307 whether or not the newly received command was a stop operation command. Each stop operation command is a command output from the main controller 101 based on the stop operation of each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. This is a stop instruction command set in . In the case of the stop instruction command as the command at each stop operation, at step S2308, effect setting processing at each stop operation is executed.

If a negative determination is made in step S2307, or if the process of step S2308 has been executed, it is determined in step S2309 whether or not the newly received command is a full stop command. The all-stopped command is a command output from the main controller 101 when all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are stopped, and is a winning result set in step S411 of the reel control process (FIG. 18). In addition to commands, AT mode start command, VB mode start command, special zone start command, AT mode end command, VB mode end command, special zone end command, third There are a 1 fixed RT start command, a 2nd fixed RT start command, and the like. In the case of these all-stop commands, a full-stop effect setting process is executed in step S2310.

If a negative determination is made in step S2309, or after the process of step S2310 is executed, other processes are executed in step S2311, and then the effect setting process is terminated. In step S2311, setting effects based on commands from the main control unit 101 other than when betting, starting, and stopping (for example, effects based on the operation of the settlement switch 59, etc.), and connecting without going through the main control unit 101 Based on the signal from the detected sensor (effect switch detection sensor, etc.), the setting of the effect, the setting for error notification, etc. are performed.

Below, the effect setting process at the time of betting, the effect setting process at the time of start, the effect setting process at the time of each stop operation, and the effect setting process at the time of all stop will be described. It should be noted that each effect setting process will be described with reference to schematic diagrams of display effects in FIGS. 68 to 73 .

<Production setting processing at the time of betting>
The effect setting process at the time of betting will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In step S2401, it is determined whether or not the AT mode winning notification command is included in the betting time command received this time. When the AT mode winning notification command is included, in step S2402, a process for setting the AT mode winning notification effect is performed. In the AT mode winning notification effect, for example, as shown in FIG. 69(a), the auxiliary display section 65 displays characters "AT confirmed". In addition, in the AT mode winning notification effect, the speaker 64 is controlled so that a corresponding sound effect (for example, a high-pitched female voice, "I did it!") is emitted.

If the AT mode winning notification command is not included in step S2401, it is determined in step S2403 whether or not the VB mode winning notification command is included as the betting command received this time. When the VB mode winning notification command is included, in step S2404, processing for setting the VB mode winning notification effect is performed. In the VB mode winning notification effect, for example, as shown in FIG. 69(b), the auxiliary display section 65 displays characters "V-BONUS confirmed". In addition, in the VB mode winning notification effect, the speaker 64 is controlled so that a corresponding sound effect (for example, male and female voices "Super lucky!") is emitted.

If the VB mode winning notification command is not included in step S2403, it is determined in step S2405 whether or not the bonus winning notification command is included as the betting command received this time. When the bonus winning notification command is included, in step S2406, the process of setting the bonus winning notification effect is performed. In the bonus-winning notification effect, for example, the auxiliary display unit 65 displays characters such as "You did it! Bonus confirmed". In addition, in the bonus winning notification effect, the speaker 64 is controlled so that a corresponding sound effect (for example, male and female voices saying "I did it!") is emitted.

If the bonus winning notification command is not included in step S2405, it is determined in step S2407 whether or not the special zone winning notification command is included as the betting time command received this time. When the special zone winning notification command is included, in step S2408, processing for setting the special zone winning notification effect is performed. In the special zone winning notification effect, for example, the auxiliary display unit 65 displays characters such as "Ride on!". In addition, in the special zone winning notification effect, the speaker 64 is controlled so that a corresponding sound effect (for example, a thick, ecstatic male voice, "Norinori!") is emitted.

After executing any one of the processes of step S2402, step S2404, step S2406 and step S2408, or when a negative determination is made in step S2407, in step S2409, after setting other effects at the time of betting, this End the effect setting process. In the process of step S2409, for example, in response to the reception of the bet command, the lamps around (or inside) the credit input switches 56 to 58 corresponding to the bet number are turned off to notify that the operation has been accepted. Alternatively, for example, processing for returning from the demo mode in which one condition is that no game has been played for a predetermined time, or lighting a lamp around the start lever 41 to inform that the operation is valid. processing, etc.

<Start effect setting processing>
Next, the start effect setting process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In step S2501, display mode setting processing is performed. In this processing, it is determined whether the display mode currently set on the main controller 101 side is the normal mode, AT mode, VB mode, or special zone, and the auxiliary display is performed in the corresponding display mode. It is set so that the display effect of the part 65 is performed. Specifically, in the various flag storage area 183a of the RAM 183 on the display control device 81 side, an area for setting an AT mode flag, a VB mode flag, and a specialized zone flag is provided as a flag for grasping the display mode. A corresponding flag is set at the start of each mode and cleared at the end. In step S2501, by grasping these various mode flags, the current display mode is specified, and the auxiliary display unit 65, speaker 64, upper lamp 63, etc. are controlled so that the corresponding effect is performed.

In the subsequent step S2502, based on the received lottery result command, it is determined whether or not the lottery result of the game to be started this time is the first prize. In the case of winning the pushing order, in step S2503, the pushing order notification process is performed. Here, the pressing order notification process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In step S2601, it is determined whether or not the pressing order notification command is included in the start time command received this time. If the pressing order notification command is not included, the main pressing order notification processing is terminated. If the pressing order notification command is included, the process advances to step S2602.

In step S2602, it is determined whether or not the current lottery results are the first promotion replays 1-4. In the case of the first promotion replays 1 to 4, in step S2603, the auxiliary display unit 65 or the like is controlled so as to notify the pressing order that the third replay win is established, and then the pressing order notification processing is performed. exit.

If it is determined in step S2602 that the first promotion replays 1-4 are not won, it is determined in step S2604 whether or not the current lottery result is drop replays 1-3. In the case of falling replays 1 to 3, the process advances to step S2605 to control the auxiliary display unit 65 or the like to perform push order notification that the first replay win is established, and then finish the push order notification process. do.

If it is determined in step S2604 that the replays are not fall replays 1 to 3, it is determined in step S2606 whether or not the current lottery results are the second promotion replays 1 and 2. If it is the second promotion replay 1 or 2, it is determined in step S2607 whether or not the VB mode winning notification effect or the specialized zone winning notification effect has already been executed. For example, when setting the VB mode winning notification effect in step S2404 and the special zone winning notification effect in step S2408, the various flag storage areas 183a of the RAM 183 indicate that VB winning or special zone winning has been announced. set a flag. The alerted flag is cleared upon transition to the VB mode or specialized zone. Then, in step S2607, the presence or absence of the notified flag may be determined. If the VB mode or special zone winning announcement has been completed, in step S2608, the auxiliary display unit 65 or the like is controlled so as to announce the pressing order in which the 4th and 5th regame winnings are established. , terminates the pressing order notification process. If the notification of winning in the VB mode or the special zone has not been completed, the process advances to step S2605 to notify the pressing order for the first regame winning, and then terminate the pressing order notification process.

If it is determined in step S2606 that it is not the second promotion replays 1 and 2, it is determined in step S2609 whether or not the current lottery result is BAR replay. In the case of BAR replay, it is determined in step S2610 whether or not the special zone winning notification effect has been executed. If it has already been announced that the special zone has been won, in step S2611, the auxiliary display unit 65 or the like is controlled so as to perform the push order notification that the seventh regame win is established, and then the push order notification process is executed. finish. If the special zone winning notification has not been completed, the process advances to step S2603 to perform the pressing order notification for the third re-game winning prize, and then terminate the pressing order notification process.

If it is determined in step S2609 that it is not a BAR replay, it is determined in step S2612 whether or not the current lottery results are transition replays 1 and 2. If it is transition replay 1 or 2, it is determined in step S2613 whether or not a transition replay notification flag is set in the various flag storage area 183a of the RAM 183 or not. The transition replay notification flag is a flag for the CPU 181 to recognize that the condition for allowing transition to the fourth RT state is satisfied. If the shift replay notification flag is set, the auxiliary display unit 65 or the like is controlled to perform the push order notification that the 11th and 12th regame winnings are established in step S2614, and then the push order notification process is performed. exit. If the shift replay notification flag is not set, the process proceeds to step S2605, and after notification of the pressing order for the first replay winning prize is performed, the pressing order notification processing is terminated.

If it is determined in step S2612 that the transition replays 1 and 2 are not performed, it is determined in step S2615 whether or not the current lottery result is Bell. If the bell is won, in step S2616, the auxiliary display unit 65 or the like is controlled so as to notify the pressing order that the bell wins as the first minor combination, and then the pressing order notification processing is terminated. . If a negative determination is made in step S2615, the pressing order notification process is terminated.

Returning to the description of the effect setting process at the start (FIG. 60), when it is determined in step S2502 that the push-up role is not won, it is determined in step S2504 whether or not the transition opportunity role is won. If the transition opportunity is won, a process for notification of the transition opportunity is performed in step S2505. The transition trigger notification process will be described later in detail.

If a negative determination is made in step S2504, or after the processing of step S2503 or step S2505 is executed, the process proceeds to step S2506. In step S2506, it is determined whether or not an add-on command has been received as the current start command. When the add-on command is received, in step S2507, the process of setting the add-on effect in advance is performed so that the add-on effect for the number of games corresponding to the add-on command is executed when the game is stopped. As the additional effect, for example, as shown in FIGS. 68(a) to 68(c), the auxiliary display section 65 displays a numerical value corresponding to the number of additional games. In addition, in the additional effect, the speaker 64 is controlled so that a corresponding sound effect (for example, an electronic sound “kyukyukyukyuuuin!”) is emitted.

Details of the processing for setting the additional effect in step S2507 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In step S2701, a process of grasping the number of added games to be notified is performed based on the added command received this time. In the following step S2702, processing for grasping notification timing is executed. The notification timing is the timing for executing the additional effect, and the timing is determined by the process (additional notification process) on the side of the main controller 101 described above. Information on the determined timing is set in the above-mentioned add-on command and output. Therefore, on the side of the display control device 81, it is possible to grasp the timing at which the addition effect should be executed by reading the addition command. As the notification timing, a game in which an additional effect should be executed and a timing corresponding to the stop operation of each of the stop switches 42 to 44 are set.

After grasping the notification timing in step S2702, it is determined in step S2703 whether or not the result of grasping in step S2702 is that an additional effect is to be performed in the current game. The case where the addition notification is not performed in the current game is the case where the subsequent addition notification is selected, and in this case, the setting processing of the addition effect is finished as it is. If an additional effect is to be performed in the current game, it is determined in step S2704 whether or not any of the reels is stopped and ON as the execution timing of the additional effect in the current game. If it is the stop ON time, in step S2705, the target reel for generating the additional effect is set, and the setting is made so that the additional effect is generated when the target reel is operated to stop ON. Specifically, a process of setting any of the first reel stop ON operation flag to the third reel stop ON operation flag in the various flag storage area 183a is performed. These flags are flags for the CPU 181 to grasp the timing of occurrence of the additional effect. Further, in step S2705, the effect data of the additional effect corresponding to the number of additional games to be generated at the time of the stop ON operation is read from the effect data storage area 182b, and the data is temporarily stored in the predetermined effect data setting area. I do. When the CPU 181 grasps that the additional performance is generated at the timing corresponding to the stop ON operation flag, the CPU 181 reads the performance data temporarily stored in the performance data setting area so that the additional performance is performed.

If a negative determination is made in step S2704, it is determined in step S2706 whether or not the stop OFF operation of the first reel or the second reel has been performed. When these reels are to be stopped and turned OFF, in step S2707, the target reel for which the additional effect is to be generated is set so that the additional effect is generated when the target reel is stopped and turned OFF. Specifically, a process of setting either the first reel stop OFF operation flag or the second reel stop OFF operation flag in the various flag storage area 183a is performed. These flags are also flags for the CPU 181 to comprehend the timing of generating the additional effect. Also, in step S2707, the effect data of the added effect corresponding to the number of added games is read out from the effect data storage area 182b, and the data is temporarily stored in the predetermined effect data setting area.

When a negative determination is made in step S2706, in step S2708, the current additional effect is set to occur when all the reels are stopped (when the third reel is stopped and turned OFF). Specifically, a process of setting a third reel stop OFF operation flag in the various flag storage area 183a is performed. Also, in step S2708, temporary storage processing of effect data of the additional effect corresponding to the number of additional games is performed. After executing the processing of step S2705, step S2707 or step S2708, the setting processing of the additional effect is terminated.

Returning to the description of the effect setting process at the start, if the addition command is not received in step S2506, or after the process of step S2507 is executed, the effect setting process during the bonus is executed in step S2508, and the process proceeds to step S2509. Then, in step S2510, after setting other start effects, the start effect setting process is terminated. The during-bonus effect setting process and the continuous effect setting process will be described later in detail. In the process of step S2510, for example, a process of setting an effect suggesting a lottery result corresponding to the start of the game, turning off the lamp around the start lever 41 to notify that the operation has been accepted, and the like are performed.

<Production setting processing at each stop operation>
Next, the effect setting processing at the time of stop operation performed in step S2308 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In step S2801, it is determined whether each stop operation command received this time is a stop ON operation command. The stop ON operation command is a command output from the main controller 101 when the stop switches 42 to 44 are pressed during the stop operation of each reel.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S2801, the process advances to step S2802 to determine whether or not an effect that occurs when the reels are stopped and ON is set as the current game effect. If not set, the setting process is terminated. If it is set, it is determined in step S2803 whether or not the stop ON operation command received this time is the stop operation of the reel that is the target of the set stop ON operation effect. If it is not the stop ON operation of the target reel, this setting process is terminated as it is. If it is the stop ON operation of the target reel, in step S2804, the auxiliary display unit 65 and the like are controlled so that the effect at the time of the stop ON operation is performed, and then this setting process ends.

For example, when an additional effect is set as the present stop ON operation effect, as shown in FIG. 68(a), the auxiliary display section 65 An additional performance will occur at . Also, in this case, the speaker 64 emits a sound effect corresponding to the added effect.

Further, for example, if the current game is a winning push order and a push order notification effect is set, the corresponding reel stops based on each stop ON operation, so that the push order notification effect is the next operation target. It changes to the production that shows the reel that becomes. Specifically, if all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are rotating before the stop ON operation effect, a display is made to indicate that the first reel is to be operated as shown in FIG. 47(a). . Then, when the corresponding reel (middle reel 32M in the figure) is stopped by the stop ON operation corresponding to the first reel, the next reel to be operated (right reel 32R in the figure) shown in FIG. 47(b) is displayed. change in performance. Further, if two reels are rotating before the effect at the time of the stop ON operation, the second reel is displayed as a stop target shown in FIG. When the reels are stopped, the display changes to the display indicating that the third reel is to be stopped (FIG. 47(c)).

If a negative determination is made in step S2801, the process advances to step S2805 to determine whether each stop operation command received this time is a stop OFF operation command. The stop OFF operation command is a command output from the main controller 101 when the pressing operation of the stop switches 42 to 44 among the stop operations of the reels is completed.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S2805, the process advances to step S2806 to determine whether or not an effect that occurs when the reels are stopped and turned OFF is set as the effect of the current game. If it is not set, the setting process is terminated. If it is set, it is determined in step S2807 whether or not the stop OFF operation command received this time is the stop operation of the reel that is the target of the set stop OFF operation effect. If it is not the stop OFF operation of the target reel, this setting process is terminated as it is. In the case of the stop OFF operation of the target reel, in step S2808, the auxiliary display unit 65 and the like are controlled so that the effect at the time of the stop OFF operation is performed, and then this setting process ends.

For example, when an additional effect is set as the present stop OFF operation effect, as shown in FIG. At the timing when the hand is released, an additional performance is generated on the auxiliary display section 65. - 特許庁Also, in this case, the speaker 64 emits a sound effect corresponding to the added effect. If a negative determination is made in step S2805, the effect setting process is terminated.

<Production setting processing at all stop time>
Next, the all-stop effect setting process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

First, in step S2901, it is determined whether or not the AT mode start command is included in the currently received stop command. When the AT mode start command is included, in step S2902, a process for setting the AT mode start effect is performed. In the AT mode start rendering, for example, as shown in FIG. 70(a), the auxiliary display section 65 displays characters "AT start!! LV.1". In addition, in the AT mode start presentation, the speaker 64 is controlled so that a corresponding sound effect (for example, a high-pitched female voice, "Let's go!") is emitted.

Incidentally, the display of "LV.1" in the AT mode start effect corresponds to the AT mode level. That is, the AT mode started this time is LV. This is a display indicating the 1 mode. When the AT mode level is LV. When the mode is promoted to the 2nd mode (when the promotion command is received), the characters "LV.2" are displayed on the auxiliary display section 65 as promotion effects. Also, if the AT mode level is LV. When promoted to 3 mode, the text "LV.3" is displayed, and LV. When promoted to 4 mode, the characters "LV.4" are displayed.

If the AT mode start command is not included in step S2901, it is determined in step S2903 whether or not the AT mode end command is included as the currently received stopping command. When the AT mode end command is included, in step S2904, processing for setting AT mode end effect is performed. In the AT mode ending effect, for example, as shown in FIG. 70(b), the characters "AT END" are displayed on the auxiliary display section 65, and the current AT mode (including VB mode and special zone) is displayed. and the total number of payouts in AT mode (including VB mode, specialized zone, and bonus) this time. In addition, in the AT mode termination presentation, the speaker 64 is controlled so that a corresponding sound effect (for example, "See you later" in a high-pitched voice of a woman) is emitted.

If the AT mode end command is not included in step S2903, it is determined in step S2905 whether or not the VB mode start command is included as the currently received stop command. If the VB mode start command is included, in step S2906, processing for setting the VB mode start effect is performed. In the VB mode start presentation, for example, as shown in FIG. 71(a), the auxiliary display section 65 displays characters "777 Lucky!!". In addition, in the VB mode start presentation, the speaker 64 is controlled so that a corresponding sound effect (for example, male and female voices "bonus start!") is emitted.

If the VB mode start command is not included in step S2905, it is determined in step S2907 whether or not the VB mode end command is included in the currently received stop command. If the VB mode end command is included, in step S2908, processing for setting a VB mode end effect is performed. In the VB mode end effect, for example, as shown in FIG. 71(b), the characters "V-BONUS END" are displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65, and the AT mode continuation game at the end of the current VB mode is displayed. number of continuous games (including VB mode and special zone) and the total payout number of AT mode (including VB mode, special zone and bonus) at the end of the current VB mode. In addition, in the VB mode end presentation, the speaker 64 is controlled so that a corresponding sound effect (for example, male and female voices saying "It's still going on") is emitted.

If the VB mode end command is not included in step S2907, it is determined in step S2909 whether or not the special zone start command is included in the currently received stop command. When the special zone start command is included, in step S2910, processing for setting the special zone start effect is performed. In the specialized zone start effect, for example, as shown in FIG. 72(a), the auxiliary display section 65 displays characters "Add Challenge!!" A character is displayed to indicate that In addition, in the special zone start presentation, the speaker 64 is controlled so that a corresponding sound effect (for example, "let's go" in a boy's voice) is emitted.

If the special zone start command is not included in step S2909, it is determined in step S2911 whether or not the special zone end command is included in the currently received stopping command. When the special zone end command is included, in step S2912, processing for setting the special zone end effect is performed. In the special zone end presentation, for example, the auxiliary display section 65 displays the total number of games added in the special zone this time. In addition, in the special zone end presentation, the speaker 64 is controlled so that a corresponding sound effect (for example, an electronic sound “kyukyukyukyuuuin!”) is emitted. It is preferable to change the display contents of the auxiliary display section 65 and the sound effects emitted from the speaker 64 according to the total number of additional games.

If the special zone end command is not included in step S2911, it is determined in step S2913 whether or not the bonus end command is included as the currently received stop command. When the bonus end command is included, in step S2914, processing for setting the bonus end effect is performed. In the bonus end effect, for example, the auxiliary display unit 65 displays the total number of payouts obtained during the bonus, and if the bonus is shifted to AT mode, VB mode, or special zone, AT mode ( Display the total number of payouts for VB mode, special zone, and bonus). In addition, in the bonus end effect, a character or the like suggesting these contents is performed according to the suitability of the AT mode and the number of additional games.

After executing any of steps S2902, S2904, S2906, S2908, S2910, S2912, and S2914, or after making a negative determination in step S2913, the process proceeds to step S2915. In step S2915, the auxiliary display unit 65 and the like are controlled so as to execute the additional effect when the additional effect is set. As already explained, the setting of the additional effect is performed in step S2507 in the start effect setting process. Specifically, in the setting process of the additional effect (FIG. 62), when the generation timing of the additional effect of this time is set at the time of full stop, as shown in FIG. , 32R are stopped, an additional effect is generated on the auxiliary display portion 65. - 特許庁Also, in this case, the speaker 64 emits a sound effect corresponding to the added effect.

After that, in step S2916, notification processing for RT shift is executed. The notification process for RT transition is a process for the fourth RT state, and such process will be described later in detail. After that, in step S2917, after setting other effects at the time of stop, the main effect setting process is terminated. In step S2917, for example, control is performed so that the upper lamp 63 is lit in a color corresponding to the winning combination, sound effect corresponding to the number of payouts of the winning combination is emitted from the speaker 64, or control is performed during replay. A sound effect corresponding to the automatic bet is emitted from the speaker 64.例文帳に追加

As described above, based on various commands from the main controller 101, the display control device 81 performs various processes for notifying the transition of the display mode, and the notification is performed by the auxiliary display unit 65 and the like. In addition, on the display control device 81 side, in addition to notification of the transition of the display mode, processing for effects during various games is performed.

<Production processing during various games>
In this embodiment, effects during bonuses and continuous effects are provided as effects during various games. The effect during the bonus is a effect performed in each game during the bonus state that is shifted based on the winning of the 1st BB or the 2nd BB. A continuous effect is a effect that makes the player expect an advantageous result (winning a bonus, AT mode, VB mode, etc.), and is performed over a plurality of times (four times in this embodiment). This is an effect that can be continued, and is an effect in which it is notified whether or not the advantageous result was obtained in the final round of the game.

<Bonus effect setting process>
First, the effect setting processing during bonus will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The during-bonus effect setting process is a process executed in step S2508 of the start time effect setting process (FIG. 60).

In the bonus effect setting process, in step S3001, it is determined whether or not the bonus game is started from the current game. The bonus game corresponds to the game from the game after winning the 1st BB or 2nd BB to the end of the bonus. The affirmative determination in step S3001 means that the 1st BB or the 2nd BB winning has been established in the previous game. In this case, in step S3002, a process of grasping the type of bonus for this time is performed. More specifically, it is determined whether the current bonus game is based on the first BB winning or the second BB winning. Then, in step S3003, a bonus effect corresponding to the bonus type ascertained in step S3002 is set. When a negative determination is made in step S3001, or after the processing of step S3003 is executed, the during-bonus effect setting processing is terminated.

Incidentally, in the present embodiment, the contents of the bonus effect are different between the bonus game based on the first BB winning and the bonus game based on the second BB winning to such an extent that the player can identify them. More specifically, in the bonus game based on the 1st BB winning, the auxiliary display section 65 is set with a bonus effect in which live-action moving image effects are performed, and in the bonus game based on the 2nd BB winning, the animation A bonus effect is set in which the effect is performed by. Also, the sound effects (songs) output from the speaker 64 are different between the first BB and the second BB.

Both bonus effects are effects that are performed independently regardless of the progress of the game, and are set to be performed repeatedly as long as the bonus game continues. For example, a five-minute animation performance or animation performance is set as a unit performance, and when the unit performance ends five minutes after the start of the bonus performance, the unit performance is set to start again from the beginning. Note that the effect on the auxiliary display section 65 may be stopped at the screen at the end of the unit effect, and only the sound effect (song) may be repeated. Further, the effects on the auxiliary display section 65 may be performed in synchronization with the progress of each game, and only the sound effects (songs) may be performed independently regardless of the progress of each game.

As described above, while the bonus effect based on the 1st BB win and the bonus effect based on the 2nd BB win can be identified, the game result that triggered the 1st BB win or the 2nd BB win can be identified from the bonus effect. It is set to be impossible or difficult to identify. That is, regarding the bonus effect based on the 1BB winning, for example, the bonus effect is distinguished between the case of winning the 1BB with the opportunity of winning one special reply A and the case of winning the first BB with the opportunity of winning one special reply AB. Impossible or difficult to identify, more specifically, the same bonus effect is executed. In addition, the same applies to the bonus effect based on the 2nd BB winning. It is difficult, and the same bonus effect is executed.

<Processing for continuous production>
The outline of the continuous effect will be described with reference to FIG.

For example, as shown in FIG. 73(a), at the start of the first game in which the continuous effect is set, a display suggesting the number of times the continuous effect is continued is displayed (in the figure, four stages are displayed corresponding to the continuous effect of four games). It shows the daruma dropping performance). Then, at the end of the first game in which the continuous effect is set, an effect is performed to notify whether or not the continuous effect is to be continued (the figure shows the effect that the first daruma drop is successful, It indicates that the continuous production will continue). If the continuous effect is interrupted, at the end of the first game in which the continuous effect is set, an effect is performed to notify that the continuous effect will end in the middle (for example, an effect that the daruma drop in the first step fails). ). The effect regarding whether or not to continue the continuous effect is the same in each game in the continuous effect.

As shown in FIG. 73(b), at the start of the second game in which continuous effects are set, a display suggesting the number of remaining continuous effects is performed (in the figure, the remaining three daruma drop effects). Then, at the end of the second game, an effect is performed to notify whether or not the continuous effect is to be continued (the figure shows the effect that the second daruma drop is successful, indicating that the continuous effect is continued). ).

As shown in FIG. 73(c), at the start of the third game in which continuous effects are set, a display indicating the number of remaining continuous effects is performed (in the figure, the remaining two daruma drop effects). Then, at the end of the third game, an effect is performed to notify whether or not the continuous effect is to be continued. ).

As shown in FIG. 73(d), at the start of the final game (fourth game) of the continuous effect, a display indicating that it is the final game of the continuous effect is performed (in the figure, one-stage daruma dropping effect). Then, at the end of the final game, an effect is given as to whether or not the result was advantageous to the player (the figure shows the effect that the daruma drop in the final stage was successful).

As described above, in the continuous effect, the effect of the previous game is inherited and the effect of the next game is set, and the effect of each game has continuity. In addition, it is possible to clearly recognize what game the current game is from the start of the continuous effect (how many games are there until the end of the continuous effect).

Here, in each game of the continuous effect, whether or not the continuous effect continues to the next game is set so that the continuation rate increases as the game of the continuous effect progresses. That is, at the end of the first game of the continuous effect, there is the highest possibility that the discontinuation of the continuous effect will be reported, and the more the game progresses, the lower the possibility that the discontinuation will be reported. Therefore, in the continuous effect, the player's level of interest greatly differs depending on what game the current game is in the continuous effect, and as the game progresses from the start game to the end game, the player's interest becomes high. .

Hereinafter, as the processing related to the above-mentioned continuous effect, the process for notifying the transition opportunity role (step S2505) and the continuous effect setting process (step S2509) in the start time effect setting process (FIG. 60) will be described respectively.

<Transition trigger notification process>
66, first, in step S3101, a chance effect lottery process for determining whether or not to set a chance effect as the present game effect is executed. In the chance production, as shown in FIG. 72(b), for example, the auxiliary display unit 65 displays characters "Chance!!" to correspond to and display each. In addition, in the chance production, the speaker 64 is controlled so that a corresponding sound effect (for example, an electronic sound of "kyui") is emitted. In the chance effect lottery process, for example, a lottery is performed so that the chance effect occurs about half the time when the transition opportunity role is won. It should be noted that the winning probability of the chance effect lottery process may differ depending on the type of transition opportunity combination, display mode, game state, setting value, and the like. In subsequent step S3102, it is determined whether or not the lottery process in step S3101 has been won. If the player wins, in step S3103, a chance effect is set to be performed as the effect of the current game.

Here, in the slot machine 10, a game mode recommended for establishing a winning of each minor combination including the shift trigger combination will be described.

Among the winable hands in each game, strong cherry, weak cherry, strong watermelon, and weak watermelon are set as the so-called small winning combinations that cannot be won depending on the operation timing of the stop switches 42-44. . More specifically, as already explained, the strong cherry is a combination that can win any one of the 28th minor combination, the 32nd minor combination to the 35th minor combination, and the 28th minor combination symbol on the left reel 32L, The 32nd to 35th minor symbol symbols are the “cherry” symbol and the “second replay” symbol. In this case, in the 3-bet game, if the stop operation of the left reel 32L is performed at the timing when the seventh "red bell" symbol to the twentieth "white bell" symbol reaches the upper stage of the left reel 32L, None of the 28th minor symbol, the 32nd to 35th minor symbols, ie, the "cherry" symbol and the "second replay" symbol, can be stopped on the active line. Therefore, if the stop operation of the left reel 32L is performed at these timings, a strong cherry combination may be missed.

In addition, the weak cherry is a combination that can win any one of the 27th minor combination, the 32nd minor combination to the 35th minor combination, and the 27th minor combination symbol, the 32nd minor combination symbol to the 32nd minor combination symbol for the left reel 32L. The 35 small combination symbols are a "cherry" symbol and a "second replay" symbol. Even in this case, in the 3-bet game, when the left reel 32L is stopped at the timing when the seventh "red bell" symbol to the twentieth "white bell" symbol reach the upper stage of the left reel 32L, None of the 27th minor symbol, 32nd minor symbol to 35th minor symbol "Cherry" symbol and "2nd replay" symbol can be stopped on the active line. Therefore, if the stop operation of the left reel 32L is performed at these timings, a weak cherry combination may be missed.

The strong watermelon is a winning combination that can win either the 30th or 41st minor combination, and the 30th or 41st minor combination symbol for the left reel 32L is a "watermelon" symbol. In this case, in the 3-bet game, when the left reel 32L is stopped at the timing when the ninth “red 7” symbol to the third “white bell” symbol reach the upper stage of the left reel 32L, the 30th The minor symbol and the 41st minor symbol "watermelon" cannot be stopped on the active line. Therefore, if the left reel 32L is stopped at these timings, the strong watermelon combination will be missed.

The weak watermelon is a winning combination that can win either the 29th or 41st minor combination, and the 29th or 41st minor combination symbol on the left reel 32L is a "watermelon" symbol. Even in this case, in the 3-bet game, when the left reel 32L is stopped at the timing when the ninth "red 7" symbol to the third "white bell" symbol reach the upper stage of the left reel 32L, The 29th minor symbol and the 41st minor symbol "Watermelon" symbol cannot be stopped on the active line. Therefore, if the left reel 32L is stopped at these timings, the weak watermelon combination will be missed.

Then, when the left reel 32L is stopped while leaving the possibility of winning for any of these combinations that can be missed, the fourth "cherry" symbol to the sixth "second replay" symbol are displayed on the left reel 32L. It is necessary to perform a stop operation when reaching the upper stage. In the following description, this operation mode of the left reel 32L is also referred to as a specific operation mode (first operation mode) as an operation mode that does not cause a failure, and each operation mode that causes a failure is referred to as a non-specified operation. It is also called a mode (second operation mode).

In the chance presentation set in step S3103, it is suggested that the winning combination of this time is one of the transition trigger roles, but it is set so that it is impossible or difficult to determine which transition trigger role it is. It is That is, when the chance effect is performed, the winning combination of this game is likely to be either a strong cherry, a weak cherry, a strong watermelon, a weak watermelon, etc., but it is either a strong cherry or a weak cherry. It is not possible to distinguish whether it is a strong watermelon or a weak watermelon, or whether it is a strong cherry or a strong watermelon. Therefore, the player operates the left reel 32L in the above-described specific operation mode so as not to cause a dropout even if any of the transition timing combinations is won.

Further, the chance effect is not always generated in the game in which the transition opportunity role is won, but is generated under the condition that the game is won in the chance effect lottery process (step S3101). Then, it is recommended to operate the left reel 32L in the above-mentioned specific operation mode every game from the normal time so as not to miss the transition opportunity.

If a negative determination is made in step S3102, or if the process of step S3103 has been performed, the process proceeds to step S3104. In step S3104, it is determined whether or not a precursor command is included as the current starting command. If the portent command is not included, it is determined in step S3105 whether or not an additional command is included as the command at the start of this time. If the add-on command is not included, it is determined in step S3106 whether or not the bonus has been won. If the bonus is not won, that is, if the lottery result is a transition trigger role such as a strong cherry or a weak watermelon, the lottery for transition to the AT mode or VB mode or the lottery for adding the number of continuous games is won. If not, and if the bonus is not won, in step S3107, the lottery process of the pseudo-prediction mode is executed. The pseudo precursor mode is visually difficult to distinguish from the precursor mode. The pseudo precursor mode is a mode that ends without informing the player of an advantageous result based on the completion of the number of pseudo precursor games.

In step S3107, a table for pseudo-prediction mode lottery is acquired from various table storage areas 182a of ROM 182, and a lottery counter is acquired from various counter areas 183b, and a lottery is performed to determine whether or not to execute the pseudo-prediction mode. conduct. In the table for the pseudo-prediction mode lottery, the probability of winning the pseudo-prediction mode lottery is set differently depending on the type of transition opportunity that has been won. It is set so that the probability of winning the lottery in the pseudo omen mode is high.

In step S3108, based on the processing result of step S3107, it is determined whether or not the lottery for the pseudo precursor mode has been won. If the lottery has been won, in step S3109, lottery processing for the number of games in the pseudo-prediction mode is performed. This process corresponds to step S909 and the like on the main controller 101 side, and randomly determines the pseudo precursor game number of 1 out of 1 to 20 by lottery. However, as described above, unlike the portent modes based on various winnings, the number of pseudo portent games is determined to be 20 games or less. Also, in the lottery for the number of pseudo precursor games, 0 games are not selected. In subsequent step S3110, the number of pseudo precursor games determined in step S3109 is set in the continuous effect counters provided in the various counter areas 183b. The continuous effect counter is a counter for grasping the number of games until the result is announced, and is decremented by one for each game. For example, in a configuration in which 4 games are continuously produced, the continuous production is started in the game in which the continuous production counter is 4, and the result is notified in the game in which the continuous production counter is 0. In the present embodiment, when an omen mode or a pseudo omen mode is set, the omen mode or the pseudo omen mode is terminated after a continuous effect. By inputting the number of pseudo precursor games to the continuous production counter in step S3110, when the number of remaining games in the pseudo precursor mode corresponds to the start of continuous production (remaining four games), the continuous production is started. It will happen.

In step S3111, a process of setting a pseudo flag indicating the pseudo precursor mode in the various flag storage area 183a is executed. In the following step S3112, a continuous effect flag is set. After that, the transition trigger notification process is terminated. In addition, when the affirmative determination is made in any one of steps S3104 to S3106, or when the negative determination is made in step S3108, the transition triggering role notification processing is terminated as it is.

<Continuous production setting process>
Next, the continuous effect setting process performed in step S2509 of the start time effect setting process (FIG. 60) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In step S3201, it is determined whether or not a precursor command is included in the start command currently received. If an omen command is included, in step S3202, the number of omen games in the omen mode included in the omen command is input to a continuous effect counter. As a result, when the number of remaining games in the omen mode corresponds to the start of the continuous effect (remaining four games), the continuous effect is started. In step S3202, when the number of precursor games of the 1st to 3rd games is input to the continuous effect counter, the continuous effect is started from the middle. For example, when 2 is input to the continuous effect counter in step S3202, the continuous effect is started from the current game, and is performed from the third game of the continuous effect shown in FIG. 73(c). Further, when 0 is input to the continuous effect counter, that is, when the winning notification of the AT mode or the like is performed without going through the precursor mode, the continuous effect is not executed. After performing the process of step S3202, a continuous effect flag is set in step S3203.

If a negative determination is made in step S3201, or if the process of step S3203 has been executed, the process advances to step S3204. In step S3204, it is determined whether or not the continuous effect flag is set. If the continuous effect flag is set, a process of subtracting 1 from the continuous effect counter is performed in step S3205. Then, in step S3206, it is determined whether or not the continuous effect counter is a number (0 to 3) corresponding to the continuous effect. When the continuous effect counter is the number corresponding to the continuous effect, it is determined whether or not the pseudo flag is set in step S3207. If the pseudo flag is not set, the process advances to step S3208 to acquire the present prognostic effect table from the various table storage area 182a. Then, in step S3209, the effect data of the corresponding continuous effect is specified from the effect table for the indication and the continuous effect counter, the corresponding effect data is acquired from the effect data storage area 182b of the ROM 182, and the current continuous effect is performed. Perform processing to set as The effect data of the continuous effect specified from the present effect table for indication is effect data indicating that the continuous effect continues until the next game if the continuous effect counter is 1 to 3, and the continuous effect counter is If it is 0, it is effect data indicating that the current continuous effect ends with success.

If it is determined in step S3207 that the pseudo flag is set, the process advances to step S3210. In step S3210, a pseudo-prediction effect table is acquired from the various table storage area 182a. Then, in step S3211, the effect data of the corresponding continuous effect is specified from the effect table for pseudo precursor and the continuous effect counter, the corresponding effect data is acquired from the effect data storage area 182b of the ROM 182, and the current continuous effect is performed. Perform processing to set as If the continuous effect counter is 1 to 3, the effect data of the continuous effect specified from the effect table for the pseudo precursor is effect data indicating that the continuous effect will continue until the next game or effect data indicating that the continuous effect will not continue. If the continuous effect counter is 0, the effect data indicates that the current continuous effect ends in failure.

Incidentally, the effect data specified from the pseudo-prediction effect table when the continuous effect counter is 1 to 3 includes data for which no continuous effect is set. For example, when the continuous effect counter is 3 and 2, the effect data of the continuous effect is not set, and when the continuous effect counter is 1, the continuous effect indicating that the continuous effect continues until the next game in FIG. When the effect data of the first game of effect is set and the continuous effect counter is 0, the effect data of the second game of continuous effect indicating that the continuous effect is not continued to the next game in FIG. 73(b) is set. By doing so, it is possible to set an effect in which the continuous effect is interrupted in the game in which the number of pseudo-prediction games in the pseudo-prediction mode is 0.

After performing the processing of step S3209 or step S3211, it is determined whether or not the continuous effect counter is 0 in step S3212. When the continuous effect counter is 0, a process of clearing the continuous effect flag and the pseudo flag is performed in step S3213. If the pseudo flag is not set, that state is maintained. When a negative determination is made in step S3204, step S3206 or step S3212, or after performing the process of step S3213, the continuous effect setting process is terminated.

As described above, in the slot machine 10, lottery processing is performed on the main controller 101 side based on insertion of medals as game media and starting operation of the start lever 41, and each reel 32L, 32M, 32R When the reels 32L, 32M and 32R are started to rotate and the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated to stop, and the combination of symbols stopped on the activated line corresponds to the result of the lottery process, the corresponding combination is selected. A plurality of RT states with different probabilities of being replayed as a result of lottery processing are provided in a configuration in which a privilege is given, and the RT state shifts when a corresponding promotion replay or falling replay is won. Whether or not the corresponding replay wins a prize is determined by the result of the lottery and the order of operation of the stop switches 42 to 44, and the notification of the order of operation is performed according to the result of the lottery process. This is done by winning a shift lottery to shift to an advantageous section, and then winning a lottery to shift to the AT mode included in the advantageous section and shifting to the AT mode. A pressing order bell is provided as a result of the lottery process, and depending on the order of operation of the stop switches 42 to 44, it is possible to achieve the winning of the pressing order bell and obtain medals. Then, by shifting to the AT mode and shifting to a second RT state or a third RT state as an RT state in which the replay probability is improved, in the RT state, the pushing order bell winning is established in a state in which the replay probability is improved. It is possible to win a lot of medals.

As already explained, when shifting to the AT mode, the initial number of games (50) is set, and the game can be played in the AT mode over the initial number of games. If an additional lottery is won in the AT mode or the like, the number of continuous games in the AT mode is added, and the number of games that can be played in the AT mode increases. As a result, the number of medals that can be obtained in the AT mode can also be increased.

When the number of remaining games in AT mode is 0 and the number of remaining games in other display modes in the advantageous section is 0, or when the conditions for forced termination of the advantageous section (complete 1500 games or increase 2400 cards) are met. , end processing of the advantageous section (AT mode) is performed in the second section display processing. As already explained, in the end processing of the advantageous section, various parameters (various types of information) in the advantageous section are initialized so that the information in the advantageous section is not inherited after the advantageous section ends. , the advantageous section and the normal section can be clearly distinguished.

In addition, in the slot machine 10, in addition to the 0RT state, the 1st RT state, the 2nd RT state, and the 3rd RT state, which are normal game states, the 4th RT state is provided as the RT state. The winning probabilities of the AT mode transition lottery are set to be the same, while the winning probability of the AT mode transition lottery is set to be different. More specifically, the probability of winning the AT mode transition lottery in the 4th RT state is set to be higher than the winning probability of the AT mode transition lottery in the 0RT state to the 3rd RT state. In other words, after the advantageous section ends as described above, in the normal section, in order to receive the lottery for the transition to the advantageous section, although there is no difference in the winning probability of the RT state, after shifting to the advantageous section AT mode From the viewpoint of a lottery for transition to , the 4th RT state is more advantageous for the player than the 0RT state to the 3rd RT state.

More specifically, as shown in FIG. 74, the probability of winning the lottery for transition to AT mode (including SAT mode) in the advantageous section is determined by winning in the 0RT state to the 3rd RT state according to the type of special hand. A probability and a winning probability during the 4th RT state are set respectively, and the winning probability during the 4th RT state is set to be higher than the winning probability during the 0RT state to the 3rd RT state. For example, in the AT mode transition lottery triggered by a strong watermelon, it is set to win the transition lottery with a probability of about 50% in the 0RT state to the 3rd RT state, whereas in the 4th RT state is set to win the transfer lottery with a 100% probability. Also, even in the AT mode transition lottery triggered by the push order bell and the push order replay, in the 0RT state to the 3rd RT state, it is set to win the transition lottery with a probability of about 1%, while the 4th RT In the state, it is set to win the transfer lottery with a probability of about 5%. In addition, even in the AT mode transition lottery triggered by a combination with a difference in winning probability between set values such as strong cherry overlap 2 and weak cherry overlap 2, the transition lottery for the 4th RT state is better than the 0RT state to the 3rd RT state. The probability of winning is set so that it is easy to win the prize. Therefore, from the viewpoint of the probability of winning the AT mode transition lottery, it is possible to refer to the 0RT state to the 3rd RT state as the AT mode low probability state, and the 4th RT state as the AT mode high probability state. is also possible.

As already explained, in the 4th RT state, when transition replays 1 and 2 are won in the 2nd RT state or the 3rd RT state, stop in the operation order corresponding to the 11th replay win or the 12th replay win. The transition is made by operating the switches 42-44. In the present embodiment, by shifting to the fourth RT state just before the end of the AT mode, which is the second RT state or the third RT state, after the end of the AT mode, it is easy to win the lottery for shifting to the AT mode again. A state of solitude has been achieved.

The fourth RT state lottery table will be described with reference to FIG. The lottery table for the fourth RT state is a table selected based on the fact that the fourth RT setting flag is set in the state information storage area 106c in step S302 of the lottery process.

The fourth RT state lottery table differs from the other RT state lottery tables (see FIG. 22, etc.) in the point values PV of IV=1 to 14, and the same points are used in the other index values IV. A value PV is set. Therefore, when judging whether or not a role is appropriate using such a lottery table, the probability of winning when IV = 15 to 58 is equal to each winning probability in other RT states, and when IV = 1 The probability of winning is about 1/7.3, and no winning occurs when IV=2 to 14. That is, the lottery table for the 4th RT state is the same as the lottery table for the normal game state (FIG. 17), and the total replay probability of the 4th RT state is the normal game state (0RT state) and the 1st RT state. is the same as that of , and is set to be a lower probability than those of the second RT state and the third RT state. Note that the replay probabilities on both lottery tables may not be completely the same, and may be almost the same. .1%). Also, when the state is shifted to the 4th RT state, the first promotion replays 1 to 4, the falling replays 1 to 3, the second promotion replays 1 and 2, and the BAR replays 1 and 2, which are the triggers for the transition of the game state, are not won. The transition of the game state based on the replay winning prize does not occur. As already explained, even if the number for transition is stopped in the fourth RT state, the transition to the first RT state is not performed. Then, the fourth RT state shifts to the normal game state by executing a predetermined number of games.

When the fourth RT state is played in the normal mode, it can be expected that the number of medals per game will decrease by about 1.59. In addition, when the fourth RT state is played in the AT mode, the expected value of medal increase is lower than in the second RT state and the third RT state. While an increase of 90 medals can be expected, in the 4th RT state, an increase of about 0.61 medals per game can be expected, and by playing the 4th RT state in AT mode, It will be almost impossible to expect an increase in medals. Moreover, since the AT mode ends by shifting to the fourth RT state, it is disadvantageous for the player to shift to the fourth RT state during the AT mode.

<Fixed RT game number setting process>
The number of games in the fourth RT state is set in step S519. Therefore, the fixed RT game count setting process performed in step S519 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In step S3301, it is determined whether or not the 11th regame winning has been established. If the eleventh replay win has been established, in step S3302, the fixed RT game number counter provided in the various counter areas 106e of the RAM 106 is set to "10" as the number of games to be continued in the fourth RT state this time. After executing the input process, the fixed RT game number setting process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S3301 that the 11th re-game winning has not been established, it means that the 12th re-game winning has been established. After executing the process of inputting "30" to the number counter as the number of games to be continued in the current fourth RT state, the fixed RT game number setting process is terminated.

The fixed RT game number counter input in steps S3302 and S3303 is decremented by one for each game by the subtraction processing in step S502. When the fixed RT game number counter becomes 0, the fourth RT setting flag is cleared in step S504, and the game state shifts to the normal game state.

<RT transition processing>
Whether or not to cause a transition to the fourth RT state during the AT mode is managed by the RT transition processing in the second section display processing (FIG. 54). RT transition processing will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In step S3401, it is determined whether or not an AT notification flag is set in the various flag storage area 106d. As already explained, the AT notification flag is set when the lottery for shifting to the AT mode is won, and the fact that the lottery for shifting to the AT mode has been won is announced, and is cleared when the AT mode ends. The state in which the AT notification flag is set is the state in which the push order notification may occur. If the AT notification flag is not set, the fixed RT process is terminated. If the AT notification flag is set, the process proceeds to step S3402. In addition, even if the game state shifts to the second RT state or the third RT state and the AT mode is started, the game state shifts to the BB state, or if the game state shifts to the first RT state before the AT mode ends due to an operation error or the like. Also, the AT notification flag is not cleared. Therefore, even if the state is shifted to the first RT state before the end of the AT mode, the process proceeds to step S3402.

In step S3402, it is determined whether or not the number of games remaining in the advantageous section ZG (for example, the number of remaining games in AT mode) has reached 10 as a predetermined value. It should be noted that the predetermined value determined in step S3402 is a value equal to or less than the number of continuous games (10 or 30, whichever is smaller, whichever is the main transition) when transitioning to the fourth RT state. If a negative determination is made in step S3402, for example, if the number of remaining AT mode games is more than 10 and the AT mode can still be continued, the fixed RT process is terminated. When the number of remaining AT mode continuous games is 10 and the AT mode is approaching the final stage, the process proceeds to step S3403.

In step S3403, a process of setting a transition notification flag in the various flag storage area 106d of the RAM 106 is executed. The notification flag for transition is a flag for the CPU 102 to recognize that the transition to the fourth RT state is permitted. The shift notification flag is cleared when the AT mode ends. After executing the process of step S3403, in step S3404, the transition command is set as an object to be output to the display control device 81, and then the fixed RT process ends.

As already explained, the transition to the 4th RT state is made based on the transition replays 1 and 2 winning. If the 12 replay wins are matched, the transition to the fourth RT state occurs. Here, in the 2nd RT state and the 3rd RT state in which the AT mode is mainly stayed, the winning probability of transition replays 1 and 2 is about 1/6.5 (FIGS. 24 and 25). Comparing the number (1/10) obtained by dividing 1 by 10, which is set as the predetermined value, and the winning probability of the transition replays 1 and 2, the winning probability of the transition replays 1 and 2 is higher. is a large value (high probability). Then, the number of remaining games in the AT mode becomes 10, and one or more transition replays 1 and 2 are performed during the 10 games from when the notification flag for transition is set until the number of remaining games in the AT mode becomes 0. It can be said that the predetermined value (10) for setting the winning probability of transition replays 1 and 2 and the notification flag for transition is set so that the winning can be expected.

<Fixed RT status notification process>
Next, processing related to the fixed RT state on the display control device 81 side will be described. As such processing, there is provided a notification processing for RT transition in step S2916 in the effect setting processing at all stop (FIG. 64). As already explained, the all-stop effect setting process is a process that is executed based on the command for the all-stop effect from the main control device 101, and occurs when all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped. This is a process for effecting.

As shown in the flowchart of FIG. 78, in step S3501, it is determined whether or not the transition command has been received and the end of the AT mode is approaching. If a transition command has been received, a process of setting a transition replay notification flag in the various flag storage area 183a of the RAM 183 is executed in step S3502. The transition replay notification flag is a flag for the CPU 181 to recognize that a transition command is being received from the main controller 101 . Thereafter, in step S3503, processing for setting the first transition period effect is executed. In the first transition period effect, for example, as shown in FIG. 79(a), the auxiliary display section 65 displays characters "Aim to enter the chance zone", and when the AT mode ends, the AT mode The state is shifted to the fourth RT state as a high-probability state, and a display (for example, display of a female character or an explanation) is provided to suggest that entry into the Renso zone (withdrawal zone) of the AT mode may occur. In addition, in the first transition period production, the speaker 64 is controlled so that a corresponding sound effect (for example, "You can do it" in a gentle female voice) is emitted.

If a negative determination is made in step S3501, or if the process of step S3503 has been executed, it is determined in step S3504 whether or not the AT mode has ended in the current game. When the AT mode ends, at step S3505, the process of clearing the transition replay notification flag is executed, and at step S3506, the process of setting the second transition period effect is executed. In the second transition period effect, for example, as shown in FIG. 79(a), the auxiliary display unit 65 displays characters "Don't give up yet!" By shifting to the 4th RT state before the 3RT state ends, display (for example, a male character display or an explanation) that suggests that it is possible to enter the Renso zone in AT mode. . In addition, in the second transition period production, the speaker 64 is controlled so that a corresponding sound effect (for example, "Don't give up, it's still okay" in a rough male voice) is emitted.

Here, the difference between the case where the first transition period effect is performed and the case where the second transition period effect is performed will be described. The case where the first transition period effect is performed is the case where the AT mode is about to end as described above, more specifically, the case where the number of remaining games in the AT mode becomes 10. In this case, the transition replay notification flag is set, and if transition replays 1 and 2 are won in this situation (before the AT mode ends), an affirmative determination is made in step S2613 in the pressing order notification processing (FIG. 61). Then, in step S2614, the press order notification of the operation order in which the 11th re-game winning prize or the 12th re-game winning prize is established is generated. As a result, at the end of the AT mode, the RT state can be changed from the second RT state or the third RT state to the fourth RT state. In other words, when the first transition period effect is performed, although the AT mode ends after that, if the transition replays 1 and 2 are won before the end of the AT mode, the pressing order notification is generated and the state is shifted to the fourth RT state. In this situation, it is possible to shift to the AT mode high probability state. In this case, in the shift replay winning game, along with notification of the pushing order corresponding to the 11th replay winning or 12th replay winning, the 11th replay winning or 12th replay winning can be established. It is good to generate a congratulatory production. For example, as shown in FIG. 79(b), the auxiliary display unit 65 reappears the character that appeared in the first transition period effect along with the pressing order notification effect, and the corresponding sound effect (for example, , in a gentle female voice, “Ikkee!!”).

On the other hand, the case where the second transition period effect is performed is the case where the AT mode ends as described above, and more specifically, when the AT mode ends, the pressing order notification effect does not occur from the next game. In this case, the transition replay notification flag is cleared. Then, if transition replays 1 and 2 are won in this situation, the push order notification command is not received from the main controller 101 either. The notification effect will not occur. In other words, when the second transition period effect is performed, although the AT mode has already ended, the transition replay is won before the fall replay winning/winning, and the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in the transition replay winning game. If the order can match the 11th re-game winning prize or the 12th re-game winning prize, it is possible to shift to the AT mode high probability state. In this case, it is preferable to generate an effect informing that the 11th replay winning prize or the 12th replay winning prize can be established in the shift replay winning game. For example, as shown in FIG. Control so that a corresponding sound effect (for example, a rough male voice saying "My voice is quite rough") is emitted.

If a negative determination is made in step S3504, or if the process of step S3506 has been executed, the process advances to step S3507. In step S3507, it is determined whether or not a special RT start A command has been received. The special RT start A command is issued when the 11th re-game winning or 12th re-game winning is established in the winning result handling process (FIG. 49) on the main control device 101 side, and the notification flag for transition is set. This is a command that is output when there is a command (step S1624). When the special RT start A command is received, processing for setting the special RT start effect A is performed in step S3508. Then, in step S3509, processing for setting the special RT effect A flag is performed.

In the special RT start production A, for example, as shown in FIG. Corresponding to the number of executable games in the 4RT state, characters corresponding to the fixed number of RT games (images imitating bullets in the figure) are displayed for the number of games. The characters corresponding to the fixed number of RT games disappear one by one (for example, one from the right) each time one game is played in the fourth RT state, and become 0 in the final game in the fourth RT state.

Further, in the special RT start effect A, after the display indicating the chance zone, for example, as shown in FIG. Any three of the numbers are displayed side by side. Then, in each game in the fourth RT state under the condition that the special RT effect A flag is set, the plurality of pieces of identification information are variably displayed, and the game is stopped in a stop mode according to the result of the AT mode transition lottery. When the AT mode transition lottery is won, the combination of these identification information is made to have a predetermined form (for example, 333 or the like). , 334, etc.).

That is, the games in the fourth RT state can be executed as many as the number of characters corresponding to the fixed number of RT games displayed on the auxiliary display portion 65, and are associated with the number of executable games in the AT mode high probability state. Then, in each game, the character corresponding to the fixed number of RT games is consumed, and the result of the AT mode transition lottery is informed by the stop result of the identification information.

If a negative determination is made in step S3507, or if the process of step S3509 has been executed, the process advances to step S3510. In step S3510, it is determined whether or not a special RT start B command has been received. The special RT start B command is when the 11th re-game winning or 12th re-game winning is established in the winning result handling process (FIG. 49) on the main control device 101 side, and the notification flag for transition is set. This is a command that is output when there is no such command (step S1625). Incidentally, the case where the shift notification flag is not set means that the shift notification flag is not set or the AT mode is not set. If the special RT start B command has been received, it is determined in step S3511 whether or not the AT mode is being set. If it is not in the AT mode, the fixed RT state notification processing is terminated. If it is determined that it is in the AT mode in step S3511, during the AT mode (before the transition notification flag for the final stage is set), from the second RT state or the third RT state to the fourth RT state This is the case of migration.

As already explained, the 4th RT state is an AT mode high probability state, but the replay probability is lower than the 2nd RT state and the 3rd RT state, and from the viewpoint of aiming for medal acquisition, these 2nd RT state and 3rd RT state It is less favorable to the player than Moreover, shifting to the fourth RT state during the AT mode means that the AT state is already in the AT mode. There are not many merits of being in a high-probability state of the mode transition lottery. Moreover, in this slot machine 10, when shifting to the fourth RT state during the AT mode, the AT mode is terminated regardless of the number of remaining games in the AT mode. Therefore, in the AT mode, if a transition to the fourth RT state occurs without the transition notification flag being set, it means that the player is in a more disadvantageous situation than when the transition does not occur. do.

If it is determined in step S3511 that it is in the AT mode, processing for setting special RT start effect B is performed in step S3512. Then, in step S3513, processing for setting a special RT effect B flag is performed. When a negative determination is made in either step S3510 or step S3511, or after the process of step S3513 is executed, the notification process for RT shift ends.

In the special RT start effect B, for example, as shown in FIG. (for example, a disappointing male character display or an explanation) is provided. In addition, in the special RT start effect B, the speaker 64 is controlled so that a corresponding sound effect (for example, a man's panicked voice, "Dangerous, dangerous") is emitted.

In addition, in the special RT start effect B, after the display indicating that the AT mode has ended, for example, as shown in FIG. is displayed to indicate that it is a chance zone in which it is possible to shift again to the AT mode that has ended. In each game in the fourth RT state in which the special RT effect B flag is set, if the number of games that can be executed in the fourth RT state is, for example, 10 games, the number of remaining games is displayed as "remaining 10 games". , the auxiliary display unit 65 is controlled so that the display of the number of remaining games is subtracted and updated every game.

<Appearance at end of AT mode>
How the AT mode is shifted to the fourth RT state as the AT mode high-probability state will be described with reference to FIGS. 83 to 85. FIG.

FIG. 83 shows how the AT mode ends without transition to the fourth RT state.

For example, at the timing of ta1 when the remaining number of AT mode games is greater than 10, if either transition replay 1 or 2 is won, the notification flag for transition is not set, so in this case, the fourth RT state Not the tenth replay or the eleventh replay that causes the transition to the first replay, but the pressing order notification corresponding to the first replay is generated. When the player operates the stop switches 42 to 44 in the operation order according to the pressing order notification, the RT state does not change, and the second RT state and the third RT state with high replay probability are maintained. At the timing of ta2 when the number of remaining games in the AT mode reaches 10, the transition notification flag is set, and when subsequent transition replays 1 and 2 are won, push order notification causing transition to the 4th RT state is generated. . At ta2 when the transition notification flag is set, the first transition period effect is executed (step S3503, FIG. 79(a)).

In the example of FIG. 83, although the shift notification flag is set at the timing of ta2, by the timing of ta3 when the number of remaining games in the AT mode becomes 0, transition replays 1 and 2 are not won. there is When the number of remaining games becomes 0 at ta3, the AT mode ends, the push order notification is no longer generated, and the shift notification flag is also cleared. After ta3 and before the timing of ta5 when the RT state shifts to the first RT state due to the second replay win or stop of the transition roll, the replay probability is high although the pressing order notification does not occur. This is a state called a recovery section. At ta3 when the game moves to the return section, the second transition period effect is executed (step S3506, FIG. 80(a)).

If either of the transition replays 1 and 2 is won at the timing of ta4 during this return interval, the push order notification does not occur as described above, so it corresponds to the 10th replay win and the 11th replay win The transition to the fourth RT state does not occur unless the order of operations to be performed is matched. More specifically, when the transition to the fourth RT state does not occur, either the first re-game win is established and the RT state transition does not occur, or the second re-game win is established and the transition to the first RT state occurs. . In addition, when transition replays 1 and 2 are won during the return section, as shown in FIG. 80(b), an effect is generated informing that the 11th replay winning prize or the 12th replay winning prize can be established. (FIG. 80(b)). In the example of FIG. 83, it shows that the first re-game winning is established at ta4, in this case, the transition to the RT state does not occur, and the second re-game winning is established at the timing of ta5 thereafter, A transition to the first RT state with low replay probability occurs. After that, at the timing of ta6 or the like, the transition trigger role is won, and the advantageous section transition lottery and the AT mode transition lottery are performed.

Regarding the advantageous section transition lottery, the probability of winning the transition is common regardless of whether the RT state is high or low. The 4RT state is the AT mode high probability state. Then, as described above, the transition to the first RT state occurs at ta5, and the AT mode transition lottery is performed in the low probability state. As a result, a relatively large number of games are required from the end of the AT mode at ta3 until the AT mode transition lottery is won again. FIG. 83 shows that the AT mode transition lottery is won at the timing of ta7, and then the RT state shifts to the second RT state due to the pushing order notification at the time of winning the pushing order replay.

FIG. 84 shows the transition to the fourth RT state and the end of the AT mode.

If either transition replay 1 or 2 is won at timing tb1 when the number of remaining games in the AT mode is greater than 10, the transition notification flag is not set as in ta1, so the first replay is performed. A corresponding press order notification is generated. Then, at the timing tb2 when the number of remaining games in the AT mode reaches 10, the notification flag for transition is set, and the first transition period effect is executed.

After the notification flag for transition is set and before timing tb4 when the number of remaining games in the AT mode is 0, at timing tb3, if either transition replay 1 or 2 is won, A push order notification corresponding to the 10th re-game winning or the 11th re-game winning is generated. In addition, in the transition replay winning game of tb3, along with the pressing order notification corresponding to the 11th replay winning or 12th replay winning, the 11th replay winning or 12th replay winning can be established. (Fig. 79(b)). When the player operates the stop switches 42 to 44 in the order of operation according to the content of the notification of the order of pressing, a transition to the fourth RT state occurs and the AT mode ends (step S1626). When the transition to the fourth RT state occurs, the special RT start effect A is executed to indicate the AT mode high probability state (FIG. 81).

In the game at the timing tb5, which is before the timing tb6 when the prescribed number of games (10 games) of the fourth RT state transitioned at tb3 are completed, if the transition opportunity is won, the transition opportunity is triggered. An AT mode transition lottery is performed in an AT mode high probability state. If the lottery for shifting to AT mode is won, the fourth RT state ends at tb6 and shifts to the first RT state. At tb7, the RT state is changed to the second RT state by notification of the pushing order at the time of winning the pushing order replay. to move to.

FIG. 85 shows the state in which the transition to the fourth RT state occurs before the number of remaining AT mode games reaches 10 games.

If either of the transition replays 1 and 2 is won at the timing of tc1 when the number of remaining games in AT mode is greater than 10, the notification flag for transition is not set as in ta1 and tb1, so the first replay Notification of the pressing order corresponding to the game is generated. For example, in this case, if the 10th re-game winning or the 11th re-game winning is established due to an operation mistake of the stop switches 42 to 44, etc., the transition to the 4th RT state occurs and should continue until tc4. AT mode ends at tc1 where the transition to the fourth RT state occurs. In this case, the special RT start effect B is executed, and the AT mode high-probability state is indicated although the situation is unfavorable for the player (FIG. 82).

In the game at the timing tc2 which is before the timing tc3 when the prescribed number of games (10 games) of the 4th RT state transitioned at tc1 is completed, if the transition opportunity is won, the transition opportunity is triggered. An AT mode transition lottery is performed in an AT mode high probability state. FIG. 85 shows the case where the lottery for shifting to the AT mode is not won. Then, when the 4th RT state ends at tc3 and shifts to the 1st RT state, it becomes an AT mode low probability state, and even if you win the transition trigger role at tc5 or tc6 after that, you will win the AT mode transition lottery. becomes difficult.

As described above, while the winning probability of the transition lottery to the advantageous section in which the game related to the instruction function such as notification of the order of operation of the stop switches 42 to 44 is advantageous for the player, does not differ depending on the RT state. , The probability of winning the lottery for shifting to the AT mode, which may cause notification of the pressing order of the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44, is made different depending on the RT state. While ensuring that the chances are equal regardless of which machine is selected to play, it is possible to create situations in which the transition to AT mode is likely to occur or difficult to occur during the advantageous section. Great diversification of games is achieved.

In addition, in this slot machine 10, the transition to the fourth RT state (AT mode high probability state) in which the AT mode transition lottery in the advantageous section is performed with high probability is notified of the pressing order of transition replays 1 and 2 ( 10th re-game winning or 11th re-game winning (notification of pressing order), the presence or absence of transition to the AT mode high probability state is determined by the gaming machine side depending on whether or not the notification of pressing order has occurred. can be managed. In this way, the AT mode high-probability state can be generated at the timing intended by the designer.

As described above, when the shift to the AT mode high-probability state is caused by the pressing order notification, the pressing order notification occurs during the AT mode. Then, when a shift to the fourth RT state as the AT mode high probability state occurs, the AT mode is terminated. By doing so, the notification of the pressing order in the AT mode terminates the AT mode, causes a transition to a situation in which the lottery for transition to the AT mode has a high probability, and transitions to the AT mode again. It is possible to realize a novel game property such as making it easy to occur.

More specifically, the number of remaining AT mode games is less than the prescribed number of games (10 When the number of games is less than 10 games, which is the smaller one of 30 games and 30 games, a transition notification flag is set so that transition to the fourth RT state can occur. By doing so, it is possible to make it difficult for the AT mode to end in a situation where the benefits of the AT mode are not fully enjoyed, such as the beginning of the AT mode, and to increase the probability of the AT mode. With the fourth RT state as a state, it is possible to realize a continuous zone after the end of the AT mode.

As described above, the AT mode transition lottery is performed during the advantageous section, and is not performed in the normal section before the transition to the advantageous section. It has succeeded in balancing the equality of opportunities for On the other hand, since the upper limit of the number of games (1500 games) is stipulated for the advantageous section, the AT mode transition lottery is configured to be performed during the advantageous section as described above, and the section that is an advantageous section and not AT mode ( If a non-specified interval occurs, the non-specified interval erodes the upper limit of the number of games, and there may be a problem that the benefits of the advantageous interval cannot be substantially enjoyed to the maximum.

Therefore, the present slot machine 10 is devised to shorten the non-specific section while maintaining the relationship between the advantageous section transition lottery and the AT mode transition lottery as described above. This point will be described below.

<Processing when winning an advantageous section>
In the lottery result handling process (Fig. 32), the advantageous zone transition lottery process (Fig. 33) is carried out during the normal zone, and the advantageous zone winning process (step S807) performed when the advantageous zone transition lottery is won: Description will be made with reference to the flow chart of FIG.

In step S3601, the lottery result of the current game is grasped. In more detail, the transition trigger role that won the advantageous zone transition lottery this time (for example, did you win the advantageous zone transition lottery with strong cherry or won the advantageous zone transition lottery with strong watermelon)? grasp. In the subsequent step S3602, a process of grasping the current game state is executed. More specifically, it grasps which of the 0 RT state to the 4th RT state the RT state is. Then, in step S3603, a process of acquiring an AT mode transition lottery table corresponding to the gaming state (RT state) is executed. That is, if the RT state grasped in step S3602 is the 0th RT state to the 3rd RT state, the AT mode transition lottery table for the AT mode low probability state in FIG. 74 is acquired, and the RT state grasped in step S3602 is the fourth RT state, the AT mode transition lottery table for the AT mode high probability state in FIG. 74 is obtained.

Then, in step S3604, an AT mode transition lottery is executed. This process is substantially the same as the process of step S902. While the process of step S902 is the AT mode transition lottery performed during the advantageous section, the process of step S3604 is the lottery for the transition to the advantageous section. The process of step S3604 can also be referred to as an AT mode first lottery in that the lottery for AT mode transition is performed in the winning game, that is, before the transition to the advantageous section.

After that, in step S3605, it is determined whether or not the AT mode transition lottery has been won.If the lottery is won, in steps S3606 to S3613, processing for setting an AT mode winning flag and the like is performed. Run. The processing of steps S3606 to S3613 is the same as the processing of steps S904 to S911 in the first special combination processing (FIG. 34). If it is determined in step S3605 that the AT mode is not won, the AT non-win second process is executed in step S3614, and then the advantageous section transition winning process is terminated.

The second process when AT is not won in step S3614 corresponds to the first process when AT is not won (step S912) when the AT mode transition lottery in the first special role process (FIG. 34) is not won. be. Therefore, the first process when AT is not won and the second process when AT is not won will be described below.

<First process when AT is not elected>
First, the AT non-winning first process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. As described above, the first process when AT is not won is the process when the AT mode transition lottery during the advantageous section is not won.

In step S3701, a process of setting an AT non-winning flag in the various flag storage area 106d is executed. By setting the AT non-election flag, an affirmative determination is made in step S2011 in the section display second process (FIG. 54), and the third process when AT is not elected in step S2012 is started.

After executing the process of step S3701, in step S3702, after executing the process of inputting 0 to the advantageous interval end counter provided in the various counter areas 106e, this AT non-winning first process ends. . This slot machine 10 is configured to terminate the advantageous section when the AT mode shift lottery is not won, and the advantageous section end counter terminates the advantageous section after the AT mode shift lottery is not won. It is a counter for the CPU 102 to grasp the number of games up to. As described above, when 0 is input to the advantageous interval end counter, it means that the advantageous interval ends in the game.

<Second processing when AT is not elected>
Next, the AT non-winning second process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. As described above, the second process when AT is not won is a process when the AT mode transition lottery as the AT mode first lottery, which is performed when the advantageous section transition lottery is won, is not won.

The second process when AT is not won is substantially the same as the first process when AT is not won, except for the value input to the advantageous section end counter. That is, in step S3801, similarly to step S3701, the process of setting the AT non-winning flag is executed. Then, in step S3802, unlike step S3702, a process of inputting 1 to the advantageous section end counter is executed. When 1 is input to the advantageous interval end counter, it means that the advantageous interval ends in the game following the current game, that is, the advantageous interval ends in the game that transitions to the advantageous interval. After executing the process of step S3802, the second process at the time of AT non-winning ends.

<Third processing when AT is not elected>
Next, in the AT non-win first process and AT non-win second process, the AT non-win third process of the section display second process, which is activated by setting the AT non-win flag, Description will be made with reference to the flow chart of FIG.

In step S3901, it is determined whether or not the above advantageous interval end counter is zero. If the advantageous interval end counter is 0, the process advances to step S3902 to execute advantageous interval end processing. That is, in step S3902, a process of clearing the number of games in the advantageous interval AG and the number of increased/decreased numbers in the advantageous interval ZM to 0 is executed. Then, in step S3903, the eighth display segment N8 is extinguished, thereby terminating the display of the section indicator. After that, in step S3904, after executing data initialization processing for initializing information of various counters and various flags in the advantageous section, the third processing at the time of AT non-winning is ended. That is, the processing of steps S3902 to S3904 is the same as the processing of steps S2008 to S2010 in the second section display processing. If the advantageous interval end counter is not 0 in step S3901, after performing subtraction processing for subtracting 1 from the advantageous interval end counter in step S3905, the third processing at the time of AT non-winning is ended. For example, if 1 is input to the advantageous section end counter in the second process when AT is not won, the input game (winning the advantageous section transition lottery and not participating in the AT mode transition lottery as the AT mode destination lottery) In the winning game), a negative determination is made in step S3901, the advantageous interval end counter is subtracted in step S3905, and the advantageous interval end processing in steps S3902 to S3904 is performed in the next game. The Rukoto.

<advantageous section transition lottery and AT mode transition lottery>
The relationship between the advantageous section transition lottery and the AT mode transition lottery will be described with reference to the timing chart of FIG.

When the game is started based on the operation of the start lever 41, the lottery process is executed, and if the transition opportunity role is won in the lottery process, the advantageous zone transition lottery is executed. td1 shows the case where the advantageous zone transition lottery is won. In this case, the advantageous zone flag is set in the game in which the advantageous zone transition lottery is won, and the next game started at td2 is regarded as the advantageous zone. Become.

As described above, when the advantageous section transition lottery is won, the AT mode first lottery (steps S3601 to S3604) is executed in the advantageous section transition winning process. td1 shows the case where the AT mode first lottery is won. In this case, the AT mode winning flag is set, but the AT non-winning flag is not set. As a result, in the second section display process at the end of the current game and in the second section display process in the game that became an advantageous section at td2, the third process when AT is not won is not executed. , a transition to the AT mode occurs.

td3 shows a case where the advantageous zone transition lottery is won, but the AT mode first lottery of the advantageous zone transition winning process at the time of winning is not won. In this case, the advantageous interval flag is set at td3, the AT non-winning flag is also set, and 1 is input to the advantageous interval end counter. As a result, although the next game started at td5 becomes an advantageous interval, the third processing when AT is not won is executed in the interval display second processing executed at td6 when the game ends, and the advantageous interval is reached. Section end processing is executed. In other words, when the advantageous section transition lottery is won, the AT mode transition lottery (AT mode destination lottery) is executed in the game, but if the AT mode transition lottery is not won, the transition to the advantageous section will occur. Even if there is, the advantageous section ends based on not winning the AT mode transition lottery (based on completing the number of games set when not winning the AT mode transition lottery). It will happen.

At td3, 1 is input to the advantageous section end counter. Therefore, when the game in which the advantageous section transition lottery is won ends at td3, even if the third process for AT non-winning is executed in the second section display process at td4, only the subtraction process of the advantageous section end counter is performed. , the advantageous section end processing is not executed, and the advantageous section flag is not cleared. In other words, if the advantageous section transition lottery is won, the AT mode transition lottery is executed before the advantageous section transition, and if the AT mode transition lottery is not won, the transition to the advantageous section is not possible. It is configured to terminate the advantageous section after causing it to occur. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of an event in which the AT mode transition lottery is executed even though there is no transition to the advantageous section.

Also, by setting the advantageous interval flag at td3, the next game started at td5 becomes an advantageous interval. In this case, in the present embodiment, the AT mode shift lottery is also executed in the game at td5 (first special combination process). In the AT mode transition lottery at td5, it shows a case where it is not won. End processing of the advantageous section is executed in the third processing at the time of non-winning.

On the other hand, in td7, although the advantageous section transition lottery is won, the AT mode first lottery of the advantageous section transition winning process at the time of winning is not won, and furthermore, the transition game to the advantageous section is performed at td9. It shows a case where the AT mode shift lottery is won. In this case, at td7, the AT non-winning flag is set, 1 is input to the advantageous section end counter, and decremented to 0 at td8. By winning, the AT non-winning flag is cleared. As a result, in the second interval display process when the advantageous interval transition game ends, the AT non-winning third process is not executed, and then the transition to the AT mode occurs.

According to this embodiment detailed above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

A normal section and an advantageous section which is more advantageous for the player than the normal section are provided, an AT mode is set as a state included in the advantageous section, and the benefits of the pressing order notification can be enjoyed by setting the AT mode. , and in relation to the advantageous section transition lottery, there is no difference in winning rate depending on each RT state, and in regard to the AT mode transition lottery, a difference in winning rate can occur depending on each RT state. By doing so, it is possible to ensure equality among players in selecting a game machine in the normal section, and to diversify the games using the AT mode in the advantageous section.

Moreover, in the above-described embodiment, the AT mode transition lottery is likely to be won, and the 11th regame or the 12th regame, which causes a transition to the 4th RT state, can occur. It is possible to manage the timing of the transition to the fourth RT state as a state to some extent on the gaming machine side, and in the AT mode where the push order notification occurs, it is configured to further shift to the AT mode high probability state. , AT mode states called continuous zone and pullback zone can be realized by the transition of the RT state, which can contribute to the realization of novel game characteristics.

In the AT mode, the transition to the 4th RT state occurs after the number of remaining games becomes equal to or less than the number of continuous games in the 4th RT state, so the 4th RT state is entered when there are still many remaining games in the AT mode. It is possible to avoid events that cause migration. By doing so, the timing to entertain the staying AT mode and the timing to entertain whether or not it is possible to shift to a new AT mode after that are determined in relation to the number of games in the AT mode. Each can be set as a separate timing, and it is possible to realize a continuous villa zone using the 4th RT state within a range that does not spoil the fun of the game during the AT mode.

By configuring the AT mode to end when the transition to the fourth RT state occurs, whether or not the transition to the fourth RT state occurs during the AT mode simply determines whether or not to transition to the AT mode high probability state. In addition to the elements of, it is possible to add elements such as whether or not the AT mode ends, whether or not there is a transition replay winning that can cause a transition to the 4th RT state, and to attract great interest in the winning game. becomes.

Since the advantageous section is terminated based on the fact that the AT mode transition lottery is not won, the number of games in the advantageous section and not in the AT mode can be reduced. By doing so, in a configuration in which the upper limit number of games is set in the advantageous section, it is possible to solve the phenomenon that the upper limit number of games is eroded by the number of games in a situation other than the AT mode.

When the lottery for transition to the advantageous section is won, the AT mode transition lottery is performed using the game result of the game. As a result, in a lottery system where it is necessary to win the lottery to move to the advantageous section and to win the lottery to move to the AT mode, so-called rare roles such as strong cherry to win the lottery to move to the advantageous section It is possible to eliminate the difficulty of winning a game in which a rare role must be allocated for the AT mode shift lottery even though the player has won the lottery.

An AT mode shift lottery at the time of winning the transition to an advantageous section can be executed in a game before shifting to the advantageous section, and even if the lottery for shifting to the AT mode is won, the shift to the AT mode is caused thereafter. By doing this, when the advantageous section transition lottery is won, the AT mode transition lottery can be performed before shifting to the advantageous section, and the interval between the advantageous section winning game and the AT mode transition lottery game is minimized. (set to 0).

<Modification 1>
In this modified example, an example of a configuration that causes a transition to the fourth RT state as the AT mode high-probability state when a predetermined condition is satisfied will be described. In this example, the above-mentioned predetermined conditions are met when it is determined that the upper limit number of games or the upper limit increase number of medals, which are conditions for forced termination of the advantageous section, is reached before these forced termination conditions are met. , the configuration that causes the transition to the fourth RT state will be described. FIG. 91 is a flowchart showing RT transition processing in this modified example.

In this modification, it is determined whether or not the AT notification flag is set in step S4001. If the AT notification flag is not set, the RT transition processing is terminated. If the AT notification flag is set, it is determined in step S4002 that the number of games remaining in the advantageous section ZG is equal to or less than the specified number of games in the fourth RT state. When the number of games remaining in the advantageous section ZG is equal to or less than the specified number of games in the fourth RT state, a transition notification flag is set in step S4003, and a transition command is set in step S4004. , terminate the RT transition process. The processes of steps S4001 to S4004 are the same as the processes of steps S3401 to S3404.

If it is determined in step S4002 that the number of games remaining in the advantageous interval ZG is not 10, it is determined in step S4005 whether or not it is known that the conditions for forced termination of the advantageous interval will be satisfied in the future. More specifically, in step S4005, it is determined whether or not the first excess flag or the second excess flag is set in the various flag storage area 106d. As already explained, the first excess flag is set when it is determined that the upper limit number of games (1500) in the advantageous interval will be reached in the future due to the relationship between the current number of games in the advantageous interval AG and the number of remaining games in the advantageous interval ZG. is a flag that is set to In addition, it is understood that the second excess flag will reach the upper limit increase number (2400) of the advantageous section in the future due to the relationship between the current advantageous section increase/decrease number ZM, the number of remaining games in the advantageous section ZG, and the expected net increase number. A flag that is set if If these flags are not set, the RT transition process is terminated. If either the first excess flag or the second excess flag is set, the process advances to step S4006 to determine whether the situation is close to the conditions for forced termination of the advantageous interval. is 1450, and there are 50 games left to reach the upper limit number of games in the advantageous section (1500), or the number of increase/decrease numbers in the advantageous section ZM is 2300, and the average number of games required to reach the upper limit increase number (2400) in the advantageous section It is determined whether the number is 50 games remaining (calculated with an expected net increase of about +2.0). If it is either, the process advances to step S4003 to set the transition notification flag and the transition command, and then terminates the RT transition process. If it is neither, the process for RT transition is terminated as it is.

In other words, regarding the number of remaining games until the end of the advantageous interval, the number of remaining games in step S4006 is greater than the number of remaining games in step S4002, and the forced end condition is satisfied more than the other. Also, the notification flag for transition is set at an earlier stage, and the situation is such that transition to the fourth RT state may occur. By doing so, it is possible to avoid the phenomenon that the transition to the 4th RT state cannot be caused by not winning the transition replays 1 and 2 even though the notification flag for transition is set. becomes possible.

As described above, in this modification, when the advantageous interval is forcibly terminated by reaching the upper limit number of games or the upper limit increase number of the advantageous interval, a transition to the fourth RT state as the AT mode high probability state occurs. I made it By doing so, it is possible to make the transition to the fourth RT state compensate for the expectation that the AT mode might have continued if it had not been forcibly terminated.

In this case, the transition to the fourth RT state is configured to end the advantageous section, so the transition to the fourth RT state before forced termination substantially increases the number of games played or the upper limit. Without reaching the number, the advantageous interval will end. On the other hand, a transition to AT mode may occur immediately thereafter. Therefore, for example, if there is a desire to reduce the number of forced terminations, the number of forced terminations can be reduced without shortening the effective length of the advantageous section. become. It should be noted that forced termination is not desirable for the player, and a reduction in the number of forced terminations is a desirable phenomenon for the player. More specifically, although the upper limit of the number of games such as forced termination is set, by making the transition to the AT mode high probability state before the forced termination and ending the advantageous section, the AT mode high probability state , the advantageous section or AT mode can be continued, and substantially the number of games until forced termination can be reset to the initial value. Therefore, in the advantageous section or AT mode restarted via the fourth RT state, it is possible to realize a game feature such as re-challenging to continue up to the upper limit number of games.

<Modification 2>
In this modification, when the condition for forced termination of the advantageous section is satisfied, whether or not to cause the transition to the fourth RT state is differentiated according to the benefit of the advantageous section that cannot be obtained due to the forced termination condition.

FIG. 92(a) is a flowchart showing the number-of-games addition process in this modification. The number-of-games addition process is, for example, a process executed in step S1018 in the second special combination process (FIG. 35), and is executed when the AT mode addition lottery is won and the number of games to be added is determined. .

In step S4101, it is determined whether or not it is known that either the first excess flag or the second excess flag is set and the condition for forced termination will be satisfied in the future. If neither the first excess flag nor the second excess flag is set, then in step S4102 processing is performed to grasp the current number of additional games, and in step S4103 the target continuous game number (AT mode After executing the process of adding the number of games to be added to the number of continuations, the process of adding the number of games is terminated.

If it is determined in step S4101 that any excess flag has been set, the flow advances to step S4104. In step S4104, a process of grasping the number of games to be added this time is executed. Then, in step S4105, after executing a process of adding the number of games to be added this time to the number of eliminated games EG provided in the various counter areas 106e, this number of games adding process ends. When the number of games to be eliminated EG has the first excess flag or the second excess flag already set, and even if the number of games is added beyond this, the number of games to be added cannot be consumed by forced termination processing. Secondly, it is a counter for the CPU 102 to grasp the number of additional games (the degree of benefit from the addition).

FIG. 92(b) shows RT transition processing in this modified example.

In step S4151, it is determined whether or not the AT notification flag is set in the same manner as described above, and if it is not set, the RT transition processing is terminated. If it is set, it is determined whether or not the number of games remaining in the advantageous section ZG is 10 in step S4152. If there are 10 games remaining, a transition notification flag is set in step S4513, a transition command is set in step S4514, and then RT transition processing is terminated. These processes are as described above, and when there are 10 remaining games, the pressing order notification for the transition to the fourth RT state at the time of winning the transition replay is generated.

If the number of games remaining in the advantageous section ZG is not 10 in step S4152, the process proceeds to step S4155. In step S4155, it is determined whether or not either the first excess flag or the second excess flag is set. If any excess flag is set, it is determined in step S4156 whether or not the number of games in the advantageous interval AG is 1450 or the number of increase/decrease numbers in the advantageous interval ZM is 2300. When a negative determination is made in step S4155 or step S4156, the process for RT transition is terminated as it is.

If the determination in step S4156 is affirmative, that is, if the number of games in the advantageous section AG is 1450 or the number of games increased or decreased in the advantageous section ZM is 2300 and the condition for forced termination of the advantageous section is about to be satisfied, the process proceeds to step S4157. In step S4157, a process of grasping the number of eliminated games EG is executed, and in subsequent step S4158, a transition notification lottery process is executed. In the transition notification lottery process, the winning probability is set to be higher as the number of lost games EG is larger. For example, if the number of eliminated games EG is 10, and the number of additional games that occurred after any of the excess flags were set, that is, the number of games that could not be consumed due to the forced termination is 10 games, the shift notification lottery will be performed. About 10% chance of winning. On the other hand, if the number of games to be eliminated EG is 50 and the number of games that cannot be completed due to the forced termination is 50 games, there is a probability of about 50% of winning the shift notification lottery. It is set so that the greater the number of games that cannot be played, the easier it is to win the shift notification lottery.

In step S4159, it is determined whether or not the shift notification lottery process in step S4158 has been won. If not won, the process for RT transition is terminated as it is, and if won, the process proceeds to step S4153. In this case, by setting the notification flag for transition, if the transition replay is won in the subsequent game, the pressing order notification that causes the transition to the fourth RT state is generated.

As described above, according to the present modification, the more games are added to the upper limit number of games or the upper limit increase number, the easier it is to shift to the fourth RT state. By doing so, it is possible not only to reduce the feeling of loss due to exceeding the above, but also to increase the number of games in a situation where it is already specified that the upper limit number of games or the upper limit increase number will be reached. When this occurs, it is difficult for the player to feel that the player has lost the game, and it is possible to favorably enhance the playability in this situation.

<Modification 3>
In this modified example, a configuration will be described in which the rate of transition to the fourth RT state differs depending on the set value.

FIG. 93(a) shows part of the second RT state lottery table and the third RT state lottery table. In this modified example, the winning probability of transition replay 1 is set to be higher in settings 3 and 4 than in settings 1 and 2, and further higher in settings 5 and 6. More specifically, the probability of winning transition replay 1 in settings 1 and 2 is about 1/8.7, while in settings 3 and 4 it is about 1/6.9. 6 is about 5.7 times smaller. In this case, the probability of winning transition replay 1 during the remaining 10 games after the transition notification flag is set when the number of remaining games in the advantageous section reaches 10 as described above is approximately 70%, about 79% for settings 3 and 4, and about 85% for settings 5 and 6. The probability of transitioning to the 4th RT state at the end of the advantageous section, that is, the probability of transitioning to the AT mode high probability state at the end of the advantageous section is higher for settings 3 and 4 than for settings 1 and 2, and is higher for settings 5 and 6. In this way, it is possible to make a difference in the setting value for the consecutive game performance in the AT mode simply by changing the winning probability of the transition replay 1 according to the setting value.

Incidentally, in this modification, as shown in FIG. 93(a), transition to the 4th RT state for a number of games (30 games) larger than transition replay 1, in which transition to the 4th RT state for 10 games is allowed, is allowed. The permissible transition replay 2 winning probability is set so that there is no difference due to the setting value. By doing so, regardless of the setting value, by incorporating a game with a strong element of luck regarding the transition to the fourth RT state, for example, even if it is understood that the setting value is low during the game Also, it is possible to support the continuation of the game.

Also, in settings 1 to 6, although the winning probabilities of transition replay 1 are different as described above, the total replay probabilities are set to be the same. More specifically, the winning probability of the normal replay is also set differently depending on the setting value, and the setting difference of the winning probability of the transition replay 1 is absorbed by the setting difference of the winning probability of the normal replay, and the winning probability of the normal replay is It is set so that the higher the set value is, the lower it is. By doing so, the expected increase in the number of cards per game in the 2nd RT state and the 3rd RT state does not differ by changing the total replay probability, and the set value is predicted and specified from the replay probability. It is possible to suppress

In particular, when transition replay 1 is won, in most cases (before the notification flag for transition is set), the push order notification corresponding to the first replay win is generated. Therefore, it is difficult to understand from the winning mode whether the replay 1 for transition is won and the first replay winning is established, or whether the normal replay is won and the first replay winning is established. In addition, by adopting a configuration in which the push order notification is generated even when the normal replay is won, it is determined whether the normal replay or the transition replay is won based on the presence or absence of the push order notification when the first replay win is established. It is also possible to avoid In this case, when the normal replay is won, it is preferable to generate a press order notice of a stop order determined in advance or at random.

FIG. 93(b) shows a configuration in which the odds of winning in the shift notification lottery process differ depending on the number of additional games (excessive number of games) occurring in the situation where the excess flag is set, as in Modification 2 above. Different examples are shown depending on the set values. More specifically, in a situation where the number of excess games is 1 to 50, the probability of winning the shift notification lottery is 30% for settings 1 and 2, 35% for settings 3 and 4, and 40% for settings 5 and 6. , is set so that the higher the set value, the higher the probability of winning the shift notification lottery. In addition, in a situation where the number of excess games is 101 or more, the probability of winning the shift notification lottery is 50% for settings 1 and 2, 70% for settings 3 and 4, and 90% for settings 5 and 6. The higher the value, the higher the probability of winning the shift notification lottery. It is set so that the setting difference of the probability of winning is large. By doing so, in a situation where any of the excess flags is set, the transition notification flag is set, and the probability of occurrence of the push order notification to the fourth RT state when winning the transition replay depends on the set value. A game is added in which the set value is predicted from the occurrence rate of the push order notification. In addition, the more the addition occurs after the excess flag is set, that is, the more games that cannot be substantially completed due to forced termination, the easier it is to predict the set value in the above-described game that predicts the set value. As a result, it is possible to compensate for the increase in the number of games that cannot be completed.

It should be noted that in the above-described configuration in which the probability of winning transition replay 1 differs depending on the set value, the higher the set value, the more likely it is to win transition replay 1. The higher the set value, the less likely it is to win transition replay 1. Such a configuration may be adopted, or the winning probability of transition replay 1 may differ depending on whether the set value is an even number or an odd number. Further, the transition replay in which the winning probability differs depending on the setting value is not limited to the transition replay 1, and the winning probability of the transition replay 2 may differ depending on the setting value, or the winning probability of the transition replay 1 and the transition replay 2 may be different. You may make it differ with a setting value. In this case, for example, transition replay 1 may have a higher winning probability as the set value increases, while transition replay 2 may have a lower winning probability as the set value increases.

Further, even in the configuration in which the odds of winning the transition notification lottery are varied according to the set value, the configuration is not limited to the configuration in which the greater the number of excess games, the easier it is to win the transition notification lottery. Such a configuration may be adopted, or the winning probability of transition replay 1 may differ depending on whether the set value is an even number or an odd number. Also, if the number of excess games is 50, 100, or 150, which is a good number of games, it is easier to win the transition notification lottery than 1 to 49, 51 to 99, or 101 to 149, which are different. may be configured.

Furthermore, in the configuration in which the winning probability of the transition notification lottery is changed according to the set value, the lottery based on the excess number of games in the second modification has been described. In place of or in addition to the configuration of uniformly setting the notification flag for transition when the number becomes 10, the notification flag for transition is set when the lottery is won through the notification lottery for transition. Then, the probability of winning the lottery may differ depending on the set value. Then, it is sufficient if the probability that the transition notification flag is set differs depending on the set value. When the number of wins of the bell or the number of wins) reaches a predetermined number, the notification flag for transition may be set, and the probability of winning the predetermined combination may differ depending on the set value.

<Modification 4>
In this modification, the player can select whether or not to cause a transition to the fourth RT state when transition replays 1 and 2 are won. As already explained, when a shift to the AT mode occurs, the initial number of AT mode games (50) is set in the start process. Here, when the transition replay is won in the AT mode (second RT state or third RT state), until the number of remaining games reaches the predetermined number of games as described above, the pressing order notification for transition to the fourth RT state is performed. However, if the transition to the fourth RT state occurs and the transition to the AT mode succeeds again, assuming that no addition has occurred by then, it will be digested by then. It can be said that the number of AT mode games has been extended by the amount of AT mode that has been played.

More specifically, for example, as shown in FIG. 94(b), in the AT mode which starts at te1 and is scheduled to complete the initial number of games at te5, it is assumed that transition replay is won at te2. In this case, for example, it is assumed that the transition to the fourth RT state is caused in te2, and that the transition to the advantageous section and the winning of the AT mode transition lottery are successful in the fourth RT state. In this case, when the fourth RT state ends at te3 and the AT mode is shifted to at te4, when the initial number of games (50) is set again as described above, the reset AT mode is up to te6. continuation will be confirmed. Then, it can be considered that the number of AT mode games played from te1 to te2 is increased by winning the transition replay at te2.

However, in the above example, in the 4th RT state from te2 to te3, the advantageous section and the AT mode transition lottery are won. If the section transition lottery is won but the AT mode transition lottery is not won, the AT mode ends without completely using the remaining number of AT mode games from te2 to te5.

This modified example is intended to incorporate into the game the player's selection of the benefits and risks of resetting the AT mode. In other words, in this modification, the player is made to select whether or not to cause the transition to the fourth RT state while taking into consideration the difference in the degree of advantage due to the number of remaining AT mode games when the transition replay is won. is performed in the transition replay winning game. For example, as shown in FIG. 94(a), in the transitional replay winning game, the auxiliary display section 65 displays characters "Choose Fate!!" , or that neither the transition to the fourth RT state nor the transition to the first RT state will occur. In this case, notifying the number of remaining AT mode games (displayed as "remaining 30G" in the figure) helps the player to consider the difference in the degree of advantage due to the remaining number of AT mode games.

1st replay, 11th replay, and 12th replay are set as the winning combination in the case of winning with the index value IV=13, 14 corresponding to the shift replay, and the 2nd replay is not set. You may do so. That is, depending on the operation order at the time of winning the transition replay, either the transition to the fourth RT state occurs or the transition to the RT state does not occur, and the transition to the first RT state is prevented. good too. In this case, it is possible to further simplify the operation sequence when winning the transition replay, and as shown in FIG. By stopping, the 11th re-game winning or the 12th re-game winning is established, which makes it easy to understand the selection of left or right, and it is expected that the player's understanding of the game will be improved.

A specific configuration of the order of operations corresponding to each replay when winning the shift replay is as follows, for example. When the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are stopped in the order of left→middle→right and left→right→middle, the first replay prize is established, right→middle→left and right. When the stop operation is performed in the order of →left →middle, the 11th re-game winning or the 12th re-game winning is established. In addition, when the stop operation is performed in the order of center → left → right, the first regame winning is established, and when the stop operation is performed in the order of center → right → left, the 11th regame winning or the 12th replay winning is established. A game prize is established.

In addition, the transition replay in which the operation order and the winning mode are set such that either left or right can be selected is provided separately from the transition replays 1 and 2 of the first embodiment, and these can coexist. may be configured.

<Modification 5>
In this modified example, the shift to the fixed RT state is caused by taking into account the post-loading notification. First, with reference to the flow chart of FIG. 95, the post-loading notification process will be described. The post-addition notification process is a process executed at step S1602 in the winning result handling process (FIG. 49) by main controller 101. FIG.

In step S4201, it is determined whether or not an AT notification flag is set in the various flag storage area 106d. If the AT notification flag is not set, the post-addition notification process is terminated. If the AT notification flag is set, it is determined in step S4202 whether or not the bonus state is in effect. In the case of either the BB state based on the first BB or the second BB or the CB state based on the CB, the post-addition notification processing is terminated as it is. If a negative determination is made in step S4202, the flow advances to step S4203 to perform subtraction processing for the display remaining number counter HG. In this case, in step S4203, a command including the value after subtraction of the display remaining number counter HG is set as an object to be output to the display control device 81. FIG. The display control device 81 that has received such a command controls the auxiliary display section 65 so as to update the display of the number of remaining games. The display control device 81 may be provided with a counter or the like corresponding to the display remaining number counter HG, and the display control device 81 may perform processing for updating the display of the number of remaining games.

In step S4204, as a result of the processing in step S4203, it is determined whether or not the display remaining number counter HG has reached a predetermined value (1) that triggers the addition notification. If the value does not reach the predetermined value, the post-addition notification process is terminated. If the predetermined value is reached, it is determined in step S4205 whether or not the post-loading flag is set. If the post-boarding flag is not set, the post-boarding notification process is terminated.

If it is determined in step S4205 that the post-loading flag is set, the process advances to step S4206. In step S4206, the value of the trailing counter BG is grasped. Then, in step S4207, a process of setting an add-on command is performed so that an add-on notification corresponding to the value of the add-on counter BG is performed. The add-on command in this case includes information that an add-on notification is performed in the game and information that an add-on of the number of games corresponding to the value of the add-on counter BG is performed. It should be noted that it is also possible to add a part of the post-loading counter BG. It is preferable to set the information that is performed in the superposition command.

In subsequent step S4208, a process of subtracting the value corresponding to the number of additional games set in the additional command in step S4207 from the additional counter BG is performed. Then, in step S4209, it is determined whether or not the post-addition counter BG has become 0 as a result of the processing in step S4208. If it is not 0, the post-addition notification process is terminated. If it is 0, the process for clearing the post-loading flag is performed in step S4210, and then the post-loading notification process is terminated.

As described above, the add-on command is transmitted to the display control device 81 in the add-on notification process in the winning result handling process. As already explained, in the display control device 81, the processing for performing the additional notification effect is executed in the additional notification processing of the effect setting processing at the time of all stop. As a result, in the game in which the display remaining number counter HG reaches a predetermined value, the additional information is executed as the additional information after all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R have stopped. Therefore, in a game in which the remaining number counter HG for display has reached a predetermined value (1), regardless of the winning result of the game, while expecting that the additional notification (post-addition notification) will be performed, A stop OFF operation is performed.

Incidentally, the third reel stop OFF operation of the timing of the additional information selected in the case of performing the immediate information can be different timing from the time of full stop in the case of performing the subsequent information. That is, the time of the third reel stop OFF operation is the timing when the third reel stop OFF operation is performed, and if the corresponding reel may stop at that timing, the timing is slightly delayed due to the slip control. In some cases, the corresponding reel stops. Therefore, the third reel stop OFF operation can be slightly earlier than the timing at which all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are stopped. On the other hand, the execution timing of the post-addition notification set in the post-addition notification processing in the winning result handling processing is the timing after the winning result handling processing is executed, and all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are complete. It is the timing after the medal is paid out (after the payout determination process of step S413 is executed) if a minor win has occurred. Therefore, the timing at which the post-boarding notification is executed can be a timing later than the third reel stop OFF operation in the immediate boarding notification.

Next, RT transition processing in this modified example will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In step S4301, it is determined whether or not the AT notification flag is set. If it is not set, the process for RT transition is terminated as it is. If it is set, it is determined whether or not the number of games remaining in the advantageous section ZG is 10 in step S4302. If the value is 10, a transition notification flag is set in step S4303, a transition command is set in step S4304, and then the RT transition process is terminated.

If the number of games remaining in the advantageous section ZG is not 10 in step S4302, the process proceeds to step S4305. In step S4305, it is determined whether or not the post-addition flag is set. If the add-on flag is set, it is determined in step S4306 whether or not the display remaining number counter HG is 10, and the display of the number of remaining games in the AT mode is apparently 10 games. If the post-addition flag is not set in step S4305 or if the display remaining number counter HG is not 10, the process for RT shift is terminated as it is. If the trailing flag is set and the display remaining number counter HG is 10, the process proceeds to step S4307.

In step S4307, a process of setting a notification flag for pseudo transition to the various flag storage area 106d is executed. The notification flag for pseudo transition is a flag for the CPU 102 of the main control unit 101 to recognize that an effect for the transition replay is won in a situation where the subsequent notification may occur. After executing the process of step S4307, the command for pseudo transition is set as an object to be output to the display control device 81 in step S4308, and then the process for RT transition is terminated. The display control device 81 that has received the pseudo-transition command controls the auxiliary display section 65 and the like so as to generate the first transition period effect, as in the case of receiving the transition command.

Next, referring to the flow chart of FIG. 97, the pushing process in this modified example will be described.

In this modification, generally, the process is different when winning the transition replay under the condition that the notification flag for transition during the AT mode is not set. That is, the processing of steps S4401 to S4423 is the same as the processing of steps S1401 to S1423, and the processing when a negative determination is made in step S4421 is different.

Specifically, it is determined in step S4419 that the transition replay has been won, and in step S4420 it is determined that the AT notification flag is set, and in step S4421 the transition notification flag is set. If it is determined that there is not, in this modification, the process proceeds to step S4428. In step S4428, it is determined whether or not the notification flag for pseudo-transition set in step S4307 is set. When the notification flag for pseudo transition is set, the value of the display remaining number counter HG becomes 10 in the situation where the post-loading flag is set, and the number of remaining games in the AT mode becomes 10 visually. This is the case where the first transition period effect occurs and the transition replay win is made. That is, this is the case when the AT mode is not actually approaching the final stage.

In this case, in this modified example, a so-called freeze effect that temporarily restricts the progress of the game is generated. That is, if it is determined in step S4428 that the notification flag for pseudo transition is set, the flow advances to step S4429 to execute freeze timing lottery processing. In the freeze timing lottery process, the generation timing of the freeze effect is randomly selected according to the number of AT mode games that can be reported by the post-loading notification. More specifically, a post-loading counter BG and a lottery counter are acquired from the various counter areas 106e of the RAM 106, a freeze timing table is acquired from the various table storage areas 105a of the ROM 105, and freezing is performed according to the value of the post-loading counter BG. The timing will be determined by lottery. In the freeze timing table, as shown in FIG. 98, as freeze timing, the time of the first stop ON operation, the time of the second stop ON operation, and the time of the third stop ON operation are set. Depending on the distribution ratio, it is determined which operation causes the freeze. Then, it is set such that the greater the value of the trailing counter BG, the easier it is to select the rear side operation than the front side operation.

After executing the freeze timing lottery process in step S4429, in step S4430, the process of setting a freeze flag corresponding to the lottery result in step S4429 is executed in the various flag storage area 106d. Specifically, if the lottery result in step S4429 is the first stop ON operation, the first stop ON freeze flag is set, and if the lottery result is the second stop ON operation, the second stop ON freeze flag is set. is set, and if the result of the lottery is the time of the third stop ON operation, the freeze flag at the time of the third stop ON is set.

When it is determined in step S4428 that the notification flag for pseudo transition is not set, or after executing the process of step S4430, the process proceeds to step S4407 for performing the pressing order notification for the first replay.

In this case, the push order notification by the instruction monitor 68 when the pseudo-transition notification flag is set and the push order notification by the instruction monitor 68 when the pseudo-transition notification flag is not set are both the first. 1 They are common in that they notify the pressing order for replay winning. On the other hand, the effect contents including the pressing order notification effect by the auxiliary display unit 65 when the notification flag for pseudo transition is set, and the pressing order notification effect by the auxiliary display unit 65 when the notification flag for pseudo transition is not set More specifically, the effect content including the pressing order notification effect by the auxiliary display unit 65 when the pseudo transition notification flag is not set is the transition notification flag is not set. The effect content for the first re-game winning including the pressing order notification effect by the auxiliary display unit 65 in the case is common, and the pressing order notification effect by the auxiliary display unit 65 when the notification flag for pseudo transition is set. The effect contents including are common to the effect contents for the 11th re-game winning prize or the 12th re-game winning prize by the auxiliary display unit 65 when the notification flag for transition is set, and only the order of pressing order notification is It is announced as the one for the first regame winning prize. In other words, when transition replay is won in a situation where the notification flag for pseudo transition is set, although the operation order for the first re-game winning is notified as the push order notification and the push order notification effect, the transition notification It is difficult to distinguish the case where the transition replay is won in a situation where the flag is set, from the effect contents of the auxiliary display section 65 or the like.

The freeze processing in this modified example will be described with reference to FIG. The freeze processing is performed by setting a stop command command in step S405 when it is determined in step S404 that the stop switches 42 to 44 have been operated in the reel control processing (FIG. 18) by the main controller 101. It is the processing performed before. Note that this freezing process may be configured to be performed during the invalid period of each of the stop switches 42-44.

In step S4501, it is determined whether or not the current stop operation was the first stop ON operation. If it is the first stop ON operation, it is determined in step S4502 whether or not the first stop ON freeze flag is set. If it is not set, the freeze processing is terminated. If it is set, freeze processing is executed in step S4503. The freeze process is a process of temporarily disabling the operation of the other stop switches 42 to 44 without stopping the rotation of the corresponding reels 32L, 32M, 32R. That is, the freeze process temporarily restricts the progress of the normal game, such as stopping the corresponding reels 32L, 32M, and 32R based on the operation of the stop switches 42-44.

After executing the freeze process in step S4503, the process of setting the special effect command as an output target to the display control device 81 is executed in step S4504. The special effect command is a command for generating an effect corresponding to the freeze process. In the display control device 81, based on the reception of the special effect command, the special effect is displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65 and the speaker. 64 or the like. After that, in steps S4505 to S4508, processing for generating a post-boarding notification is executed. That is, in step S4505, an add-on command corresponding to the post-add counter BG is set, and in step S4506, subtraction processing of the post-add counter BG is executed. At step S4507, it is determined whether or not the post-loading counter BG has reached 0. If it has become 0, processing for clearing the post-loading flag is executed at step S4508. If it is not 0, the freezing process is terminated.

If a negative determination is made in step S4501, the process advances to step S4509 to determine whether or not the current stop operation was the second stop ON operation. If it is the second stop ON operation, it is determined in step S4510 whether or not the second stop ON freeze flag is set. If the second stop ON freeze flag is not set, the freeze processing is terminated. If the second stop ON freeze flag is set, the process proceeds to step S4503 to perform processing for generating a freeze effect, a special effect, and an additional notification.

If a negative determination is made in step S4509, the process advances to step S4511 to determine whether or not the current stop operation was the third stop ON operation. If it is the third stop ON operation, it is determined in step S4512 whether or not the third stop ON freeze flag is set. If a negative determination is made in step S4511 (if the stop operation this time is one of the stop OFF operations), or if the third stop ON freeze flag is not set, the freeze processing ends. If the third stop ON freeze flag is set in step S4512, the process advances to step S4503 to perform processing for generating a freeze effect, a special effect, and an additional notification.

How the freeze effect occurs and the special effect will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 100 shows a freeze effect and a special effect when the second stop ON freeze flag is set.

As shown in FIG. 100(a), for example, in a situation where the middle reel 32M as the first stop reel is stopped, the right stop switch 44 is turned on to stop the right reel 32R as the second stop reel. Suppose In this case, the stop control of the right reel 32R is limited based on the stop ON operation of the right stop switch 44 because the second stop ON freeze flag is set as described above. Further, in this case, the stop control of the left reel 32L based on the stop ON operation of the left stop switch 42 is also limited, and a so-called freeze effect occurs.

In the auxiliary display part 65 and the speaker 64, a special effect is produced in correspondence with the freeze effect. In the special effect, for example, as shown in FIG. 100(b), a male character engulfed in flames is displayed, and the male character shouts, "What you were seeing was nothing more than an illusion!" is emitted from the speaker 64, and it is explained that the display up to that point, that is, the first transition period effect and the press order notification for causing the transition to the fourth RT state were pseudo displays. be. In addition, it is preferable that the words are also displayed in characters on the auxiliary display section 65 . The special effect is executed over the period during which the freeze effect is performed, that is, the period during which the stop control of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R based on the stop operation of the stop switches 42-44 is limited. When the stop control of each of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R based on the stop operation is resumed, the special effect ends, and the above-described additional notification is generated (additional notification effect is generated). The player can grasp that the special performance will occur through the restriction of the stop control of each of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R. Then, with the special effect, although it was attempted to shift to the 4th RT state based on the transition replay winning, it is possible to grasp that the situation should not be shifted to the 4th RT state, that is, that the AT mode will continue, In addition, instead of establishing the 11th regame winning prize or the 12th regame winning prize and shifting to the fourth RT state, it is possible to establish the first regame winning prize and maintain the infinite RT state. Moreover, at the same time, the AT mode is added (post-added).

As described above, in this modification, while utilizing the configuration for shifting to the fixed RT state just before the end of the AT mode, the configuration is such that the above-mentioned special effect can occur due to the relationship with the post-boarding notification, so that the AT mode is activated. The disappointment of ending the game can be changed to the joy of continuing the AT mode, and furthermore, the number of continuations of the AT mode can be announced to provide an intense excitement.

<Modification 6>
In this modification, the transition route to the fourth RT state as the AT mode high probability state is different from that in the first embodiment. FIG. 101 is a diagram for explaining the game state transition route in this modification.

In this modification, the fourth RT state as the AT mode high probability state can be shifted from the third RT state, and cannot be shifted from the first RT state, the second RT state, and the normal game state. That is, in the first embodiment, the configuration allows transition from the second RT state and the third RT state to the fourth RT state, but in this modified example, the configuration prohibits the transition from the second RT state.

FIG. 102 is a diagram showing an example of the lottery table for the second RT state in this modified example. Compared to the lottery table in the first embodiment, the point value PV of index values IV=13 and 14 is set to 0, and in the second RT state, it is set so that transition replays 1 and 2 are not won. there is Note that the point values of the index values IV=13 and 14 are added to the index values IV=6 to 10, respectively, and the total replay probability in the second RT state is the same as that of the first embodiment. have the same probability.

The lottery table for the third RT state in this modified example is the same as that in the first embodiment. If it corresponds to the re-game winning or the 12th re-game winning, the game state shifts to the 4th RT state.

That is, in the present modification, although the AT mode is shifted to the second RT state, if the AT mode ends in the second RT state, the shift replay is not won even if the transition notification flag is set. Therefore, transition to the fourth RT state does not occur. Then, when the AT mode transitions from the 2nd RT state to the 3rd RT state in the AT mode, and the AT mode ends in the 3rd RT state, the transition notification flag is set, and if the transition replay is won. , a transition to the fourth RT state can occur. In the above-described first embodiment, the display mode that causes the transition to the third RT state is referred to as the VB mode. This mode will be referred to as a mode. In other words, by winning the transition mode transition lottery, the transition to the 3rd RT state occurs. More specifically, by winning the transition mode transition lottery, when the second promotion replay 1, 2 is won Pressing order notification corresponding to the fourth re-game winning prize and the fifth re-game winning prize is performed.

FIG. 103 is a flow chart showing the second special combination process in this modified example. As already explained, the second special combination process is mainly performed based on the lottery results of each game in the AT mode.

In this modification, in step S4601, a process of grasping the number of remaining AT mode games is executed. As already explained, the number of AT mode remaining games can be grasped from the AT mode continuation counter. In step S4602, a process of acquiring a transition mode lottery table from various table storage area 105a of ROM 105 is executed. The transition mode lottery table is set so that the probability of shifting to the transition mode differs depending on the number of remaining AT mode games. It is set to increase the probability of causing migration. For example, when the number of remaining games is 50 games or more, there is a 0% probability that the transition to the transition mode occurs (the lottery for transition to the transition mode is not won), and the number of remaining games is 49 to 30 games. If the number of remaining games is 29 to 10 games, there is a 10% probability of switching to the transition mode, and the number of remaining games is less than 10. , the transition mode lottery table is set so that the transition to the transition mode occurs with a probability of 30%.

In step S4603, transition mode lottery processing is executed to determine whether or not to cause transition to the transition mode based on the number of AT mode remaining games ascertained in step S4601 and the transition mode lottery table acquired in step S4602. . In step S4604, it is determined whether or not the result of the lottery in step S4603 is a winning result that causes transition to the transition mode. If it is a winning result, the process of setting the transition mode flag in the various flag storage area 106d is executed in step S4605, and then the second special combination process is terminated. The transition mode flag is a flag for the CPU 102 to recognize that it is possible to cause transition to the transition mode. Then, when the second promotion replays 1 and 2 are won in a situation where the transition mode flag is set, an affirmative determination is made in step S1411 in the push-up process (FIG. 48), and the fourth replay is performed in step S1412. Processing for notifying the pressing order corresponding to the winning or the fifth replay winning is performed.

If it is determined in step S4604 that the result is not a winning result, the process proceeds to step S4606. The processing of steps S4606 to S4621 is the same as the processing of steps S1014 to S1029, and performs processing for adding AT mode, processing for specialized zones, and processing for notification of pseudo-addition.

Winning result correspondence processing in this modified example will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 104 . In this modification, generally, the process when the fourth re-game winning or the fifth re-game winning is established and the game state shifts to the third RT state is different from that of the first embodiment. .

That is, the number-of-games management process in steps S4701 to S4710, the post-addition notification process, and the process based on the third replay win are the same as the processes in steps S1601 to S1610. If it is determined in step S4703 that the winning result of the current game is not the third replay winning, the process advances to step S4711 to determine whether the winning result of the current game is the fourth replay winning or the fifth replay winning. determine whether In the case of the fourth re-game winning prize or the fifth re-game winning prize, the flow advances to step S4712 to determine whether or not the transition mode flag is set. If the transition mode flag is not set, the transition mode lottery (step S4603) will not be won, and the fourth re-game winning prize or the fifth re-game winning prize will be established by chance, and the state will shift to the 3rd RT state. Yes, in this case, the main winning result handling process is terminated. If the transition mode flag is set, the process advances to step S4713.

In step S4713, it is determined whether or not the shift notification flag is set. As described above, the transition notification flag is a flag for generating push order notification corresponding to the 11th replay win or the 12th replay win when the transition replays 1 and 2 are won. If the shift notification flag is set, the winning result handling process is terminated. If not set, the process advances to step S4714.

In step S4714, a process of setting a shift notification flag is executed. Then, in step S4715, after executing the process of setting the shift command as an object to be output to the display control device 81, the winning result handling process ends.

That is, in the present modification, the notification flag for transition is set by shifting to the 3RT state after winning the transition lottery to the transition mode, and the 11th replay win or the 12th replay when the transition replay 1 or 2 is won. If the pressing order notification corresponding to the game winning is generated, and the lottery for transition to the transition mode is not won, or the transition to the 3rd RT state does not occur, even if the number of remaining games in the AT mode becomes 10. The transition notification flag is not set, and the advantageous section (AT mode) ends without causing a transition to the fourth RT state.

If a negative determination is made in step S4711, the processing of steps S4716 to S4720 is the same as the processing of steps S1617 to S1621.

The state of transition to the RT state in this modified example will be described with reference to the timing chart of FIG.

In the transition mode lottery process (step S4603) in this modified example, when the number of remaining AT mode games becomes less than 50 games, the transition mode lottery is won. ing. If the transition mode lottery is won at timing tf1 when the number of remaining AT mode games is less than 50, the transition mode flag is set. After that, when the second promoted replays 1 and 2 are won at tf2, the pressing order notification for the fourth replay winning prize and the fifth replay winning prize is generated, and the transition mode is shifted to the third RT state as the transition mode. When transitioning to the 3rd RT state, it becomes a state in which it is possible to win the transition replay.

Transition replays 1 and 2 are won at the timing of tf3, and the game state shifts to the fourth RT state by the stop operation according to the pressing order notification. When the transition to the fourth RT state occurs, the AT mode ends together with the advantageous section at the timing of tf3 without waiting for the timing of tf5 when the number of remaining games is completed.

Then, when winning the lottery for the transition to the advantageous section and AT mode during the 4th RT state, after the 4th RT state ends at the timing of tf4, after the push order to the 2nd RT state is notified, at the timing of tf6 AT mode is resumed.

Here, although it is possible to win the second promoted replays 1 and 2 even at the timing before winning the transition mode lottery at the timing of tf1, the notification of the pushing order at the time of winning corresponds to the first regame winning. Even if the stop operation is performed in an operation order different from the pressing order notification and succeeds in establishing the fourth re-game winning prize or the fifth re-game winning prize, the transition notification is performed. No flags are set. Therefore, even if the transition to the third RT state happens to succeed in the second RT state, it is difficult to subsequently transition to the fourth RT state.

As described above, in the AT mode, instead of directly transitioning from the 2nd RT state to the 4th RT state, a transition mode (3rd RT state), such as a transition mode (3rd RT state), to the 4th RT state in which a lottery for transition to the 4th RT state can be won is intervened. By adopting a configuration for transitioning to the state, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of an event that unintentionally causes a transition to the fourth RT state.

<Modification 7>
In this modified example, the winning probability of the AT mode transition lottery in the fourth RT state differs depending on the set value. FIG. 106 shows an AT mode transition lottery table in this modified example.

In the AT mode transition lottery table for the fourth RT state in this modification, for example, in the transition lottery triggered by weak cherry or weak watermelon, setting 1 and 2 wins with a probability of 55%, and setting 3 and 4 wins 60%. The higher the set value is, the easier it is to win the AT mode transition lottery. On the other hand, in the transition lottery triggered by a strong cherry or a strong watermelon, setting values are set so that there is no difference in winning probability. In other words, in the AT mode transition lottery table for the fourth RT state in this modification, there is set whether or not there is a difference in winning probability according to the set value depending on the game result that triggers the lottery.

On the other hand, the AT mode transition lottery tables for the 0RT state to the 3rd RT state are set so that there is no difference due to set values. In other words, in this modification, not only does the winning probability of the AT mode transition lottery differ depending on the RT state, but also whether or not there is a setting difference in the AT mode transition lottery differs depending on the RT state. By doing so, there is not only the merit of creating a difference in the AT mode transition rate depending on the setting value to cause a change in the increase/decrease mode and increase/decrease rate of the game medium, but also the fourth RT state in the game such as predicting the setting value. It is possible to bring about the merits of migration.

In this modified example as well, the advantageous zone transition lottery has a common winning probability regardless of the RT state, and is set so that there is no difference due to set values. That is, in the fourth RT state as the AT mode high probability state, it can be said that there is no setting difference in the winning probability of the advantageous section transition lottery and there is a setting difference in the winning probability of the AT mode transition lottery. By doing so, while the chance of causing a transition to the advantageous section is fair without any difference due to the set value, once the advantageous section is shifted, the level of the benefit from the AT mode within the advantageous section is adjusted by the set value. can be realized by Therefore, it is possible to secure a balance between fairness and diversification of games.

<Modification 8>
In this modification, there are a plurality of fourth RT states as AT mode high probability states, and the probability of winning the AT mode transition lottery differs depending on each fourth RT state. FIG. 107 shows an AT mode transition lottery table in this modified example.

That is, in this modification, the winning probability of the AT mode transition lottery is made different between the 4th RT state that transitions to the 11th regame winning prize and the 4th RT state that transitions to the 12th regame winning prize. Here, the 4th RT state to which the 11th re-game win is entered is called the 4th RT state A, and the 4th RT state to which the 12th re-game win is entered is called the 4th RT state B. As already explained, when the 11th re-game wins the transition to the 4th RT state, the RT state continues over 10 games, and when the 12th re-game wins the transition to the 4th RT state, the RT state is 30. Continue throughout the game. Also in this modification, the number of continuous games in the fourth RT state A is 10 games, and the number of continuous games B in the fourth RT state B is 30 games. It can be said that the fourth RT state B is more advantageous than the state A for the player.

As shown in FIG. 107, when comparing the AT mode transition lottery table in the fourth RT state A with the AT mode transition lottery table in the fourth RT state B, the AT mode transition lottery table is higher than the 0RT state to the 3rd RT state. Although it is set to be easy to win, for example, when triggered by a normal replay, the probability of winning is 5% in the 4th RT state A, whereas the probability of winning is 10% in the 4th RT state B. And, for example, when triggered by a weak cherry, the fourth RT state A wins with a probability of 60%, while the fourth RT state B wins with a probability of 100%. The AT mode transition lottery table is set so that it is easier to win the AT mode transition lottery in the fourth RT state B than in the state A. Therefore, the fourth RT state B is more advantageous to the player than the fourth RT state A from the viewpoint of making it easier to win the AT mode transition lottery.

On the other hand, the transition replay 2, in which the 12th replay win is possible, has an overwhelmingly lower winning probability than the transition replay 1, in which the 11th regame win is possible. That is, basically, it is possible to make the user expect which fourth RT state to transition to, such as shifting to the fourth RT state A and, if lucky, shifting to the fourth RT state B.

Then, as described above, when transition replays 1 and 2 are won in a situation where the notification flag for transition is set, push order notification for establishing the 11th re-game winning prize and the 12th re-game winning prize is generated. . In this case, in this modification, it is set so that it is difficult for the player to distinguish between the pressing order notification for establishing the 11th re-game winning and the pressing order notification for establishing the 12th re-game winning. In other words, after the transition notification flag is set and the first transition period effect (Fig. 79(a)) occurs, the pressing order notification effect (Fig. 79(b)) generated by winning transition replays 1 and 2 , the player may not be able to distinguish between the fourth RT state A and the fourth RT state B, or it may be difficult to distinguish between them. order is set. By doing so, when the transition to the 4th RT state occurs, whether the 4th RT state is the 4th RT state A or the 4th RT state B is determined by the winning rate of the AT mode transition lottery, A game that predicts whether or not the number of RT state executions will continue after 10 games is also added, making it possible to increase the fun of the game.

In the above modified example, the AT mode transition lottery table is set so that it is easier to win the AT mode transition lottery in both the 4th RT state A and the 4th RT state B than in the 0RT state to the 3rd RT state. However, while the 4th RT state A is easier to win than the 0RT state to the 3rd RT state, the 4th RT state B is less likely to be won than the 0RT state to the 3rd RT state or has the same winning probability (AT mode low probability state), and vice versa, in the case of shifting to the AT mode high probability state and to the AT mode low probability state, which is advantageous for the player, when operated according to the press order notification at the time of winning the transition replay 1 and 2. It may be set so that there is a case to migrate. By doing so, it is possible to realize a game with a strong feeling of excitement such as not knowing whether or not the AT mode high-probability state is reached until the actual transition is made.

It should be noted that, when transition replays 1 and 2 are won, it may be possible to identify which transition replay is won by the content of the effect or the pressing order. In this case, when the transition to the fourth RT state occurs, it is possible to grasp in advance whether the transition to the fourth RT state A or to the fourth RT state B will occur. Then, for example, after the transition to the fourth RT state A or the fourth RT state B, in the weak cherry winning game, the AT mode transition is not confirmed in the fourth RT state A, but the AT mode transition is not confirmed in the fourth RT state B is confirmed, and in the strong cherry winning game, the AT mode transition is confirmed in both the fourth RT state A and the fourth RT state B, so if it is the fourth RT state B, the upper or lower row of the left reel 32L When the "cherry" symbol stops, the AT mode shift is confirmed.

Also, as described above, if it is possible to grasp which transition to the fourth RT state occurs when transition replays 1 and 2 are won, for example, immediately after the transition notification flag is set, the transition to the fourth RT state A (if you win the transition replay 1), the transition to the 4th RT state A will be postponed, and the transition to the 4th RT state B will occur (transition replay 2 It is also possible for the player to select whether or not to make a transition depending on the type of the fourth RT state to be transitioned to, such as waiting for the winning of . In this case, it is preferable to apply a configuration in which the player can select the presence or absence of the transition as in the fourth modified example.

<Modification 9>
As described above, the fourth RT state as the AT mode high probability state is the fixed RT state, and the number of executable games is predetermined. The fourth RT state has a low replay probability, and is set so as not to be won in the first promoted replays 1 to 4 that cause the transition to the second RT state. In this case, even if the advantageous section transition lottery is won and the AT mode transition lottery is won during the 4th RT state, the transition to the 2nd RT state does not occur unless the prescribed game of the 4th RT state is finished. , the AT mode is not started. As a result, some players may find it troublesome to complete the fourth RT state after winning the AT mode transition lottery. In this modified example, a process when the AT mode transition lottery is won early in the fourth RT state will be described.

FIG. 108 is a flow chart showing the process when the AT mode transition lottery is won in the first special combination process and the advantageous section transition winning process. More specifically, when it is determined that the AT mode transition lottery has been won in the first special winning process (step S903: YES), and when the AT mode transition lottery (AT mode destination lottery) has been won in the advantageous section transition winning process. It shows the processing when it is determined (step S3605: YES).

That is, when the AT mode transition lottery is won, the AT mode winning flag is set in step S4801, and the AT mode non-winning flag is cleared in step S4802. These processes are as described above.

In the following step S4803, the RT setting flag is confirmed to grasp the current RT state, and it is determined whether or not it is in the fourth RT state. If it is not the 4th RT state, but the 0RT state to the 3rd RT state, that is, if the AT mode is won in the AT mode low probability state, the process proceeds to step S4804, and the initial number of games in this AT mode is predetermined. A predetermined game (50) is determined. Then, in step S4805, a process of determining the current AT mode level by lottery is executed. In the AT mode level lottery, for example, LV. 4, 5% chance of LV. 3, with a probability of 16% LV. 2, 80% chance of LV. The winning probability of the AT mode level is set so that 1 is won.

On the other hand, it is determined in step S4803 that it is in the fourth RT state, and if the AT mode is won in the AT mode high probability state, the process proceeds to step S4806. In step S4806, the number of remaining games in the fourth RT state is grasped based on the fixed RT game number counter in the various counter areas 106e. Then, in step S4807, the number of initial games in the current AT mode is the number of games that is the sum of the predetermined number of games (50) and the number of remaining games in the fourth RT state ascertained in step S4806. Execute the processing to be set. In subsequent step S4808, an AT mode level lottery is executed according to the number of remaining games ascertained in step S4806, and then a process of determining the current AT mode level by lottery is executed. In this case, the level lottery is set so that the higher the number of remaining games, the easier it is to win a higher level. For example, if the number of remaining games is 9 or more, the probability of LV. 4 with a 20% probability of winning LV. 3 with a 5% probability of LV. 4, with a probability of 50% LV. 3, with a probability of 40% LV. 2, with a probability of 15% LV. 1, and if the number of remaining games is 4 or less, there is a 2% chance of LV. 4, 8% probability of LV. 3, with a probability of 30% LV. 2, with a probability of 60% LV. Winning probabilities are set for each AT mode level, such as winning 1 respectively.

At the start of the AT mode, the determined number of games and AT mode level are referenced to set the number of games and level.

After executing the process of step S4805 or step S4808, the process advances to step S4809 to determine whether or not the SAT mode with a specialized zone has been won. If the SAT mode is won, a specialized zone flag is set in step S4810, and it is determined in step S4811 whether or not it is in the fourth RT state. If it is not in the fourth RT state, in step S4812, a process of determining the number of games in the specialized zone as a predetermined predetermined number of games (5) is executed. If it is determined in step S4811 that it is in the fourth RT state, a process of grasping the number of remaining games in the fourth RT state is executed in step S4813, and in step S4814 the number of remaining games is added to the predetermined number of games. The number is determined as the number of games in the special zone this time.

At the start of the specialized zone, the determined number of games is referred to and the number of games is set.

In this way, when the AT mode is won, the remaining number of games in the fourth RT state is added as the number of AT mode games and the number of games in the specialized zone, and the remaining number of games is reflected in the AT mode level lottery, which is advantageous. It is made clear that it is more advantageous for the player to win the AT mode transition lottery earlier, because it is easier for the player to win the lottery at a higher level. By doing so, it is possible to eliminate the annoyance caused by the increase in the number of games required before starting the AT mode as the number of remaining games in the AT mode increases.

It should be noted that, after winning the AT mode transition lottery, the 4th RT state can be easily selected for the AT mode additional lottery, or the special zone can be easily won. Alternatively, even with a configuration in which an advantageous lottery for the AT mode can be received, it is possible to eliminate the annoyance caused by the increase in the number of games required to start the AT mode as the number of remaining games in the AT mode increases. be.

<Modification 10>
As already explained, in the present embodiment, the AT mode transition lottery (AT mode first lottery) is performed in the advantageous section winning game, and the AT mode transition lottery (AT mode post-lottery) is performed in the advantageous section. It is also possible to make the winning probabilities of the former AT mode first lottery and the latter AT mode post lottery different. In this modified example, a configuration in which winning probabilities differ between the AT mode first lottery and the AT mode post lottery will be described.

First, in FIG. 109, the winning probabilities are different between the lottery prior to AT mode and the lottery after AT mode. An example is shown.

In the AT mode first lottery, the winning probability in the 0RT state to the 3rd RT state and the winning probability in the 4th RT state are common. Here, with respect to the advantageous section transition lottery, the winning probability is not set for the transition trigger role that has no set value, and it is not performed for the non-trigger role that has a set difference in the winning probability. Regarding the AT mode destination lottery performed in the game played, it is performed for the transition trigger role, but not performed for the non-trigger role. In this regard, the AT mode transition lottery table for the AT mode first lottery also sets the AT mode winning probability for the transitional role, but does not set the AT mode winning probability for the non-initiative role.

In the AT mode post-lottery, the AT mode winning probability is set to be higher than that of the AT mode pre-lottery. In this modification, both the AT mode transition lottery in the 0RT state to the 3rd RT state and the AT mode transition lottery in the 4th RT state have a higher winning probability in the AT mode post lottery than the AT mode pre-lottery. is set to be The difference between the probability of winning the lottery after the AT mode and the probability of winning the lottery after the AT mode is set to be larger in the 4th RT state than in the 0RT state to the 3rd RT state, and the AT in the 4th RT state The post-mode lottery is set so that the AT mode is most likely to be won.

Even in this case, the advantageous section transition lottery is won in the 0RT state to the 3rd RT state, and the AT mode winning lottery in the 4th RT state is higher than the AT mode winning rate when the AT mode transition lottery is implemented. , the AT mode winning rate is higher when the AT mode transition lottery is executed, and the AT mode transition lottery is superior in the 4th RT state without changing the winning probability of the advantageous section transition lottery depending on the RT state. sexuality is guaranteed.

FIG. 110 shows an example in which the winning probabilities of the AT mode first lottery and the AT mode later lottery in the 0RT state to the 3rd RT state are common, but the winning probability of the AT mode first lottery and the AT mode later lottery in the 4th RT state are different. is shown.

As in this example, by making sure that there is no difference in the winning probability after the AT mode transition lottery in the 0RT state to the 3rd RT state, while the AT mode lottery is performed before the transition to the advantageous section, The substantial benefit of the AT mode first lottery cannot be enjoyed in the 0RT state to the 3rd RT state, but can be enjoyed in the 4th RT state, and the rarity and superiority of the 4th RT state are guaranteed.

Also, FIG. 110 shows an example in which, in the fourth RT state, the winning probability is higher in the AT mode first lottery than in the AT mode post lottery. If you win the advantageous section transition lottery, it is assumed that you will win a rare role that is difficult to win in each game, such as a strong cherry. You will be able to receive a favorable lottery based on

FIG. 111 shows an example in which the presence or absence of winning probabilities based on set values differs between the AT mode first lottery and the AT mode post lottery.

Specifically, although there is no difference in winning probability due to setting values for the AT mode first lottery, there is a difference in winning probability due to setting values for the AT mode post-lottery. The setting difference in the fourth RT state is set to be larger than that in the fourth RT state. By doing so, not only the effect of diversifying the game by providing the setting difference in the lottery after the AT mode, but also the game that predicts the set value, the 4th RT state than the 0RT state to the 3rd RT state. The prediction can be performed more easily, and the superiority of the fourth RT state is ensured in this respect as well.

<Modification 11>
In this modified example, the process in the case of non-winning in the AT mode first lottery differs depending on the RT state. FIG. 112(a) is a flow chart showing part of the first special combination processing in this modified example. The AT mode transition lottery in the first special winning process corresponds to the AT mode post-lottery out of the AT mode pre-lottery and the AT mode post-lottery.

In step S4901, it is determined whether or not the AT non-election flag is set. The AT non-win flag is a flag that is set when the AT mode transition lottery in the advantageous zone winning process, ie, the AT mode first lottery, is not won. If the AT non-election flag is set, the process proceeds to step S4902, and it is determined whether or not the current gaming state is the 4th RT state. If it is determined in step S4902 that it is in the fourth RT state, the process advances to step S4903 to acquire an AT mode transition lottery table, and an AT mode transition lottery is executed in step S4904. Subsequent processing is as already explained.

On the other hand, if the AT non-election flag is not set in step S4901 or if it is determined that it is in the 0RT state to the 3rd RT state instead of the 4th RT state in step S4902, the first specific as it is End the role process.

That is, as shown in FIG. 112(b), in the fourth RT state, the AT mode lottery is executed in the game in which the advantageous section transition lottery is won, and even if the AT mode lottery is not won, the advantageous section A post-AT mode lottery is executed in the transition game, and substantially two chances are set for the AT mode transition lottery. On the other hand, in the 0RT state to the 3rd RT state, the AT mode first lottery is executed in the game in which the advantageous interval transition lottery is won, and if the AT mode first lottery is not won, the advantageous interval transition is performed. The execution of the lottery after the AT mode of the game is restricted, and the number of AT mode transition lotteries is one, which is less than that in the fourth RT state.

In this way, according to the number of executions of the AT mode transition lottery in the 0RT state to the 3rd RT state and the 4th RT state, the advantage of the AT mode transition lottery differs between the 0RT state to the 3rd RT state and the 4th RT state. good too. In this case, the 0RT state to the 3rd RT state and the 4th RT state may have the same probability of winning the AT mode transition lottery, or may be set to have substantially the same probability of winning. Even in this case, if the number of executions of the AT mode transition lottery differs, the total probability of winning the AT mode will differ.

<Modification 12>
In this modified example, the number of advantageous section games at the time of winning the advantageous section transition is varied depending on the RT state, thereby making the AT mode winning rate different for each RT state. FIG. 113 shows an AT mode transition lottery table in this modified example, and in this modified example, the value input to the advantageous interval end counter at the time of winning depends on the staying gaming state and the type of specific hand. is set. As already explained, the advantageous section end counter is used in the AT non-winning first process (Fig. 87) which is executed when the lottery after the AT mode of the first special hand process is not won, and the advantageous section winning process. The corresponding value is input in the AT non-win second process (Fig. 88) that is executed when the AT mode first lottery is not won, and the AT non-win third process of the section display second process ( In FIG. 89), the advantageous interval end counter is decremented, and when it becomes 0, the advantageous interval end processing is performed. Here, when the AT mode first lottery is not won will be described.

That is, when the game state is in the 0RT state to the 3rd RT state, if the advantageous section transition lottery is won and the AT mode first lottery is not won, regardless of the game result of the game, the advantageous section 1 is input to each end counter. In other words, as in the first embodiment, although the transition to the advantageous interval is made in the game following the game in which the advantageous interval transition lottery is won, the advantageous interval ends in the advantageous interval transition game. is one game. Then, the AT mode shift lottery (lottery after the AT mode) during the advantageous section is substantially performed once.

On the other hand, if the advantageous zone transition lottery is won while the game state is the 4th RT state, but the AT mode first lottery is not won, the advantageous zone end counter will be counted depending on the game result of the game. The values entered are different. Specifically, when the game result when winning the transition to the advantageous section is a strong cherry and the AT mode first lottery is not won, 5 is input to the advantageous section end counter, and the game result when winning the transition to the advantageous section is weak. When the cherry is not won in the AT mode first lottery, 2 is input to the advantageous section end counter.

Here, in the AT non-winning first process when the lottery is not won after the AT mode, in the process of inputting 0 to the advantageous interval end counter in step S3702, a value other than 0 is already in the advantageous interval end counter. If it has been input, the input value is maintained without performing the process of inputting 0 to the advantageous section end counter. In other words, in the configuration in which a value other than 1 is input to the advantageous interval end counter as described above, even if the lottery after the AT mode of the next game is not won, the advantageous interval is not won. The end counter is not set to 0, and the advantageous section end counter input in the AT mode first lottery is given priority.

In the above example, if the game next to the game in which the current advantageous interval transition lottery was won is shifted to the advantageous interval, and the above-mentioned strong cherry is used as a trigger to shift to the advantageous interval, the advantageous interval is five games. On the other hand, if the transition to the advantageous section is triggered by a weak cherry, the advantageous section ends after two games. Then, the AT mode transition lottery (lottery after AT mode) in the advantageous section is performed 5 times in the case of strong cherries, but 2 times in the case of weak cherries. If the AT mode first lottery is not won, the possibility of winning the AT mode transition lottery is higher than when the AT mode first lottery is not won with weak cherry.

Then, when compared with the situation where the gaming state is the 0RT state to the 3rd RT state, winning the advantageous section transition lottery in the 4th RT state is more successful than the case where the advantageous section transition lottery is won in the 0RT state to the 3rd RT state. In this case, even if the advantageous section transition lottery is won with the same game result as a trigger, the number of games in the advantageous section tends to be longer, and the number of executions of the AT mode transition lottery during the advantageous section increases. easy. Even in this way, it is possible to ensure the superiority of the fourth RT state by setting the winning probability of the AT mode transition lottery in each game state to be superior or inferior while making the winning probability of the advantageous zone transition lottery in each game state common. It is possible.

<Modification 13>
The configuration that causes the transition to the advantageous section in the game subsequent to the advantageous section winning game may be changed. In this modified example, a configuration for shifting to an advantageous section in an advantageous section winning game will be described.

FIG. 114 is a flow chart showing the advantageous section shift lottery process in this modified example. As already explained, the advantageous section transition lottery process is the lottery process (FIG. 16) that is executed at the start of one game. This is the processing that is performed when the segment is an interval.

In the advantageous section transition lottery process, a change in this modification is generally that the advantageous section winning game flag is not set. That is, in step S5001, the lottery result of the current game is grasped, in step S5002, an advantageous zone transition lottery table is obtained, and in step S5003, an advantageous zone transition lottery is executed. If the transition lottery is won (step S5004: YES), after the advantageous section flag is set in step S5005, the advantageous section transition lottery is won in step S5006 without setting the advantageous section winning game flag as described above. After the time processing is executed, the advantageous section transition lottery processing is terminated. In the advantageous section winning process, the AT mode transition lottery is executed as described above.

FIG. 115 is a flowchart showing the first section display process in this modified example. As already explained, the first section display process is a process that is performed after the lottery result handling process in the lottery process (FIG. 16) that is performed at the start of one game.

In the section display first process, the change in this modified example is that, in general, when the advantageous section flag is set in correspondence with not setting the advantageous section winning game flag as described above, the set The point is that the game is shifted to the advantageous interval as the starting game of the advantageous interval.

Specifically, if it is determined in step S5101 that the section indicator is not being displayed, it is determined in step S5102 whether or not the advantageous section flag is set. If it is set, the process advances to step S5103 to determine whether or not the number of games AG in the advantageous interval is being measured, thereby determining whether or not it is already in the advantageous interval. If the advantageous interval flag is set in step S5102 and it is determined in step S5103 that the number of games in the advantageous interval AG is not being measured, the advantageous interval flag is set in the lottery result corresponding processing of the current game. means that In this case, in step S5104, processing for starting measurement of the number of games in the advantageous interval AG is executed. As a result, a transition to an advantageous section occurs with the current game as the starting game.

When it is determined in step S5103 that the number of games AG in the advantageous section is being measured, or after the processing in step S5104 is executed, it is determined in step S5105 whether or not the AT notification flag is set. If it has been set, processing for starting the display of the section indicator is performed in step S5106. If it is determined in step S5101 that the section indicator is being displayed, display continuation processing is executed in step S5107. The processing for role ratio monitoring in steps S5108 to S5111 has already been described.

The second process when AT is not won in this modification will be described with reference to FIG. 116(a). As described above, the AT non-win second process is a process that is executed when the AT mode transition lottery of the advantageous zone winning process performed in the game in which the advantageous zone transition lottery is won is not won. .

In step S5201, a process of setting an AT non-winning flag is executed. Then, in step S5202, 0 is input to the advantageous interval end counter, and then the second processing at the time of AT non-winning is ended. In the above-described first embodiment, in the second process when the AT is not won, 1 is input to the advantageous section end counter. subtraction processing is performed, and processing for ending the advantageous section is performed in the next game. On the other hand, in this modification, since 0 is input to the advantageous interval end counter as described above, the advantageous interval ending process is carried out in the third process when the AT is not won in the current game. It will happen.

That is, as shown in FIG. 116(b), for example, when winning the advantageous zone transition lottery triggered by winning a weak watermelon, the advantageous zone starts from the game, and in the advantageous zone winning process in the game An AT mode transition lottery is carried out. If the AT mode shift lottery is not won, the advantageous section ends in the game, and the next game is a normal section unless the advantageous section shift lottery is won.

As described above, the number of games in the advantageous section, in which the AT mode is not won and the AT mode is not in progress, is kept to a minimum, while overlapping implementation of the AT mode transition lottery is restricted. Therefore, it is also possible to increase the winning probability of each AT mode transition lottery without increasing the AT mode transition rate too much. In addition, it is possible to prevent the AT mode shift lottery from being performed multiple times, thereby avoiding dispersion of the degree of attention.

<Second embodiment>
In this embodiment, a configuration for realizing the fourth RT state as an AT mode high probability state by an infinite RT state in which the number of games can be changed will be described. FIG. 117 is a diagram for explaining an overview of game state transitions in this embodiment.

As in the first embodiment, the state is shifted to the fourth RT state when the 11th regame winning prize or the 12th regame winning prize is established. In the 4th RT state in this embodiment, it is configured to be able to win the first promotion replays 1 to 4 with an index value IV = 2 to 5, win the first promotion replays 1 to 4, and win the third replay. is established, regardless of the number of games executed in the fourth RT state, the gaming state shifts to the second RT state. However, when the transition result when the pressing order bell is missed stops, the transition from the fourth RT state to the first RT state does not occur unlike the other RT states.

In this embodiment, the fourth RT state will be described as a high RT state with a high replay probability.

FIG. 118 is a flowchart showing RT state processing in this embodiment.

That is, in the present embodiment, processing corresponding to steps S501 to S504 is not set, and first, in step S5301, it is determined whether or not the transition roll has stopped. When the transition roll has stopped, it is determined whether or not the fourth RT setting flag is set in step S5302, thereby determining whether or not the state is in the fourth RT state. If it is in the fourth RT state, the RT state processing is terminated as it is. That is, even if the number of transition rolls stops in the fourth RT state, the transition to the first RT state does not occur.

If it is not in the fourth RT state in step S5302, it is determined whether or not it is in the normal game state in step S5303, and if it is not in the normal game state, the RT setting flag is cleared in step S5306, then normal If it is in the gaming state, the process proceeds directly to step S5304, sets the first RT state, and then terminates the RT state processing. If the transition result has not stopped, it is determined at step S5305 whether or not the second replay winning has been established, and if it has been established, the RT setting flag is cleared at step S5306. , in step S5304, the first RT state is set, and then the RT state processing ends. If the second re-game winning has not been established, it is determined in step S5307 whether or not the third re-game winning has been established. If an affirmative determination is made in step S5307, processing for clearing the RT setting flag is executed in step S5308, processing for setting the second RT state is executed in step S5309, and then the RT state processing ends. As described above, in the present embodiment, the third replay win can be established in the fourth RT state, and when the third replay win is established, the transition to the second RT state occurs in the same manner as other RT states. will occur. The processing of steps S5310 to S5315 when it is determined that the third replay winning has not been established in step S5307 includes fixed RT game number setting processing (step S519) in the case of setting the fourth RT state. The processing is the same as that of the first embodiment except that there is no such processing.

That is, the fourth RT state in this embodiment continues until the third replay win is established, and the number of continued games depends on the winning probability of the first promotion replays 1-4.

Then, as described above, when the transition condition to the 4th RT state is satisfied during the AT mode, the notification flag for transition is set, and the 11th re-game winning or the 12th re-game winning can be established when the transition replay wins. Notification of the pressing order that becomes possible occurs. When the player performs an operation according to the notification of the pressing order and a transition to the fourth RT state occurs, the AT mode including the advantageous section ends. In other words, by shifting to the 4th RT state, it becomes an AT mode high probability state, but due to the end of the advantageous section, the push order notification when winning the first promotion replay 1 to 4 will not occur, and these first promotion replay winning When the third replay win is established, the AT mode high probability state can end as described above.

Incidentally, the second RT state is an RT state with a high replay probability as described above. And since the AT mode has ended as described above, when the push order bell is won in the 2nd RT state, the transition number stops, and when the fall replays 1 to 3 are won, the second replay win is established. As a result, the second RT state transitions to the first RT state.

FIG. 119 shows part of the lottery table for the fourth RT state in this embodiment. As already explained, the state is shifted to the 4th RT state by the 11th re-game winning and the 12th re-game winning. In this embodiment, the lottery table is shared between the fourth RT state to which the 11th re-game winning is established and the fourth RT state to which the 12th re-game winning is established. On the other hand, in the lottery table for the fourth RT state, the winning probabilities of the first promotion replays 1 to 4 are set differently depending on the set values.

Specifically, for example, in the case of setting 1, the probability of winning one of the first promotion replays 1 to 4 is about 1/1.56, setting 2 is about 1.64/1, setting 3 1/1.72 at setting 4, 1/1.82 at setting 4, 1/1.93 at setting 5, 1/2.05 at setting 6, and so on. The winning probability of the first promotion replays 1 to 4 is set to be low. As already explained, the first promoted replays 1 to 4 are set so that the winning replays are different depending on the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44, and the third replay winning that causes the transition to the second RT state and the third replay winning is associated with one operation order out of six operation orders (FIG. 23(a)). That is, in the lottery table for the fourth RT state set as described above, the probability of establishing the third replay winning prize is about 1/9.4 and about 9.8 for setting 1 to setting 6, respectively. 1/10.3, 1/10.9, 1/11.6, 1/12.3. ing.

As described above, when the fourth RT state ends, it means that the third replay win is established. Therefore, the number of continuous games in the fourth RT state is set to increase as the set value increases. It can be said that The fourth RT state is an AT high probability state, which is advantageous for the player. Therefore, the higher the set value, the easier it is for the player to enjoy the benefits of the fourth RT state, and the higher the set value, the more advantageous for the player. configuration.

On the other hand, when the first promoted replays 1 to 4 are won and the operation order at the time of winning corresponds to the third replay win, the third replay win is established. Whether or not 3 replay wins are established depends largely on the element of luck. Therefore, even if the set value is high and it is difficult to win the first promoted replays 1 to 4, the third replay winning prize may be established early and the fourth RT state may end, or the set value is low and the fourth RT state may end. Even if it is easy to win 1 promotion replays 1 to 4, there are cases where the 4th RT state continues for a long time because the 3rd replay winning prize is not established. In other words, for example, even with setting 6, which has the highest setting value, the fourth RT state may be shorter than the average number of staying games in setting 1, and even with setting 1, which has the lowest setting value, However, the fourth RT state may be longer than the average number of staying games in setting 6. In this way, by making the element of luck involved in the continuity of the fourth RT state as the AT mode high-probability state, it is interesting to use the player's psychology such as wanting to continue the fourth RT state for a long time. Playability is realized.

Further, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 119, while the winning probabilities of the first promotion replays 1 to 4 are varied depending on the setting value, by adjusting the winning probability of the normal replay with the index value IV=1, the total The replay probability of is set so that there is no difference due to the setting value. Specifically, as described above, the higher the set value, the lower the probability of winning the first promotion replays 1 to 4, while the higher the set value, the harder it is to win the normal replay The winning probability is set in . By doing this, it is possible to set a difference in terms of the probability of switching to AT mode, while not causing a difference due to the set value in terms of the increase or decrease of medals in the 4th RT state. becomes. Moreover, by doing so, there is also the advantage that it is possible to avoid the set value being easily determined from the total replay probability.

Here, the fourth RT state in the present embodiment has a total replay probability of about 1/1.53, which is a high RT state with a high replay probability. Specifically, the replay probability is the same or substantially the same as the second RT state and the third RT state, which have high replay probability. Therefore, as described above, although the AT mode and the advantageous section are terminated by shifting to the fourth RT state, the state with high replay probability is maintained in the present embodiment. Then, in this way, in the 4th RT state as the AT mode high probability state, if the advantageous section and the AT mode transition lottery are won, the transition to the 2nd RT state is performed when the 1st promotion replays 1 to 4 are won. The pressing order notification for the 3rd re-game winning to be caused is generated, and the AT mode is started.

That is, by using the fourth RT state in this embodiment, it is possible to return to the AT mode without going through a state with a low replay probability. Therefore, it is possible to play a so-called renso zone such as an AT mode high-probability state while suppressing the reduction of medals.

<Modification 1>
In this modification, different lottery tables are used for the case where the 11th re-game win is established and the state shifts to the 4th RT state, and the case where the 12th re-game win results in the shift to the 4th RT state. FIG. 120 shows the lottery table for the fourth RT state in this modified example, FIG. 120(a) is the lottery table for the fourth RT state that shifts when the 11th regame win is established, and FIG. 120(b). ) is a lottery table for the 4th RT state that is shifted when the 12th regame win is established.

The lottery table of FIG. 120(a) is the same as the lottery table of FIG. 119 shown in the second embodiment. On the other hand, the lottery table in FIG. 120(b) is designed so that the probability of winning the first promotion replays 1 to 4 is lower than that in FIG. 120(a) even if the set values are the same. is set. For example, in the case of setting 1, in the 4th RT state (4th RT state A) shifted by the 11th replay winning, the probability of winning the 1st promotion replay 1 to 4 is about 1/1.56, In the 4th RT state (4th RT state B) that shifted due to the 12th regame winning, the probability of winning the 1st promotion replay 1 to 4 is about 1/1.82, and the 4th RT state B is higher than the 4th RT state A. is set so that the average number of staying games is longer.

Moreover, in this modification, the winning probabilities of the first promoted replays 1 to 4 are set to be common probabilities with different set values for the fourth RT state A and the fourth RT state B. there is Specifically, the winning probability of setting 4 in the fourth RT state A and the winning probability of setting 1 in the fourth RT state B are the same probability, and the winning probability of setting 5 in the fourth RT state A and the setting in the fourth RT state B The winning probability of setting 2 is the same probability, and the winning probability of setting 6 in the fourth RT state A and the winning probability of setting 3 in the fourth RT state B are the same probability. By doing so, for example, in a situation where the appearance rate (winning probability) of the first promotion replays 1 to 4 is about 1/3.3, even if it is actually in the fourth RT state B, the player is the fourth RT state A, setting 5 is predicted, and prediction different from the actual set value (setting 3) is performed. Therefore, by complicating the game of predicting the set value, the interest of the game is increased, and the type of the current 4th RT state, that is, the replay win of either the 11th replay or the 12th replay, the 4th RT It is possible to attract a great deal of attention to whether the player has transitioned to the state, and it is possible to preferably increase the degree of attention to the game in which the notification of the pushing order at the time of winning the transition replay is generated.

<Modification 2>
In this modified example, the condition for ending the fourth RT state includes not only the third replay winning when the first promotion replays 1 to 4 are won, but also the second replay winning when the falling replays 1 to 3 are won. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 121, in the fourth RT state in this modified example, in addition to the case where the fourth RT state ends by shifting to the second RT state due to the winning of the third replay, the second replay The fourth RT state may end by shifting to the first RT state due to a game win.

FIG. 122(a) shows part of the lottery table for the fourth RT state in this modified example.

In this modification, in addition to the normal replay with index value IV = 1 and the first promotion replays 1 to 4 with index value IV = 2 to 5, fall replays 1 to 3 with index value IV = 6 to 9 are also won. The point value PV is set so as to obtain In this modified example, a configuration in which there is no setting difference in the winning probability of each replay will be described.

In this modification, the winning probability of the first promotion replays 1 to 4 is set to about 1/81.9. Since the operation order matches the order corresponding to the replay, the probability that the third replay win is established, that is, the probability that the fourth RT state ends by shifting to the second RT state is about 491.5. becomes 1/1. On the other hand, the probability of winning replays 1 to 3 is set to about 1/8.1, and the operation is performed in the order corresponding to the second replay at 2/3 of the winning replays 1 to 3. Since the orders match, the probability of establishing the second replay winning prize, that is, the probability of ending the fourth RT state by shifting to the first RT state is about 1/12.1.

Then, in this modification, the case where the third re-game win is established and the fourth RT state ends, and the case where the second re-game win is established and the fourth RT state ends are the second re-game wins. are by far the most common, and these add up to about 11.8 times more different exiting the 4th RT state. That is, the average number of staying games in the fourth RT state in this modification is about 11.8 games.

The fourth RT state of this modification has a total replay probability of about 1/7.30, and is a low RT state with a low replay probability. Specifically, the replay probability is lower than the second RT state and the third RT state, which have high replay probability. Therefore, as described above, the configuration is the same as that of the first embodiment in that the AT mode and the advantageous section are terminated by shifting to the fourth RT state, and the state shifts to a state with a low replay probability.

Here, as described above, the probability that the third replay win is established when the first promotion replays 1 to 4 are won is set to 1/6, but the fourth RT state as in the second embodiment If the number of continuous games and the probability of fulfillment of the end condition of are dependent on the first promotion replays 1-4, the number of continuous games and the end probability are 1/6 of the winning probability of the first promotion replays 1-4. In other words, when the winning probability of the first promoted replays 1 to 4, in which the third replay win is established with a probability of 1/6, is set as the probability of ending the fourth RT state, the winning probability of the first promoted replays 1 to 4 is set. should be set to 6 times the termination probability. Then, the winning probability of the first promotion replays 1 to 4 must be set high inevitably, and the total replay probability of the fourth RT state tends to be high.

That is, in the second embodiment, the advantage of functioning the fourth RT state as a high RT state with a high replay probability was shown, but as described above, the end probability is defined only by the first promotion replays 1 to 4 In that case, it may be difficult to set the fourth RT state to a low RT state with a low replay probability as in the first embodiment. On the other hand, if the operation order corresponding to the third replay of the first promoted replays 1 to 4 is more than one of the six, the first RT state will accidentally shift to the second RT state. The number of cases increases, which is also undesirable. In other words, in the first promotion replays 1 to 3, RT state transition is caused in situations where push order notification can occur, and RT state transition is avoided as much as possible in situations where push order notification does not occur. For this reason, the order of operations associated with the replay (third replay) for RT state transition is set to be as small as possible.

On the other hand, in fall replays 1 to 3, the transition to the RT state is not caused in situations where the pushing order notification can occur, and the transition to the RT state is likely to occur as much as possible in the situation where the pushing order notification does not occur. In order to achieve this, the order of operations associated with the replay (second replay) for RT state transition is set to be as large as possible. In this modified example, the fall replays 1 to 3 are used as a trigger for ending the fourth RT state. By doing this, it is not necessary to increase the probability of winning the falling replays 1 to 3 that contribute to the end probability, and the total of the 4th RT state can be achieved without adding a new replay for RT state transition. It is possible to keep the replay probability low.

Moreover, in this modification, by setting two routes of the second regame winning prize and the third regame winning prize for the end condition of the fourth RT state, when the AT mode wins during the fourth RT state, and when the AT mode wins It is also possible to terminate the fourth RT state via different routes depending on whether or not it has been done. In other words, by establishing the second re-game winning prize, the state shifts to the first RT state. Therefore, when the AT mode transition lottery is not won, the second re-game winning prize is established and the fourth RT state is terminated. This configuration enables a quicker transition to the normal state (first RT state). On the other hand, when the third re-game win is established, the state shifts to the second RT state, so if the AT mode shift lottery is won, the third re-game win is established and the fourth RT state is terminated. This configuration enables the AT mode to be started without going through the first RT state.

However, in this modification, since the winning probability of the first promotion replays 1 to 4 is set low, even if the AT mode transition lottery is won, the first promotion replays 1 to 4 are won. , the number of games required to start the AT mode may be relatively large. In other words, the probability of winning the first promotion replays 1 to 4 is about 1/81.9 as described above, and when winning the AT mode, when establishing the third replay winning prize and moving to the second RT state (Fig. 122 2nd route in (b)), about 81.9 games are required from winning the AT mode to starting the AT mode. On the other hand, the probability of winning the fall replays 1 to 3 is about 1/8.1 as described above. When the first promotion replay 1 to 4 is elected in the state and the state is shifted to the 2nd RT state (the first route in FIG. 122 (a)), after winning the AT mode in the 4th RT state before the AT mode starts , About 8.1 games in the 4th RT state and about 8.1 games in the 1st RT state (see winning probability of 1st promotion replay 1 to 4 in the 1st RT state), about 16.2 games are required. As a result, transition to the second RT state can occur more quickly in the first route than in the second route.

In the push-up process in the present modification, as shown in FIG. 123, when falling replays 1 to 3 are won in step S5405, it is determined whether or not the AT notification flag is set in step S5406. , is set, it is determined in step S5424 whether or not the state is in the fourth RT state. As already explained, by shifting to the fourth RT state, AT mode (advantageous section) termination processing is performed, and the AT notification flag is also cleared. That is, the case where it is determined in step S5424 that it is in the fourth RT state is when the AT mode transition lottery is won again during the fourth RT state, and the AT mode winning notification is performed, and the AT mode is changed. It can be said that it is in a state of waiting for the start. If it is in the fourth RT state at step S5424, at step S5425, the instruction monitor 68 is controlled so as to notify the pressing order corresponding to the second replay that causes the transition to the first RT state. Then, in step S5426, a process of setting a push order command including push order information corresponding to the second re-game winning as an object to be output to the display control device 81 is performed, and then the main push order process is terminated. The display control device 81 that has received the pressing order command controls the auxiliary display section 65, the speaker 64, etc. so as to perform a pressing order notification effect corresponding to the pressing order of the second replay.

If it is determined in step S5424 that the state is not the fourth RT state, the process advances to step S5407 to perform processing for notifying the pressing order of the first replay. The processing of steps S5401 to S5423 is the same as the processing of steps S1501 to S1523, except for the portions described above. That is, when the AT notification flag is set in the 4RT state, if the first promotion replay 1 to 4 is won, the affirmative determination is made in steps S5401 and S5402, and the third replay in step S5403 Performs processing for notifying the pushing order of the game.

By doing so, when the AT mode transition lottery is won in the fourth RT state, the first route to shift to the second RT state via the first RT state and the second route to shift directly to the second RT state are selected. In addition, it is possible to appropriately select a route that causes a rapid transition to the second RT state according to the lottery result of each game.

<Modification 3>
In this modification, as in modification 2 above, after setting the second replay winning and the third replay winning as conditions for ending the fourth RT state, the first promotion replays 1 to 4 and the falling replays 1 to A configuration in which a set difference is provided for the winning probability of 3 will be described. FIG. 124 shows part of the lottery table for the fourth RT state in this modified example.

The winning probability of the first promotion replays 1 to 4 in this modification is about 1/81.9 for settings 1, 3, and 5, while it is about 1/819 for settings 2, 4, and 6. , odd number setting is set so that it is overwhelmingly easier to win than even number setting. On the other hand, the winning probability of fall replays 1 to 3 is about 1/8.1 for settings 1 and 2, about 1/12.1 for settings 3 and 4, and about 24.3 for settings 5 and 6. It is 1/1, and it is set so that the higher the setting, the harder it is to win. The probability of ending the 4th RT state triggered by the second replay win or the third replay win is about 1/11.8 in setting 1 and about 1/36.1 in setting 6. Each set value is different so that the higher the set value, the longer the average number of staying games.

That is, in this modified example, the average number of staying games in the fourth RT state differs depending on the setting value, and the enjoyment of predicting the setting value from the average number of staying games is added. Moreover, it is possible to determine whether the set value is even or odd from the winning probability of the first promotion replays 1 to 4, and it is possible to determine whether the set value is high or low from the winning probability of the fall replays 1 to 3. , setting values can be narrowed down. By doing so, it is possible to perform not only the game of simply winning the AT mode transition lottery in the 4th RT state, but also the game of predicting the set value, thereby increasing the interest of the game.

In addition, as described above, the first promotion replays 1 to 4 and the fall replays 1 to 3 are the triggers for ending the 4th RT state as an AT mode high probability state when the AT mode is not won. On the other hand, when the AT mode is won, it can be a trigger for shifting to the AT mode. Therefore, regardless of whether the AT mode transition lottery is successful or not, it is possible to play a game in which the set value is predicted using the fourth RT state, and an opportunity to play the game can be preferably provided. On the other hand, when the first promotion replays 1 to 4 and the fall replays 1 to 3 are won, the pushing order notification is generated when the AT mode is won, and the pushing order notification is not generated when the AT mode is not won. Therefore, in calculating the winning probability from these replay winning times and the number of trial games and predicting the set value, there is a possibility that information on winning the replay can be obtained multiple times when the AT mode is not won. Although there is, if you win the AT mode, you can basically get it only once after that. Therefore, when the AT mode is not won, more information is likely to be obtained in the game of predicting the set value, and the fact that the AT mode is not won is compensated.

<Modification 4>
FIG. 125 shows part of the lottery table for the fourth RT state in this modified example.

The first promotion replays 1 to 4 in this modification are about 1/81.9 in settings 2, 4, and 6, and the winning probability is common, whereas in settings 1, 3, and 5, It is set such that the higher the set value, the easier it is to win, such as about 1/10.2, about 1/9.6, about 1/8.2. On the other hand, fall replays 1 to 3 are about 1/26.3, about 1/16.8, about 1/43.7, about 1/21.8, about Different winning probabilities are set according to set values, such as 1/72.8 and about 1/24.3. With such a winning probability, the probability of ending the 4th RT state triggered by the 2nd re-game winning or the 3rd re-game winning is the same (almost the same) between setting 1 and setting 2, about 1/24.0. It is calculated to be the same (almost the same) about 1/30.7 for setting 3 and setting 4, and the same (almost the same) about 1/33.9 for setting 5 and setting 6. be.

In other words, from the viewpoint of the average number of staying games in the 4th RT state, that is, the ease of receiving the benefits of the AT mode high probability state, setting 1 and setting 2, setting 3 and setting 4, setting 5 and setting 6 are common Although there is little or no difference between settings 1 and 2, between settings 3 and 4, and between settings 5 and 6, from the perspective of the distribution (proportion) of routes at which the 4th RT state ends, settings 1 and 2 differ. ing. Specifically, setting 1 is higher than setting 2, setting 3 is higher than setting 4, setting 5 is higher than setting 6, and the ratio of ending via the second RT state is higher. there is In the 2nd RT state, if the 11th regame win or the like can be established fortunately, it is possible to shift to the AT mode high probability state again. The possibility of being able to re-challenge the AT mode high probability state also increases. On the other hand, if the ratio through the 2nd RT state is increased, the probability of winning the first promotion replays 1 to 4 increases, so depending on the operation order when winning the first promotion replays 1 to 4, the average number of staying games It is also more likely that the fourth RT state will end without digestion.

Therefore, in setting values that have the same average number of games played, such as setting 1 and setting 2, setting 1 is more likely to be able to re-challenge the AT mode high probability state. It is characterized that the possibility of early termination is high, and setting 2 is more likely to be able to complete the average number of staying games in the 4th RT state. In this way, it is possible to greatly vary the playability of the AT mode simply by varying the replay probability of the fourth RT state according to the set value.

<Third Embodiment>
In the above-described first and second embodiments, when the advantageous section transition lottery is won, the AT mode transition lottery (AT mode first lottery) is further executed in the game. When the lottery is won, the game result that triggered the lottery is stored until after the transition to the advantageous section, and the AT mode shift lottery is performed based on the stored game result. FIG. 126(a) is a flow chart showing the advantageous section transition winning process in this embodiment. As already explained, the advantageous section transition winning process is a process that is executed when the advantageous section transition lottery process in a normal section in which the advantageous section flag is not set is won in the lottery result handling process.

In step S5501, a process of grasping the game result of the current game is executed. Then, in step S5502, a process of storing the comprehended game result in the transition winning time information temporary storage area 106f (see FIG. 126(b)) provided in the RAM 106 is executed. In the transition winning information temporary storage area 106f, for example, a plurality of types of areas are set according to the type of transition trigger role. After executing the process of storing the winning information (for example, a flag) in the area corresponding to the transition opportunity combination that triggered , this advantageous section transition winning process is terminated. By doing so, the CPU 102 can specify which transition trigger role won the advantageous section transition lottery.

It should be noted that regardless of the configuration of the transition winning information temporary storage area 106f, it is sufficient that the CPU 102 can specify the game result of the game in which the advantageous section transition lottery was won after the fact (in subsequent games). . For example, number information (for example, 15 for strong cherry, 16 for weak cherry, index value IV may be used) associated with the transition trigger may be stored. In addition, the random number used in the lottery processing (FIG. 16) of the current game (the value latched by the hardware circuit from the free run counter based on the operation of the start lever 41), the lottery table used in the game (game state and set value information). Even in this case, the CPU 102 can specify the game result that triggered the advantageous zone transition lottery by performing the lottery process of steps S303 to S310 after the fact.

FIG. 127 is a flow chart showing the first special combination process in this embodiment. As already explained, the first special combination process is a process that is executed when the advantageous section flag is set in the lottery result handling process and the AT mode transition lottery is not won. This is a process for performing a mode transition lottery.

In the present embodiment, first, in step S5613, it is determined whether or not information relating to the game result is stored in the above-described transition winning information temporary storage area 106f. If not stored, the game result of the current game is grasped in step S5614, and if stored, in step S5615 the game result stored in the information temporary storage area 106f at the time of transfer winning is displayed. Information, that is, a process of grasping the game result in the game in which the advantageous section transition lottery was won is executed. After the processing of step S5615, erasure processing of the temporary storage area is executed in step S5616.

After executing the process of step S5614 or step S5616, the AT mode transition lottery process of steps S5601 to S5611 and the process according to the result of the transition lottery are executed. The processing of steps S5601 to S5611 is the same as the processing of steps S901 to S911.

That is, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 128, when winning the advantage zone transition lottery in the normal zone, the game result in the game (in the figure, weak watermelon winning information) is stored. Then, when the advantageous interval starts from the next game, in the advantageous interval transition game, an AT mode transition lottery based on the above-mentioned stored game result is performed. The processing when the AT mode transition lottery is won and when it is not won is the same as in each of the above-described embodiments. , the advantageous section ends in the game, and the next game becomes the normal section.

By doing so, while ensuring the premise that the AT mode transition lottery is permitted in the advantageous section and the AT mode transition lottery is restricted in the normal section, the advantageous section transition lottery and the AT mode transition are secured. To eliminate the difficulty that it is necessary to draw a game result for AT mode transition lottery again in spite of the fact that a game result worthy of winning the lottery for transition to an advantageous section is drawn in a two-stage lottery such as a lottery. becomes possible. In other words, it is possible to restrict the AT mode transition lottery from being performed before the transition to the advantageous interval while performing the AT mode transition lottery using the game result for the advantageous interval transition lottery.

In addition, as described above, the game result is stored in the information temporary storage area 106f at the time of transition winning, so that the degree of freedom of the game in which the AT mode transition lottery is performed is greatly enhanced. That is, in the above configuration, the AT mode transition lottery is executed in the advantageous interval transition game. It may be configured to execute the AT mode transition lottery. By doing so, it is possible to eliminate an increase in the processing load caused by performing the advantageous section transition and the AT mode transition lottery in the same game. However, in the configuration in which the advantageous section ends when the AT mode transition lottery is not won, as described above, the AT mode transition lottery is performed in the advantageous section transition game, so that the AT mode transition lottery is more advantageous. It is possible to reduce the ratio of games that are in the AT mode but not in the AT mode.

<Modification 1>
In the above-described third embodiment, when the information of the game result is stored in the information temporary storage area 106f at the time of transition winning, the AT mode transition lottery is executed based on the information, and when the information is not stored, the AT mode transition lottery is executed. Although the configuration is such that the AT mode transition lottery is executed based on the game result of the game, in this modification, the AT mode transition lottery is executed in consideration of the information of both game results.

FIG. 129 is a flow chart showing the first special combination process in this modified example.

In step S5713, it is determined whether or not the game result information is stored in the information temporary storage area 106f at the time of transfer winning. If it is not stored, in step S5714, a process of ascertaining the game result of the current game is executed. On the other hand, if it is stored, in step S5715, the information of the game result stored in the information temporary storage area 106f at the time of transfer winning is grasped, and in step S5716, after executing the deletion processing of the area 106f. , in step S5714, a process of ascertaining the game result of the current game is executed. That is, when the information on the game result is stored in the information temporary storage area 106f at the time of transfer winning, the information on the game result of this time is grasped together with the information.

After executing the processing of step S5714, the processing for the AT mode shift lottery of steps S5701 to S5711 and the like are executed. These processes are also the same as steps S901 to S911, and in this modification, the transfer lottery table obtained in step S5701 is different from the above.

FIG. 130 shows part of the AT mode transition lottery table in this modification.

In this modification, the probability of winning the AT mode transition lottery is different depending on the combination of the information on the game result stored in the transition win information temporary storage area 106f and the information on the game result of the current game. is set to

Specifically, for example, when normal replay information is stored in the transition winning time information temporary storage area 106f and the game result of the current game is a strong cherry, that is, when an advantageous section transition winning When the result of the game is normal replay, and if a strong cherry is won in the advantageous section transition game, the AT mode transition lottery is won with a probability of 90%. On the other hand, when the information of strong cherry is stored in the transition winning time information temporary storage area 106f and the game result of the current game is strong cherry, that is, the game result at the time of advantageous section transition winning is strong. In the case of a cherry, if a strong cherry is won in the advantageous section transition game, the AT mode transition lottery is won with a probability of 100%.

In addition, for example, when the information of strong watermelon is stored in the transition win information temporary storage area 106f and the game result of the current game is normal replay, there is a 1% probability of the AT mode transition lottery. be elected. On the other hand, when the information of strong watermelon is stored in the information temporary storage area 106f at transition winning, and the game result of the current game is strong watermelon, the AT mode transition lottery is won with 100% probability. .

In other words, even if the game results of the AT mode transition lottery are the same as the advantageous interval transition game, the winning probability of the AT mode transition lottery is set to differ depending on the game result of the game in which the advantageous interval transition lottery is won. It is In addition, even if the results of the games in which the advantageous zone transition lottery is won are the same, the probability of winning the AT mode transition lottery is set to differ depending on the game result of the game in which the AT mode transition lottery is performed as the advantageous zone transition game. It is In this way, by setting the AT mode transition lottery in consideration of both the information of the game in which the advantageous interval transition lottery is won and the information of the game in which the AT mode transition lottery is performed, for example, the so-called It is possible to eliminate the absurdity of not being able to receive an advantageous AT mode transition lottery because the player did not win the rare role at the time of the AT mode transition lottery even though he won the rare role.

On top of that, for example, when normal replay information is stored in the transfer winning information temporary storage area 106f, and the game result of the current game is normal replay, the AT mode transfer lottery has a probability of 1%. In the case where the player wins the lottery and the information of strong cherries is stored in the transition winning information temporary storage area 106f, and the game result of the current game is normal replay, the probability of winning the AT mode transition lottery is 1%. However, the winning probability of the AT mode transition lottery is the same. On the other hand, to the SAT mode with the additional special zone, if the normal replay information is stored in the information temporary storage area 106f at the time of transfer winning, the winning special zone is won with a probability of 0.1%, and the transfer is made. If the winning information temporary storage area 106f stores strong cherry information, the player wins the special zone with a probability of 90%.

In other words, when the game results of the game in which the AT mode transition lottery is performed as the advantageous interval transition game have the same result, the winning probability of the AT mode transition lottery is the same regardless of the game result of the game in which the advantageous interval transition lottery is won. However, the information on the game result of the game won in the advantageous zone transition lottery is configured to contribute to the winning probability of the additional special zone when the AT mode transition lottery is won. By doing so, it is possible to reflect the game result of the game winning the advantageous section transition lottery in the AT mode transition lottery without excessively increasing the winning probability of the AT mode transition lottery.

<Modification 2>
In this modified example, when the information of the game result is stored in the information temporary storage area 106f at the time of transition winning, the AT mode transition lottery is performed based on the information of the game result. However, if the AT mode transition lottery based on the information in the transition winning information temporary storage area 106f is not won, the AT mode transition lottery is performed based on the game result of the current game. different.

That is, in the first specific combination process in this modified example, as shown in FIG. 131, in step S5813, it is determined whether or not the game result information is stored in the shift winning information temporary storage area 106f. If not stored, the game result of the current game is ascertained in step S5814, and then processing for AT mode transition lottery in steps S5801 to S5811 is performed. The processing of these steps S5801 to S5811 is also the same as the processing of steps S901 to S911.

If it is determined in step S5813 that the game result information is stored, the process proceeds to step S5815. In step S5815, the process of grasping the information of the game result stored in the information temporary storage area 106f at transition winning is performed, and in step S5816, the erasing process of the temporary storage area 106f is performed. Then, in step S5817, a process of acquiring an AT mode transition lottery table is executed, and in step S5818, an AT mode transition lottery is executed. The processing of these steps S5817 and S5818 is the same as the processing of steps S901 and S902. Conduct a transfer lottery.

After the AT mode transition lottery is performed in step S5818, it is determined whether or not the AT mode transition lottery is won in step S5819. If the game has been won, the process advances to step S5804 to perform processing for AT mode winning, such as setting an AT mode winning flag. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S5819 that the player has not won the prize, the process advances to step S5814 to perform processing for grasping the game result of the current game. Then, processing for AT mode transition lottery and the like from step S5801 are performed.

As described above, in this modified example, first, based on the game result of the game in which the advantageous interval transition lottery was won, the AT mode transition lottery is performed in the game after the transition to the advantageous interval (transition game). Only when the AT mode transition lottery based on the game result when winning the advantageous section transition is not won, the AT mode transition lottery is performed again with reference to the game result of the AT mode transition lottery. By doing so, the game results at the AT mode transition lottery can be referred to while reducing the chances of referring to the game results at the AT mode transition lottery, thereby avoiding complication of processing and the lottery table. can do.

<Modification 3>
In this modified example, in a configuration in which the game result when winning the transition to the advantageous section is reflected in the AT mode transition lottery performed after the transition to the advantageous section, the information of the game result is obtained depending on the game state and the game result when the transition to the advantageous section is won. are reflected in the AT mode transition lottery.

Although detailed explanation with drawings is omitted, for example, the value of the advantageous section end counter in FIG. do. 126(a), when the game result information is stored in the transition winning information temporary storage area 106f, a value corresponding to the value of the advantageous interval end counter shown in FIG. 113 is stored. Input to the erasing counter in the various counter area 106e. Then, in the erasing process of steps S5616, S5716, and S5816, the erasing counter is decremented by one. Otherwise, the information in the information temporary storage area 106f at the time of transfer winning is stored (not erased). As a result, the information about the game result when the advantageous section transition is won, which is stored in the transition winning information temporary storage area 106f, is stored over a plurality of games or over a plurality of AT mode transition lottery opportunities. , is used, and the number of times is different depending on the type of game result when the advantageous section transition is won.

Specifically, in the 4th RT state, if the advantageous zone transition lottery is won with a strong cherry as a trigger, 5 is input to the counter for erasure, and if a weak cherry is triggered and the advantageous zone transition lottery is won. In the above, if 2 is input to the counter for erasing, when winning the advantageous zone transition lottery with a strong cherry as a trigger, the information is used over five times of the AT mode transition lottery. , when winning the advantageous section shift lottery with the weak cherry as a trigger, the information is used over two times of the AT mode shift lottery.

In this case, the RT state information may also be taken into consideration, and a value may be input to the counter for erasing. , 1 may be input to the counter for erasure, and 1 may be input to the counter for erasure even when winning the advantageous section transition lottery triggered by a weak cherry.

<Other embodiments>
It should be noted that the present invention is not limited to the descriptions of the above-described embodiments and modifications, and may be implemented as follows. Incidentally, each of the following configurations may be individually applied to each of the above embodiments and modifications, or may be partially or entirely combined and applied to each of the above embodiments and modifications. Moreover, it is also possible to arbitrarily combine all or part of the various configurations shown in the above embodiments and modifications. In this case, it is preferable that the technical significance (effects exhibited) of each configuration to be combined is ensured. Each of the following configurations may be applied individually to a new configuration made up of a combination of embodiments and modifications, or a part or all of them may be combined and applied.

(1) Set the 11th re-game or the 12th re-game as a trigger for the transition to the 4th RT state as the AT mode high probability state, and press corresponding to winning of these 11th re-games or 12th re-games Although the configuration is such that forward notification is performed, the timing for transition to the fourth RT state is not limited to these replays, and another timing for transition may be provided. When providing another transition opportunity, it is preferable to have a configuration in which an operation mode that enables the winning is notified. For example, when another re-game is provided as another transition trigger for the 11th re-game or the 12th re-game, it may be configured to notify an operation mode for establishing the other re-game winning prize. Further, for example, it may be configured to cause a transition to the fourth RT state with the trigger of winning or missing a small winning combination such as a strong cherry. The configuration may be such that notification is performed, or the configuration may be such that only notification of the fact that the player has won the result that triggers the transition is performed. Further, the operation mode to be notified is not limited to notification of the order of pressing, but may be notification of operation timing or notification of target symbols (for example, notification such as "Aim at "Red 7" symbol"). Furthermore, by using the result of only the transition of the RT state, although winning is not established like the transition roll, the push order notification that results in a bell winning and the push order notification that causes a failure to stop the transition roll are used. , the presence or absence of transition to the fourth RT state may be generated.

(2) Although the configuration for the assist by the pressing order notification during the AT mode has been described so that the transition to the fourth RT state as the AT mode high probability state occurs during the AT mode, it is also possible to use other than during the AT mode, or A configuration may be adopted in which assistance to the fourth RT state is performed in a mode other than the AT mode. Specifically, for example, even in the normal game state and the 1st RT state, it is possible to win the result that triggers the transition to the 4th RT state such as transition replays 1 and 2, and it is advantageous in the normal game state and the 1st RT state. If the lottery for transition to the section is won, the transition to the fourth RT state may be assisted based on the fact that the lottery is won in the subsequent game as a result of the transition to the fourth RT state. In this case, in order to prevent the advantageous section from ending in the game in which the transition to the 4th RT state occurs, if the AT mode transition lottery based on the result that triggers the transition in the advantageous section is not won, the advantageous section It is preferable to adopt a configuration in which a value other than 0 (a value of 1 or more) is input to the end counter.

(3) When transition replays 1 and 2 that can cause a transition to the 4th RT state are won, if the notification flag for transition is set, the pressing order notification corresponding to the 11th re-game winning or the 12th re-game winning is issued. However, even if the notification flag for transition is set, the fourth RT state is executed. Transition-triggering results may be included that do not assist the transition to . For example, in addition to the transition replays 1 and 2, a transition replay 3 is provided, and when the transition replay 3 is won, the 11th replay winning prize or the 12th replay winning prize, as well as the 1st replay winning prize etc. depending on the operation order. It should be a configuration that can be established. When the transition replay 1 or 2 is won while the transition notification flag is set as described above, push order notification corresponding to the 11th re-game winning or the 12th re-game winning can be generated. On the other hand, if it is transition replay 3, even if the notification flag for transition is set, it may be configured such that the pushing order notification corresponding to the 11th regame winning or the 12th replay winning cannot occur. In addition, in the configuration in which a lottery is used to determine whether or not to generate the push order notification, if it is transition replay 3, the lottery to determine whether or not to generate the push order notification may not be won. It may be arranged such that the pressing order notification is not generated without even performing it.

(4) In a configuration in which a plurality of AT mode high-probability states with different winning probabilities in the AT mode transition lottery are provided, a configuration may be adopted in which the conditions for generating assists that cause the respective RT state transitions are different. Specifically, for example, in a configuration in which the winning probability of the AT mode transition lottery differs between the fourth RT state that transitions based on the 11th re-game winning and the fourth RT state that transitions based on the 12th re-game winning, The condition for assisting the 4th RT state based on the 11th re-game winning may be different from the condition for assisting the 4th RT state based on the 12th re-game winning. For example, when the transition replay 1 that enables the 11th re-game winning is won, if the notification flag for transition is set and the notification lottery that wins with the first probability is won, the push corresponding to the 11th re-game winning In the event of winning a transitional replay 2 that generates a forward notification and enables the 12th regame winning, a transitional notification flag is set and a notification lottery winning with a probability different from the first probability is won. In addition, a plurality of shift notification flags are provided, and when the number of remaining games becomes the first number, the shift notification flag corresponding to the 11th regame win is generated. is set, and when the number of remaining games becomes a second number different from the first number, a transition notification flag corresponding to the 12th regame win is set.

(5) Transition to the 4th RT state is based on the 11th regame winning prize or the 12th replay winning prize when replays 1 and 2 are won. It is good also as a structure which carries out. For example, although the 1 BB or 2 BB is won, the carry-over state before the winning may be the 4 RT state, or based on the end of the bonus state based on the 1 BB or 2 BB winning. , and the fourth RT state. In these, while the carryover state based on the 1BB winning is set to the 4th RT state, the carryover state based on the 2BB winning is not set to the 4th RT state, and the 4th RT state after the bonus state based on the 1BB winning ends. On the other hand, after the bonus state based on the winning of the second BB is completed, the fourth RT state is not set.

(6) In the 0RT state as the normal game state, the configuration may be such that a transition to the 4th RT state can occur. The 0RT state is a state in which the game moves to after the power is turned on, after the RAM is cleared, or after the bonus is finished. That is, during normal times, most stay in the 1st RT state, and stay in the 0th RT state first thing in the morning or after the end of the bonus. In such a configuration, by making a configuration in which, for example, transition replays 1 and 2 can be won so that the transition to the 4th RT state can occur in the 0th RT state, the superiority of these first thing in the morning and after the end of the bonus It is possible to realize the AT mode high probability state by the fourth RT state. Even in this case, if the advantageous section transition lottery is won in the 0RT state, an assist for transition to the 4th RT state at the time of winning the transition replay may be generated.

(7) Transition As an assist for transitioning to the 4th RT state at the time of winning a replay, it is configured to notify the pushing order corresponding to the 11th regame winning and the 12th replay winning. A configuration may be adopted in which not only the pressing order corresponding to the 12 re-game winning one-to-one but also the pressing order corresponding to the first re-game winning and other re-game winning are generated. Specifically, in the order of operation of the three stop switches 42 to 44, not only is the order of pressing the switch to be stopped first, the switch to be stopped next, and the switch to be stopped last, but also the switch to stop first. It is also possible to provide a game feature such that the pressing order is notified only for the ones that should be performed, and the 11th re-game winning or the 12th re-game winning is established when the player's intuition matches for the second and third.

In this case, the ratio of notifying the push order from the first to the last and the ratio of notifying a part of the push order such as only the first may differ depending on the set value, the excess of the advantageous interval, and the like.

(8) In a configuration in which a plurality of types of fourth RT states are set as AT mode high-probability states, it is possible to cause the transition based on the number of games remaining in the advantageous section ZG reaching 10 in any of them. However, it is also possible to adopt a configuration in which the conditions under which the transition can occur differ depending on the type of the fourth RT state. For example, the condition that allows the transition to the 4th RT state in 10 games is that the number of games remaining in the advantageous section ZG is 10, whereas the transition to the 4th RT state in 30 games occurs. Each condition may be set such that the number ZG of remaining games in the advantageous section becomes 30 as a condition for allowing the game to be played. In this case, for example, when the number of games remaining in the advantageous section ZG becomes 10, the notification flag for transition 1 is set as the notification flag for transition, and when the number of games ZG remaining in the advantageous section becomes 30, the notification for transition is set. A notification flag 2 for transition is set as a flag, and if the notification flag 1 for transition is set when the transition replay 1 is won, a push order notification for causing transition to the 4th RT state of the 10th game is generated, and the transition replay 2 is won. At this time, if the transition notification flag 2 is set, it is preferable to generate a push order notification that causes a transition to the fourth RT state of the 30th game.

(9) Transition to the 4th RT state in a configuration having a plurality of 4th RT states as AT mode high-probability states with different advantages for the player due to differences in the number of continuous games and the winning probability of the AT mode transition lottery. It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which the form and presentation of the pressing order notification for the first position are varied in accordance with the degree of advantage when the transition is made. Specifically, in a configuration in which the fourth RT state based on the 12th re-game winning is more advantageous than the 4th RT state based on the 11th re-game winning, when generating the push order notification corresponding to the 11th re-game winning, generates the pressing order notification effect in the first effect with the background color of the first color (blue), and generates the pressing order notification corresponding to the 12th regame win, the operation order may be configured to generate a pressing order notification effect in a second effect with a second color (red) whose background color is different from the first color.

(10) The main controller 101 side (RT transition processing, etc.) manages the presence or absence of the press order notification that causes the transition to the fourth RT state as the AT mode high probability state. It may be configured to be managed by the control device 81 side.

(11) Although the advantageous section is terminated when a transition to the fourth RT state occurs, the advantageous section may not be terminated, and only the AT mode may be terminated. In addition, the presence or absence of the end of the advantageous interval may differ depending on the value of the advantageous interval game number AG and the advantageous interval increase/decrease number ZM. .

(12) Although it is configured to end the advantageous section when the transition to the fourth RT state occurs, even if the transition to the fourth RT state occurs, the advantageous section will continue until the number of remaining AT mode games reaches 0. or AT mode may be continued.

Also, depending on the number of remaining games in the AT mode, the advantageous section at the time of transition to the fourth RT state and whether or not to continue the AT mode may differ. does not reach 10 and the transition to the 4th RT state occurs, while the advantageous section and AT mode are not terminated, the notification flag for transition is set and the number of remaining games is 10 or less The advantageous section or the AT mode may be terminated when a transition to the fourth RT state occurs.

Depending on the number of games played in the advantageous interval and the number of games increased or decreased, the advantageous interval at the time of transition to the fourth RT state and whether or not to continue the AT mode may differ. , the advantageous section is not terminated, while the advantageous section is terminated when the transition to the fourth RT state occurs in a situation close to the forced termination condition of the advantageous section.

Furthermore, the advantageous section at the time of transition to the fourth RT state and the presence or absence of continuation of the AT mode may differ depending on the set values.

(13) In the configuration for ending the advantageous section or AT mode at the time of transition to the 4th RT state, the advantageous section or AT mode is ended in the 4th RT state transition game. The mode may be terminated, or the advantageous section or AT mode may be terminated in a later game. For example, at the time of transition to the fourth RT state, the advantageous interval or the number of games until the end of the AT mode may be set, and the advantageous interval or AT mode may be ended by completing the number of games. In this case, the number of games until the end may vary depending on the game status and setting values until the transition to the fourth RT state, such as the number of remaining AT mode games and the number of games to be played in the advantageous section when transitioning to the fourth RT state.

(14) Although the advantageous section is ended when the AT mode is not won, the advantageous section may be ended partly when the AT mode is not won. Specifically, when the AT mode transition lottery is not won, a process of inputting a value corresponding to an AT non-winning flag or an advantageous section end counter is performed via the lottery for the end of the advantageous section. It may be configured such that it is executed when the lottery is won in the second lottery (when the continuation lottery is not won).

In addition, it may be configured such that whether or not the advantageous section ends differs depending on the game result that triggered the AT mode transition lottery, and the odds of winning the end lottery may differ.

(15) In the case where the lottery for the first AT mode is not won, the advantageous section is terminated in the advantageous section transition game, but the transition to the advantageous section may not be performed.

(16) Before the transition to the advantageous section, the AT mode destination lottery is executed based on the game when the advantageous section transition is won. In the configuration of the later game, the AT mode first lottery may be executed from the advantageous section transition winning game to one game before the starting game. In this case, the AT mode first lottery may be executed based on the game results of each game from the transition winning game to one game before the start game, or the game results of the transition winning game may be stored. , each game may utilize the game result of the transition winning game.

(17) In the case where a bonus such as the 1st BB or 2nd BB and an advantageous section are won at the same time, in a configuration where the advantageous section starts at the time of winning the bonus or at the end of the bonus, the time from the winning of the bonus to the winning or the end of the bonus It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which the AT mode first lottery is executed in the game before the transition when the advantageous section is won.

(18) In the configuration in which the execution of the AT mode first lottery can be restricted depending on the lottery result, the presence or absence of the restriction is adjusted to the case where the execution of the advantageous zone transition lottery is restricted, but the execution of the advantageous zone transition lottery is restricted. While the AT mode first lottery can be executed even if the game result is not limited, the execution of the AT mode first lottery is restricted in the case of a game result in which the execution of the advantageous interval transition lottery is not restricted. A configuration may be adopted in which the timing for restricting the AT mode first lottery is different.

(19) The game result when winning the transition to the advantageous section is stored in the transition winning information temporary storage area 106f, and based on the game result, the AT mode transition lottery is performed in the next game and thereafter. In addition to the game result at the time, information on the game state (RT state) and information such as the content of the effect in the game is also included or separately stored, and based on this information, the AT mode transition lottery is performed after the fact. may be configured to perform

(20) Regarding the trigger for the AT mode destination lottery and the information to be stored in the transition winning information temporary storage area 106f, if the advantageous zone transition lottery is performed based on the game results of multiple games, the game results of the multiple games A lottery for the AT mode may be performed based on or the game results of a plurality of games may be stored.

(21) Although the main controller 101 is configured to store the game result at the time of winning the transition to the advantageous period, if the AT mode transition lottery is configured to be performed by another control device such as the display control device 81, the other control device may be used. may be stored in the controller. In this case, in place of, or in addition to, the process of storing information in the transition winning time information temporary storage area 106f, a process of outputting a command for storing the information to the other control device is executed, and the command is received. Another control device may be configured to execute the process of storing the information.

(22) Although the description has been given of the configuration in which the AT mode transition lottery is performed in the advantageous interval transition game and subsequent games based on the game results when the advantageous interval transition is won, the AT mode transition lottery is performed after transitioning to the advantageous interval. It is only necessary that the game result at the time of winning the transition to the advantageous section is stored until the game in which is played. It is preferable that the game result is stored and held.

(23) In the configuration in which the game result when the advantageous section transition is won is stored in the transition winning information temporary storage area 106f, the game result of the advantageous section transition winning game is stored together with the AT mode transition lottery (AT mode destination) in the advantageous section transition winning game. At least, the AT mode transition lottery table may be stored in the transition winning information temporary storage area 106f. Such information may be acquired at the time of winning the transition to the advantageous section.

(24) Although the AT mode has been described as an example of the state included in the advantageous section, the first specific game state advantageous to the player and the state included in the first specific game state and more advantageous than other states and the second specific game state, it may be another state in the advantageous section, or it may not be in an advantageous state with respect to the instruction function.

(25) In the configuration in which the fixed RT state is used to set the fourth RT state, the number of games in the fixed RT state may be determined by lottery or the like. In this case, the number of games to be drawn may vary depending on the set value. Specifically, the higher the set value, the greater the number of games in the fixed RT state.

(26) Although a configuration has been shown in which the number of games to be added is added to the number of eliminated games EG when an addition occurs in a situation where any of the excess flags is set, the number of games to be added is added in a situation where the excess flag is not set. If the excess flag is set when the above is performed, the excess amount may be added to the number of eliminated games EG.

(27) In a configuration where execution of the AT mode lottery and post-AT mode lottery is made different depending on the RT state, if the AT mode lottery is not won in the 0RT state to the 3rd RT state, the AT mode is selected. While the post-lottery is not performed, if the AT mode lottery is not won in the 4th RT, the lottery after the AT mode is performed, but in the 0RT state to the 3rd RT state, the AT mode lottery is performed. A configuration may be adopted in which only the lottery after the AT mode is performed without performing the lottery, and in the fourth RT state, the lottery before the AT mode and the lottery after the AT mode are performed.

(28) As transition replays, transition replay 1 in which the first replay, second replay, and eleventh replay are won, and transition replay 2 in which the first regame, second regame, and twelfth regame are won. Although it is provided, it may be configured so that it is possible to win a replay that causes a transition to another RT state. At the same time, a third replay, a fourth replay, or a fifth replay may be won.

Also, the 11th re-game winning and the 12th re-game winning may be configured to occur in the same transition replay. A lottery or the like may be used to determine whether to generate the pushing order notification corresponding to the 11th re-game winning or to generate the pushing order notification corresponding to the 12th re-game winning.

(29) In the 4th RT state, the transition to the 1st RT state is prevented based on the stop of the transition roll. good too.

(30) In the configuration in which the 4th RT state is realized in the fixed RT state, it is configured to transition to the 0RT state after playing the specified number of games, but it may be configured to transition to the 1st RT state or the 2nd RT state. Alternatively, the configuration may be changed to the third RT state. In this case, it is preferable that the first RT state to the third RT state are normal game states.

(31) In the configuration in which the 4th RT state is realized in the infinite RT state, based on a predetermined replay win, a transition to the 1st RT state or the 2nd RT state occurs, but the 0RT state or the 3rd RT state It is good also as a structure which a transition to occurs.

(32) Although the 4th RT state is mainly described as the AT mode high probability state, the 4th RT state may be an AT mode low probability state with a lower probability of winning the AT mode transition lottery than the 0RT state to the 3rd RT state. The winning probability of the AT mode transition lottery may be different from the 0RT state to the 3rd RT state.

(33) Although the configuration in which the winning probability of the AT mode transition lottery differs between the fourth RT state and other RT states has been described, for example, a configuration in which the winning probability of the VB mode transition lottery differs between the fourth RT state and the other RT states. Alternatively, the odds of winning the specialized zone transfer lottery may differ between the fourth RT state and other RT states.

(34) Regarding the advantageous zone transition lottery, although it is executed for the transition trigger role with no set difference in the winning probability, it is not executed for the non-trigger role with the set difference in the winning probability. Either of them may be executed, or a non-trigger role may be executed, but a shift trigger role may not be executed.

(35) Regarding the AT mode first lottery, it is not only executed for the transition trigger role with no set difference in the winning probability, but not for the non-trigger role with the set difference in the winning probability. Either of them may be executed, or a non-trigger role may be executed, but a shift trigger role may not be executed. In addition, the lottery after the AT mode may be configured to be executed for the transition trigger role but not for the non-trigger role, or to be executed for both the transition trigger role and the non-trigger role. It may be configured such that it is executed in the trigger role but is not executed in the transition trigger role.

(36) There may or may not be a setting difference in the AT mode winning probability for both the AT mode first lottery and the AT mode post-lottery.

(37) As the winning probability of the mode transition lottery during the advantageous interval, the AT mode transition lottery winning probability differs depending on the RT state, but the winning probability may differ depending on other states. For example, the bonus state and the normal game state (non-bonus state) may have different winning probabilities, or the bonus state and the bonus carried over state before the transition to the bonus may have different winning probabilities.

(38) The role ratio monitor 77 is configured to display the ratio between the specific section in which the push order notification can occur and the section in which it is not possible. may be configured to be externally output to a hall computer or the like in a game hall, and may be configured to be displayed at the external output destination.

(39) Regarding the role ratio monitor 77, the information on the specific section and the non-specific section, such as the value of the first role ratio counter and the value of the second role ratio counter, is displayed based on the fact that the power supply of the game machine is cut off. It may be configured to be cleared, or may be configured not to be cleared.

(40) Although the configuration in which the role ratio monitor 77 is installed in the main controller 101 has been described, it may be provided in another control device, or may be provided with a dedicated device for the role ratio monitor 77 . In these cases, it is preferable that the main control device 101 outputs information on specific sections and other sections to a device having the role ratio monitor 77 .

(41) At the start of the AT mode, the AT mode level is displayed. It is good also as a structure to carry out. For example, LV. If LV. If LV. If it is 3, it is easy to generate a suggestive effect with a red background, and if it is LV. If the number is 4, a suggestive effect with a rainbow background is likely to occur. By doing so, the playability is improved when the AT mode is reset by causing the transition to the fourth RT state during the AT mode.

(42) Even in a configuration that causes a transition to the fourth RT state when the advantageous section ends with the forced termination condition satisfied, or causes a transition to the fourth RT state based on the excess amount, the advantageous section When the number of remaining games ZG reaches 10, the notification flag for transition is set. It may be configured such that it may not be set even if it is not set.

(43) In the configuration where a freeze occurs when a shift replay win is made in a situation where the add-on flag is set, whether or not freeze occurs depends on the relationship between the number of add-on games and the number of initial games in the AT mode. It may be configured to allow Specifically, the freeze may be generated when the number of post-loaded games is greater than 50 games, which is the initial number of games in the AT mode.

(44) In a configuration in which the third RT state is set as a transition mode in which transition to the fourth RT state can occur, the transition probability to the fourth RT state in the third RT state as the transition mode is the state ( 2nd RT state), and a configuration in which transition to the fourth RT state can occur with a low probability even in the previous state (second RT state) may be employed.

(45) Even in the configuration in which the game result of the advantageous zone winning game is stored in the shift winning information temporary storage area 106f, the AT mode first lottery may be executed in the advantageous zone winning game.

(46) In a configuration in which the game result of the advantageous section winning game is stored in the transition winning information temporary storage area 106f, the number of games for which the information in the storage area 106f is stored and the number of AT mode transition lotteries are varied depending on the RT state. Although the example has been explained, the presence or absence of storage may be changed depending on the RT state. In the state to the 3rd RT state, if the advantageous section transition lottery is won in the 4th RT state, the game result of the game may not be stored.

(47) In the configuration in which the AT mode first lottery is executed in the advantageous section transition winning game, a configuration may be adopted in which different effects are generated depending on whether the AT mode first lottery is won or not. That is, even if the advantageous section transition lottery is won, if the AT mode destination lottery is not won, the first effect is generated and both the advantageous section transition lottery and the AT mode destination lottery are won. If so, a configuration may be adopted in which a second effect different from the first effect is generated.

(48) The ball payout rate is changed according to each setting value, and the ball payout rate is the lowest at setting 1 and the highest at setting 6. Any configuration may be used as long as the rate of increase or decrease or the mode of increase or decrease of the . For example, the ball payout rate may be the same for some setting values, such as setting 1 and setting 2 having the same ball payout rate, and other setting values may have different ball payout rates. Alternatively, settings 1, 3, and 5 may have a high increase/decrease rate of paid balls, and settings 2, 4, and 6 may have a low increase/decrease rate of paid balls. Further, setting 1 and 5 increase the number of paid balls by a predetermined amount in a short time and decrease the number of paid balls by a predetermined amount in a long time. A predetermined amount of decrease can be achieved in a shorter time than settings 1 and 5, and setting 6 may be configured so that the number of balls paid out hardly increases or decreases. In these cases, the payout rate of each set value may be the same.

(49) Although a slot machine having three reels and corresponding stop switches arranged in parallel has been described, the present invention is not limited to such a configuration. It may be a slot machine. From the viewpoint of suppressing erroneous operation in stopping the reel, at least two reels and corresponding stop switches are sufficient. Also, the slot machine in which the number of bets is 3 and the pay line is set to 1 line has been described, but the configuration is not limited to this, and the pay line may be 5 lines, for example.

(50) Although a specific example of the slot machine 10 has been shown, it may be applied to a game machine in which a slot machine and a pachinko machine are combined. That is, the slot machine may be a game machine having ball-inserting and ball-paying functions like a pachinko machine (a so-called ball-using reel-type game machine) in place of the medal-inserting and medal-paying functions. If such a game machine is used instead of a slot machine, only the balls can be treated as game value in the game hall. It is possible to solve the problems such as the burden on the equipment due to the separate handling of the medals and the balls and the restrictions on the installation location of the game machine.

For example, a pachinko machine or a reel-type game machine using balls may be configured to have a plurality of stages of set values that change the ball output rate, etc., and each of the above inventions may be applied to suggest these set values and as a teaching effect. good. In this case, in a pachinko machine having a high-probability state and a low-probability state in which the jackpot probability is high and low, the advantageous section in the slot machine 10 may be applied as the high-probability state, In a pachinko machine having a high ball entry state and a low ball entry state in which the ball rate is high and low, each of the above inventions may be applied with the advantageous section of the slot machine 10 being the high ball entry state.

<Invention groups extracted from the above embodiments>
Characteristic configurations extracted from each of the above-described embodiments will be described below, showing effects and the like as necessary. In the following description, for ease of understanding, configurations corresponding to the above-described embodiments are appropriately shown in parentheses or the like, but the specific configurations shown in parentheses or the like are not limited.

The inventions shown in the following feature groups are known as "types of gaming machines such as pachinko machines and slot machines. In these gaming machines, an internal lottery is performed based on the establishment of a predetermined lottery condition. In the slot machine, a start lever is operated while medals as game media are betted. Then, an internal lottery is carried out and the rotation of the reel is started, and if the stop switch is operated during the rotation of the reel, the rotation of the reel is stopped. If it corresponds to the result of the above, a privilege corresponding to the result is given (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2008-295707). There is still room for improvement in this regard.”

<Characteristic group A>
Feature A1. a plurality of revolving bodies (each reel 32L, 32M, 32R) on which a plurality of types of patterns are attached in the circumferential direction;
a display unit (display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) that makes it possible to visually recognize a part of the pattern for each of the surrounding bodies;
a starting operation means (start lever 41) for starting the circulation of each of the winding bodies when operated;
stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) for stopping the circulation of each of the circulation bodies when operated;
Drive control means (reel control by the main controller 101) for starting the circulation of each of the winding bodies when the starting operation means is operated, and stopping the circulation of each of the winding bodies when the stop operation means is operated function to perform processing) and
A lottery means (a function of executing a lottery process by the main control device 101) that performs a lottery as to whether or not to give a privilege to a player based on the operation of the starting operation means;
When the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result and the predetermined pattern combination corresponding to the predetermined result stops at an effective position set at a position where the pattern can be visually recognized through the display unit, Privilege granting means capable of granting a privilege corresponding to a predetermined result (function for executing payout determination processing by main controller 101);
with
As a lottery result by the lottery means, a replay result in which a replay that enables the next game to be executed without requiring a new game medium is given as the privilege by the privilege granting means, and a predetermined number of games are played by the privilege granting means. A gaming machine provided with at least a payout result in which the payout of game media is given as the privilege,
As game states, a normal game state (normal section) and a first specific game state (advantageous section) that is likely to be more advantageous to the player than the normal game state are provided,
As a state included in the first specific game state, a second specific game state (AT mode) that is more likely to be advantageous to the player than other states in the first specific game state is set,
In the normal game state, first transition lottery means for executing a first transition lottery for determining whether to transition to the first specific game state (function for executing an advantageous zone transition lottery by the main controller 101);
Based on the fact that the lottery result of the first transition lottery by the first transition lottery means is the first transition result (advantageous section winning) corresponding to shifting to the first specific game state, the first specific game First specific transition means for transitioning to the state (function for executing processing for transitioning to the advantageous section by the main controller 101);
Second transition lottery means for executing a second transition lottery for whether or not to transition to the second specific game state (function for executing an AT mode transition lottery by the main control device 101);
Based on the fact that the lottery result of the second transition lottery by the second transition lottery means is the second transition result (AT mode winning) corresponding to shifting to the second specific game state, the second specific game Second specific transition means for transitioning to the state (function for executing processing for transitioning to AT mode by main controller 101);
with
Further, as game states, a first special state (for example, a second RT state) and a second special state in which the probability that the lottery result by the lottery means is the payout result is common, but the probability that the replay result is the result may differ. (For example, the 4th RT state) is set,
The first transition lottery means is capable of executing the first transition lottery so that the probability of the first transition result being the same in the first special state and the second special state,
The second transition lottery means executes the second transition lottery so as to obtain the second transition result with a first probability in the first special state, while executing the second transition lottery in the second special state with a higher probability than the first probability. It is possible to execute the second transition lottery so that the second transition result is obtained with a high second probability,
Second special transition means (function for executing RT state processing by main controller 101) for transitioning to the second special state based on the fact that the predetermined pattern combination for the second transition stops at the valid position. When,
In the second specific game state, a predetermined notification means ( A specific mode notification means (a function of executing a process for notifying the pressing order at the time of transition replay winning in the main controller 101) that can be executed by the auxiliary display unit 65 and the instruction monitor 68);
A game machine characterized by comprising:

According to the above configuration, when the start operation means is operated, the lottery means conducts a lottery and starts the orbiting of the orbiting body, and when the stop operation means is operated, the orbiting orbiting body stops and stops. In a so-called slot machine in which a privilege is given by a privilege giving means if the number corresponds to the lottery result, a first specific game state is provided in which a player is likely to be more advantageous than a normal game state. Since a more advantageous second specific game state is provided as a state included in the first specific game state, the normal game state is shifted to the first specific game state, and the second specific game state is aimed at. A game property premised on state transitions that are economically advantageous is realized, and it is possible to make great use in improving amusement.

Further, as game states, there are provided a first special state and a second special state corresponding to a so-called RT state, in which the probability of a payout result is common but the probability of a replay result may differ. Then, the first specific game state and the second specific game state are those that shift through the first transition lottery and the second transition lottery, and the first transition lottery to the first specific game state is the first special state and the second While it is performed with the same probability in the 2 special states, the second transition lottery is performed so that the transition to the second specific game state is more likely to occur in the second special state than in the first special state. , While the chance of shifting to the first specific game state advantageous to the player is given equally regardless of the type of RT state, the chance of shifting to the second specific game state differs depending on the type of RT state. In addition, the game is diversified.

Moreover, in the above configuration, it is possible to perform mode notification including a specific stop operation mode in which the transition to the second special state occurs in the second specific game state. Therefore, the transition to the second special state, in which the transition to the second specific game state is likely to occur, is caused in a situation where the second specific game state is already present, for example, the second specific game state ends. Innovative such as creating a so-called withdrawal zone by causing a transition to the second special state when doing so, or causing a transition to the second special state when resetting the second specific game state. It is possible to make a great use of the realization of the game playability.

It should be noted that "as a game state, a first special state (for example, a second RT state) and a second special state (for example, a second RT state) may have a common probability that the lottery result by the lottery means will be the payout result, but the probability that the replay result will be different. 2 special states (e.g., fourth RT state) are set, and "as a game state, further, a first special state ( For example, a second RT state) and a second special state (for example, a fourth RT state) are set. , 2nd RT state) and a 2nd special state (for example, 4th RT state) are set. A state (for example, the fourth RT state) is set, and may be expressed as ". These changes in expressions regarding the "first special state" and the "second special state" can also be applied to other feature groups and features.

Feature A2. Ending means for ending the second specific game state based on the establishment of a predetermined end condition (function for executing processing for ending AT mode by main control device 101),
Characteristic A1 characterized in that the specific mode notification means can execute the specific mode notification so that the second special state is reached before the second specific game state is terminated by the termination means. The gaming machine described in .

According to the above configuration, when the second specific game state advantageous to the player ends, the specific mode notification is executed so that the second special state is established. By doing so, after the second specific game state is completed, a situation where the transition to the second specific game state such as the second special state is likely to occur occurs, and a so-called withdrawal zone to the second specific game state can be added.

In addition, for example, the above-described configuration includes, for example, "terminating means for terminating the second specific game state based on the establishment of a predetermined termination condition (function for executing processing for terminating the AT mode by the main control device 101 ),
The specific mode notification means is capable of executing the specific mode notification so as to be the second special state when the second specific game state is terminated by the end means. The game machine described. ” can be expressed.

Feature A3. As the end condition, the number of games executed in the first specific game state reaches the upper limit number of games, or the difference between the game media paid out and the used game media in the first specific game state reaches the upper limit increase number. Forced termination condition is set,
The specific mode notification means executes the specific mode notification so that the second special state occurs when the second specific game state is terminated by the termination means based on the establishment of the forced termination condition. The gaming machine according to feature A2, characterized in that

According to the above configuration, the transition to the second special state occurs when the condition for forced termination of the first specific game state including the second specific game state is satisfied. In this case, after the forced termination of the first specific game state, the transition to the first specific game state does not tend to occur, but the transition to the second specific game state tends to occur, so the first specific game state It is possible to set the withdrawal zone of the second specific game state without violating the meaning of the forced termination condition.

Feature A4. a first comprehension means for comprehending the number of executed games or the difference number of games in the first specific gaming state (a function of executing a process for managing the number of games in the advantageous section AG and the number of increase/decrease in the advantageous section ZM by the main control device 101);
Add-on means capable of adding to the remaining number of the first specific gaming state based on the establishment of a predetermined add-on condition (a function of executing an AT mode game count add-on process by the main control device 101); ,
A second grasping means (by the main controller 101) capable of grasping that the forced termination condition is satisfied based on the grasping result of the first grasping means and the remaining number before the forced termination condition is satisfied function to execute remaining game number management processing and remaining number management processing),
When the additional condition is satisfied in a situation where the second grasping means grasps that the forced termination condition is satisfied, the upper limit number of games is added to the remaining number based on the satisfaction of the additional condition. or specific information storage means for storing specific information corresponding to the amount exceeding the upper limit increase number (function for executing processing for storing the number of games to be added to the number of eliminated games EG by the main control device 101);
with
The specific mode notification means, when the second specific game state is terminated by the termination means based on the establishment of the forced termination condition, according to the specific information stored in the specific information storage means, An execution lottery means (a function of executing a shift notification lottery process by the main control unit 101) for executing the execution lottery for the specific mode notification is provided, and the specific mode notification can be executed based on the lottery result of the execution lottery means. The gaming machine according to feature A3, characterized by:

According to the above configuration, when the forced termination condition is exceeded, a lottery for execution of the specific mode notification is performed according to the excess amount, and the specific mode notification can be performed. By doing so, it is possible to compensate for the fact that the excess amount cannot be digested by the specific mode notification that causes the transition to the second special state where the transition to the second specific game state is likely to occur. becomes.

Feature A5. The specific mode notifying means detects the specific mode based on a specific situation in which the number of games until the end condition is satisfied is less than the number of continuous games in the second special state or the average number of continuous games. The gaming machine according to any one of features A2 to A4, characterized by being capable of executing notification.

As in the above configuration, by defining the execution timing in the specific mode notification in relation to the number of continuous games in the second special state and the average number of continuous games, the second special state is forcibly entered at the end of the second specific game state. It is possible to achieve the effect of feature A2 with a relatively simple configuration without using a complicated configuration such as shifting to .

Feature A6. The characteristic feature A5, wherein the specific mode notification means can execute the specific mode notification when the specific situation occurs and the lottery result of the lottery means is a predetermined specific result. game machine.

According to the above configuration, it is not always possible to cause the transition to the second special state by generating the specific mode notification just before the end of the second specific game state, but the lottery result by the lottery means of each game must result in a specific result. In other words, the element of luck is added to cause the transition to the second special state at the end of the second specific game state, and while making the point of whether or not it will be the specific result, that is, the transition to the so-called withdrawal zone It is possible to play the game while having a high interest in whether or not a problem occurs.

Feature A7. If the result of the lottery by the lottery means is the specific result before the specific situation is reached, means capable of limiting execution of the specific mode notification by the specific mode notification means (step S1521 by main controller 101 A gaming machine according to feature A6, characterized in that it has a function of making a negative determination in the process of .

According to the above configuration, regardless of the desire to cause the transition to the second special state just before the end of the second specific game state, avoiding the phenomenon that the transition to the second special state occurs before that. can do.

The second special state is a configuration that is easy to win the second transition lottery to the second specific game state, but in order not to increase the advantage of the second special state too much, It is also conceivable to set the winning probability of the game result low, or terminate the second specific game state based on the transition to the second special state. In that respect, if the above configuration is not provided, the transition to the second special state may occur if the specific result is obtained before the specific situation is reached, and an event disadvantageous to the player may occur. Also, in order to avoid this, it is conceivable to switch the lottery table before and after the specific situation so that the specific result does not occur before the specific situation occurs, but there is concern about the complexity of the structure. . In that respect, as in the above configuration, while permitting the specific result winning before the specific situation occurs, by adopting a configuration that only restricts the execution of the specific mode notification at the time of the specific result winning, the configuration is relatively simple. , it is possible to avoid the transition to the second special state before the specific situation.

Feature A8. Remaining number notification execution means (function for executing notification based on display remaining number counter HG by display control device 81) capable of executing remaining number notification corresponding to the number of remaining games in the second specific gaming state;
addition processing executing means for executing processing for adding the number of remaining games in the second specific gaming state (function for executing processing for adding the number of AT mode games by the main control device 101);
Based on the fact that the addition process is performed by the addition process execution means, addition notification means for performing addition notification of the addition process (function for executing processing for addition notification effect by display control device 81);
update means for updating the remaining number notification by the remaining number notification execution means based on the fact that the addition notification is performed by the addition notification means (function for executing processing for addition notification effect by the display control device 81); ,
When a second specific situation occurs in which the number of games corresponding to the remaining number notification by the remaining number notification execution means is smaller than the number of continuous games in the second special state or the average number of continuous games, the addition process is executed. means is executed and the addition notification by the addition notification means is not executed, means capable of restricting execution of the specific mode notification by the specific mode notification means (by the main controller 101 A gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A7, characterized by comprising a function of making a negative decision in the process of step S1521.

According to the above configuration, in a situation where a so-called post-addition notification is made in which the addition processing is executed but the addition notification is not executed, the number of games corresponding to the remaining number notification is near the end of the second specific game state. Even if there is, the execution of the specific mode notification by the specific mode notification executing means is restricted, and the transition to the second special state is not caused. In this way, even though the actual number of remaining games in the second specific game state is larger than the content of the remaining number notification, the event of shifting to the second special state is prevented from occurring. can be Therefore, it is possible to implement a configuration in which the transition to the second special state occurs near the end of the second specific game state while ensuring the performance effect of the so-called post-loading notification.

Feature A9. When the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined specific result, it is configured to be able to shift to the second special state,
In the specific situation, when the lottery result by the lottery means is the specific result, means capable of executing a predetermined special effect function to execute processing for performing a press order notification effect corresponding to );
In the second specific situation, when the lottery result by the lottery means is the specific result, a means capable of executing an effect that cannot or is difficult to distinguish from the special effect (at the time of transition replay winning by the display control device 81) a function of executing a process for performing a pressing order notification effect corresponding to the first replay);
The gaming machine according to feature A8, characterized by comprising:

According to the above configuration, in the configuration in which a transition to the second special state can occur based on the specific result winning, the second specific state is generated in conjunction with the occurrence of the special effect when the specific result wins in the specific situation. Even in the situation, if a specific result is won, an effect similar to the special effect is generated, so that the special effect does not occur. It is possible to avoid the phenomenon that the existence of the ride notification) is realized. Therefore, it is possible to enjoy the effect of shifting to the second special state to the extent that the performance effect of the post-loading notification that has been prepared with much effort is not lost.

Feature A10. Based on the transition to the second special state, characterized by comprising a specific end means (function of executing the process of step S1626 by the main control device 101) to end the second specific game state The game machine according to any one of A1 to A9.

According to the above configuration, by operating in accordance with the specific mode notification by the specific mode notification means in the second specific game state, the transition to the second special state occurs, and the second specific game state ends. By doing so, it is possible to function the second special state, in which the transition to the second specific game state is likely to occur, as a pull-back zone for the second specific game state, and the transition to the second specific game state. It is also possible to prevent the occurrence of a useless situation such that the second special state, in which is likely to occur, occurs during the second specific game state.

In addition, the above-mentioned ``specific ending means'' is defined as ``specific ending means for terminating the second specific game state based on the transition to the second special state, regardless of the number of remaining games in the second specific game state. ” can be expressed.

Feature A11. As the game state, the probability that the lottery result by the lottery means is the payout result is common to the first special state and the second special state, while the probability that the replay result is at least different from the first special state. A different third special state (first RT state) is set,
The probability that the lottery result by the lottery means becomes the replay result is set to be lower in the third special state than in the first special state,
The probability that the lottery result of the second transition lottery means becomes the second transition result is set to be lower in the first special state and the third special state than in the second special state,
Third special transition means (function for executing RT state processing by main controller 101) for transitioning to the third special state based on the predetermined third transition pattern combination stopping at the valid position. with
As a lottery result by the lottery means, it is possible to stop the pattern combination for the second transition at the effective position by performing the stop operation in the specific stop operation mode, and a third pattern combination different from the specific stop operation mode. Characteristic A1 characterized in that a specific result (transition replay 1, 2) is set such that the pattern combination for the third transition can be stopped at the effective position by performing a stop operation in a specific stop operation mode. The game machine according to any one of A10.

According to the above configuration, when the specific result is won, if the stop operation is performed in the specific stop operation mode, a transition to the second special state occurs in which the probability of the second transition result is high, and the specific result is selected when the specific result is won. If a stop operation is performed in a third specific stop operation mode different from the stop operation mode, a transition to a third special state can occur in which the probability of replay results is low. That is, depending on the stop operation mode when the specific result is won, the subsequent game state becomes the second special state in which the transition to the second specific game state is likely to occur, or the transition to the second specific game state is less likely to occur. Furthermore, whether or not a third special state in which the probability of a replay result is lowered is different. In this way, in a game in which a transition to the second special state can occur, at the same time, a transition to the third special state, which is greatly different from the second special state in the degree of advantage for the player, can occur. , it is possible to increase the degree of attention to the game in which the transition to the second special state can occur, and to increase the interest in the stop operation mode that causes the transition.

Feature A12. When the lottery result by the lottery means is the specified result, the stop operation is performed in a second specific stop operation mode different from the specific stop operation mode and the third specific stop operation mode, so that the The gaming machine according to feature A11, characterized in that it is configured such that the maintenance pattern combination for maintaining the first special state can be stopped.

According to the above configuration, the first special state is maintained in addition to the transition to the second special state and the transition to the third special state depending on the stop operation mode when the specific result is won. It becomes possible that no transition occurs in some cases. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the transition to the second special state or the third special state from occurring with a relatively simple configuration when there is an inconvenience if the transition to the second special state or the third special state occurs. becomes. More specifically, the game characteristics, such as making the transition to the second special state or the third special state, or not making the transition to these states, are added to the lottery table that can win a specific result. It can be implemented without modification.

Feature A13. Based on the transition to the second special state, a specific end means for ending the second specific game state (function of executing the process of step S1626 by the main control device 101),
When the lottery result by the lottery means is the specified result, special notification execution means (display control device 81 94(a))).

According to the above configuration, although the second specific game state ends when it is shifted to the second special state by the specific stop operation mode, in the structure in which it is easy to win the transition lottery to the second specific game state, the current second Realization of innovative playability such as allowing the player to choose whether to abandon the specific game state and challenge to shift to a new second specific game state, or to maintain the current second specific game state. It becomes possible.

Feature A14. The probability that the lottery result by the lottery means becomes the replay result is set to be higher in the first special state than in the second special state,
The gaming machine according to any one of A1 to A13, wherein the specific mode notification means can execute the specific mode notification in the first special state.

According to the above configuration, when the first special state shifts to the second special state, the probability of a replay result decreases, so from the viewpoint that it is possible to play the game while reducing the decrease in the game medium. , it is not preferable for the player to move from the first special state to the second special state. On the other hand, as described in feature A1, the second special state is superior in terms of the transition rate to the second specific game state. Therefore, for example, under the situation that is already in the second specific game state, the first special state is more preferable for the player than the second special state, and under the situation that is not the second specific game state, the first special It is possible to make the impressions of the two special states different (exactly opposite) such that the second special state is more preferable to the player than the state, and greatly contributes to the realization of game characteristics using this. becomes possible.

Feature A15. A plurality of stages of set values are provided that are capable of causing changes in the rate of increase or decrease or manner of increase or decrease of the game medium, and setting means (main controller) for setting one set value among the set values of the plurality of stages. 101 function to execute the setting process of the winning probability),
an execution rate of the specific mode notification by the specific mode notification means when the first set value is set by the setting means;
an execution rate of the specific mode notification by the specific mode notification means when a second set value different from the first set value is set by the setting means;
The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A14, wherein the different

According to the above configuration, the difference between the increase/decrease rate of the game medium and the set value of the increase/decrease mode is embodied by the transition rate to the second special state, that is, the transition rate to the state where the transition to the second specific game state is likely to occur. It is possible to realize a novel game property such as playing.

Feature A16. When the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined specific result (transition replay 1, 2), the pattern combination for the second transition can be stopped at the valid position,
The probability that the lottery result by the lottery means will be the specified result when the first set value is set by the setting means, and the lottery means when the second set value is set by the setting means. The gaming machine according to feature A15, wherein an execution rate of the specific mode notification by the specific mode notification means differs due to a difference in the probability that the lottery result by the lottery result becomes the specific result.

According to the above configuration, the winning probability of the specified result differs depending on the setting value, and the difference in the transition rate to the second special state is realized by the difference in the winning probability. By doing so, it is possible to achieve different transition rates to the second special state with a relatively simple configuration.

Feature A17. When the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined specific result (transition replays 1 and 2), and when the stop operation means is operated in the specific stop operation mode, the stop operation means is moved to the effective position. A configuration in which the pattern combination for the second transition can be stopped,
The specific mode notification is performed by execution lottery means (transition notification lottery by main controller 101) that performs the execution lottery of the specific mode notification when the lottery result by the lottery means is the specific result in the second specific game state. function to execute processing), and executes the specific mode notification based on the lottery result of the execution lottery means,
The probability that the lottery result by the execution lottery means when the first set value is set by the setting means will be the result of executing the specific mode notification, and the second set value is set by the setting means. The execution rate of the specific mode notification by the specific mode notification means is different due to the difference in the probability that the result of the lottery by the execution lottery means when there is a specific mode notification is the result of executing the specific mode notification. The gaming machine according to A15 or feature A16.

According to the above configuration, the winning probability of the execution lottery of the specific mode notification differs depending on the set value, and the difference in the winning probability realizes the difference in the transition rate to the second special state. By doing so, it is possible to achieve different transition rates to the second special state with a relatively simple configuration. In particular, it is not necessary to change the lottery table by the lottery means because only the probability of winning the lottery for execution of the specific mode notification is changed. Therefore, in a control device having a lottery means, it is not necessary to store a plurality of lottery tables for it, and it is possible to reduce the storage capacity.

Feature A18. A plurality of stages of set values are provided that are capable of causing changes in the rate of increase or decrease or manner of increase or decrease of the game medium, and setting means (main controller) for setting one set value among the set values of the plurality of stages. 101 function to execute the setting process of the winning probability),
In the first special state, the second transition lottery means determines whether the first set value is set by the setting means or when a second set value different from the first set value is set. While the second transition lottery can be executed so that the probabilities of the second transition result are the same, the second transition lottery can be executed so that the probabilities of the second transition result in the second special state are different. 106. The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A17, characterized in that a 2-shift lottery can be executed (for example, there is a setting difference in the AT mode transition lottery based on the normal replay in FIG. 106).

According to the above configuration, the winning probability of the transition lottery to the second specific game state is common regardless of the set value in the first special state, but differs depending on the set value in the second special state. In this case, as the number of games in the second special state increases, the number of trials of games for predicting the setting value also increases, and there is a possibility that the setting value will be easily predicted in the second special state. On the other hand, in such a configuration, the transition to the second special state is realized by the specific mode notification by the specific mode notification execution means, so that the transition to the second special game state in the second special state It is possible to set the transition rate to the second specific game state above the setting difference of the transition lottery. In other words, even if the setting difference of the transition lottery to the second specific game state in the second special state is not so large, a setting difference is provided in the transition rate to the second special state, for example, like features A14 to A16. By doing so, it is possible to increase the setting difference of the transition rate to the second specific game state. The number of transitions to the second special state should be much smaller than the number of games in the second special state, and the number of trials in the game of predicting the set value is also smaller. Therefore, it is possible to provide a set difference in the transition rate to the second specific game state while preventing the set value from being easily predicted.

Feature A19. The second special state is terminated when a predetermined number of games are played, and is set so as not to cause a transition from the second special state to the first special state. The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A18.

According to the above configuration, the second special state in which transition to the second specific game state is likely to occur is a so-called fixed RT state in which the number of executable games is determined. If a so-called infinite RT state, in which the number of executable games is variable, is applied, the length of the second special state can be lengthened or shortened, thereby increasing or decreasing the benefits of the second special state. Although it can vary greatly depending on the situation, by adopting the above configuration, it is possible to enjoy the benefit of being able to receive the second transition lottery to the second specific game state as equally as possible.

Feature A20. When the second transition lottery is won in the second special state, information corresponding to the number of remaining games in the second special state is added to the second specific gaming state in which the second transition lottery is won. The gaming machine according to feature A19, characterized by:

When the second special state is the fixed RT state, the second special state is terminated as long as the predetermined number of games is not completed despite winning the lottery for transition to the second specific game state. , and it may be difficult to cause the transition to the second specific game state. In that regard, according to the above configuration, the situation after the transition lottery winning to such a second specific game state is reflected in the second specific game state that has been won, so the second special state Disadvantages of the fixed RT state are eliminated.

In addition, as a specific configuration of "the information corresponding to the number of remaining games in the second special state is added to the second specific game state in which the second transition lottery was won", "the second special state The number of remaining games is added to the number of games in the second specific gaming state that won the second transition lottery", or "Information corresponding to the number of remaining games in the second special state is 2, the advantage in the second specific game state that won the transition lottery is taken into account", or the second specific game state has a configuration in which "a special state in which the probability of performing an additional process is increased" is set. After that, "Information corresponding to the number of remaining games in the second special state is the transition rate to the special state in the second specific game state in which the second transition lottery was won or the number of games in the special state A configuration that is "added" is conceivable.

Feature A21. The second special state can be terminated when the result of the lottery by the lottery means is a predetermined termination result, and the transition from the second special state to the first special state can occur. The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A18, characterized in that it is set to .

According to the above configuration, the second special state in which transition to the second specific game state is likely to occur is a so-called infinite RT state in which the number of executable games is variable. In this case, although the benefit of the second special state is large and small, it may vary greatly depending on the situation. In the structure that is digested in the state, it is also possible to shift to the first special state without going through other states when winning the lottery for transition to the second specific game state during the second special state. . Therefore, the transition to the second specific game state can be performed relatively smoothly.

Feature A22. A plurality of stages of set values are provided that are capable of causing changes in the rate of increase or decrease or manner of increase or decrease of the game medium, and setting means (main controller) for setting one set value among the set values of the plurality of stages. 101 function to execute the setting process of the winning probability),
When the first set value is set by the setting means and when the second set value different from the first set value is set, there is a probability that the lottery result by the lottery means will be the end result. The gaming machine of feature A21, which can be different.

According to the above configuration, there is a setting difference in the winning probability of the end result that defines the continuation rate of the second special state, so there is a setting difference in the continuation rate of the second special state. As a result, it is possible to realize the difference in the ease of enjoying the benefits of the second special state in which the transition to the second specific game state is likely to occur, by the set value.

Feature A23. Ending means for ending the first specific game state based on the establishment of a predetermined end condition (function for executing the section display second process by the main control device 101);
When the first specific game state is terminated by the end means, initialization means capable of executing initialization processing of information related to the first specific game state (initialization processing in the section display second processing by the main control device 101 function) and
with
When the first specific game state is ended by the end means, the second specific game state is also ended,
The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A22, wherein the second special state is maintained even when the initialization processing is performed by the initialization means.

According to the above configuration, when the end condition is satisfied and the first specific game state ends, the second specific game state included in the first specific game state also ends, and the initial information on the first specific game state conversion processing is performed. Therefore, it is possible to clearly manage the presence or absence of continuation of the first specific game state and the second specific game state. On top of that, the second special state is a configuration that is maintained even if the initialization process is performed, so when the transition to the second special state occurs due to the specific mode notification in the second specific game state, the state is changed. It becomes possible to carry over after the end of the first specific game state, and through the second special state, it is possible to realize the continuity of the first specific game state and the second specific game state.

Feature A24. a plurality of revolving bodies (each reel 32L, 32M, 32R) on which a plurality of types of patterns are attached in the circumferential direction;
a display unit (display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) that makes it possible to visually recognize a part of the pattern for each of the surrounding bodies;
a starting operation means (start lever 41) for starting the circulation of each of the winding bodies when operated;
stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) for stopping the circulation of each of the circulation bodies when operated;
Drive control means (reel control by the main controller 101) for starting the circulation of each of the winding bodies when the starting operation means is operated, and stopping the circulation of each of the winding bodies when the stop operation means is operated function to perform processing) and
A lottery means (a function of executing a lottery process by the main control device 101) that performs a lottery as to whether or not to give a privilege to a player based on the operation of the starting operation means;
When the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result and the predetermined pattern combination corresponding to the predetermined result stops at an effective position set at a position where the pattern can be visually recognized through the display unit, Privilege granting means capable of granting a privilege corresponding to a predetermined result (function for executing payout determination processing by main controller 101);
with
As a lottery result by the lottery means, a replay result in which a replay that enables the next game to be executed without requiring a new game medium is given as the privilege by the privilege granting means, and a predetermined number of games are played by the privilege granting means. A gaming machine provided with at least a payout result in which the payout of game media is given as the privilege,
As game states, a normal game state (normal section) and a first specific game state (advantageous section) that is likely to be more advantageous to the player than the normal game state are provided,
As a state included in the first specific game state, a second specific game state (AT mode) that is more likely to be advantageous to the player than other states in the first specific game state is set,
In the normal game state, first transition lottery means for executing a first transition lottery for determining whether to transition to the first specific game state (function for executing an advantageous zone transition lottery by the main controller 101);
Based on the fact that the lottery result of the first transition lottery by the first transition lottery means is the first transition result (advantageous section winning) corresponding to shifting to the first specific game state, the first specific game First specific transition means for transitioning to the state (function for executing processing for transitioning to the advantageous section by the main controller 101);
Second transition lottery means for executing a second transition lottery for whether or not to transition to the second specific game state (function for executing an AT mode transition lottery by the main control device 101);
Based on the fact that the lottery result of the second transition lottery by the second transition lottery means is the second transition result (AT mode winning) corresponding to shifting to the second specific game state, the second specific game Second specific transition means for transitioning to the state (function for executing processing for transitioning to AT mode by main controller 101);
with
Further, as game states, a first special state (for example, a second RT state) and a second special state may have different probabilities that the lottery result of the lottery means will result in the payout result, while the probability of the replay result may differ. (For example, the 4th RT state) is set,
The first transition lottery means is capable of executing the first transition lottery so that the probability of the first transition result being the same in the first special state and the second special state,
The second transition lottery means executes the second transition lottery so that the second transition result is obtained with a first probability in the first special state, while the first probability is different in the second special state. It is possible to execute the second transition lottery so that the second transition result is obtained with a different second probability,
Second special transition means (function for executing RT state processing by main controller 101) for transitioning to the second special state based on the fact that the predetermined pattern combination for the second transition stops at the valid position. When,
In the second specific game state, a predetermined notification means ( A specific mode notification means (a function of executing a process for notifying the pressing order at the time of transition replay winning in the main controller 101) that can be executed by the auxiliary display unit 65 and the instruction monitor 68);
A game machine characterized by comprising:

According to the above configuration, when the start operation means is operated, the lottery means conducts a lottery and starts the orbiting of the orbiting body, and when the stop operation means is operated, the orbiting orbiting body stops and stops. In a so-called slot machine in which a privilege is given by a privilege giving means if the number corresponds to the lottery result, a first specific game state is provided in which a player is likely to be more advantageous than a normal game state. Since a more advantageous second specific game state is provided as a state included in the first specific game state, the normal game state is shifted to the first specific game state, and the second specific game state is aimed at. A game property premised on state transitions that are economically advantageous is realized, and it is possible to make great use in improving amusement.

Further, as game states, there are provided a first special state and a second special state corresponding to a so-called RT state, in which the probability of a payout result is common but the probability of a replay result may differ. Then, the first specific game state and the second specific game state are those that shift through the first transition lottery and the second transition lottery, and the first transition lottery to the first specific game state is the first special state and the second While it is performed with the same probability in the two special states, the second transition lottery is performed so that the transition rate to the second specific game state may differ between the first special state and the second special state. While the chance of shifting to the first specific game state advantageous to the player is given equally regardless of the type of RT state, the chance of shifting to the second specific game state differs depending on the type of RT state. , Diversification of games is being achieved.

Moreover, in the above configuration, it is possible to perform mode notification including a specific stop operation mode in which the transition to the second special state occurs in the second specific game state. Therefore, the transition to the second specific game state can be different from the first special state, and the transition to the second special state is caused in the second specific game state. In the configuration in which the transition to the second specific game state is more likely to occur in the state, when the second specific game state ends, the transition to the second special state is caused to create a so-called withdrawal zone, or When resetting the 2 specific game state, it is possible to cause a transition to the second special state, etc., and it is possible to make a great use of the realization of novel game characteristics.

It should be noted that each configuration shown in features A1 to A23 may be applied to feature A24. In this case, each configuration may be applied individually or in combination.

<Characteristic group B>
Feature B1. a plurality of revolving bodies (each reel 32L, 32M, 32R) on which a plurality of types of patterns are attached in the circumferential direction;
a display unit (display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) that makes it possible to visually recognize a part of the pattern for each of the surrounding bodies;
a starting operation means (start lever 41) for starting the circulation of each of the winding bodies when operated;
stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) for stopping the circulation of each of the circulation bodies when operated;
Drive control means (reel control by the main controller 101) for starting the circulation of each of the winding bodies when the starting operation means is operated, and stopping the circulation of each of the winding bodies when the stop operation means is operated function to perform processing) and
A lottery means (a function of executing a lottery process by the main control device 101) that performs a lottery as to whether or not to give a privilege to a player based on the operation of the starting operation means;
When the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result and the predetermined pattern combination corresponding to the predetermined result stops at an effective position set at a position where the pattern can be visually recognized through the display unit, Privilege granting means capable of granting a privilege corresponding to a predetermined result (function for executing payout determination processing by main controller 101);
with
As a lottery result by the lottery means, a replay result in which a replay that enables the next game to be executed without requiring a new game medium is given as the privilege by the privilege granting means, and a predetermined number of games are played by the privilege granting means. A gaming machine provided with at least a payout result in which the payout of game media is given as the privilege,
As game states, a normal game state (normal section) and a first specific game state (advantageous section) that is likely to be more advantageous to the player than the normal game state are provided,
As a state included in the first specific game state, a second specific game state (AT mode) that is more likely to be advantageous to the player than other states in the first specific game state is set,
In the normal game state, first transition lottery means for executing a first transition lottery for determining whether to transition to the first specific game state (function for executing an advantageous zone transition lottery by the main controller 101);
Based on the fact that the lottery result of the first transition lottery by the first transition lottery means is the first transition result (advantageous section winning) corresponding to shifting to the first specific game state, the first specific game A first specific transition means for transitioning to a state (a function of executing processing for transitioning to an advantageous section by the main controller 101);
Second transition lottery means (function of executing AT mode transition lottery by main controller 101) for executing a second transition lottery for whether or not to shift to the second specific game state;
Based on the fact that the lottery result of the second transition lottery by the second transition lottery means is the second transition result (AT mode winning) corresponding to shifting to the second specific game state, the second specific game a second specific transition means for transitioning to a state (function for executing processing for transitioning to AT mode by main controller 101);
with
When the result of the second transition lottery by the second transition lottery means is not the second transition result, the specific end means for ending the first specific game state (first process when AT not elected by main controller 101 ~ A function to execute the third process when AT is not elected);
A game machine characterized by comprising:

According to the above configuration, when the start operation means is operated, the lottery means conducts a lottery and starts the orbiting of the orbiting body, and when the stop operation means is operated, the orbiting orbiting body stops and stops. In a so-called slot machine in which a privilege is given by a privilege giving means if the number corresponds to the lottery result, a first specific game state is provided in which a player is likely to be more advantageous than a normal game state. Since a more advantageous second specific game state is provided as a state included in the first specific game state, the normal game state is shifted to the first specific game state, and the second specific game state is aimed at. A game property premised on the state transition that is advantageous to the game is realized, and it is possible to greatly contribute to the improvement of interest.

Moreover, in the above configuration, if the second transition lottery to the second specific game state is not won, the first specific game state ends, so the difference in the degree of advantage in the success or failure of the second transition lottery is extreme. As a result, a strong feeling of excitement is provided when the second transfer lottery is performed. By doing so, it is possible to favorably enhance the interest in the game property aiming at the second specific game state.

Feature B2. a first grasping means for grasping the number of remaining games in the first specific gaming state (a function of executing processing for managing the number of games remaining in the advantageous section ZG by the main control device 101);
First end means for ending the first specific game state based on the grasped result by the first grasping means (advantageous section based on the establishment of the normal end condition in the section display second process by the main control device 101 function to execute the process to terminate) and
second grasping means for grasping the number of executions of the first specific gaming state (function for executing processing for managing the number of games in the advantageous section AG by the main control device 101);
Second termination means for terminating the first specific game state regardless of the result grasped by the first grasping means based on the number of executions grasped by the second grasping means reaching a predetermined upper limit number. (a function of executing a forced termination process in the second section display process by the main controller 101);
The gaming machine according to feature B1, characterized by comprising:

In the above configuration, the first specific game state is terminated based on the remaining number grasped by the first grasping means, and the so-called forced termination condition that the number of executions grasped by the second grasping means reaches the upper limit number. may be terminated when is established. In such a configuration, for example, when an increase in game media can be expected by shifting to the second specific game state included in the first specific game state, the transition to the second specific game state has not occurred. If the situation of the first specific game state continues in spite of this, the possibility of ending the first specific game state due to the forced end condition increases. In that respect, as in feature B1, the first specific game state is terminated when the second transition lottery is not won in the first specific game state, so the number of games up to the upper limit is not the second specific game state. It is possible to suppress the phenomenon of being eroded by the state.

Feature B3. The first transition lottery means executes the first transition lottery based on a result of the lottery by the lottery means being a predetermined specific result,
Based on the result of the first transition lottery by the first transition lottery means being the first transition result, the second transition lottery means uses the specific result of the first transition result. , the gaming machine according to feature B1 or feature B2, wherein the second transfer lottery can be executed.

According to the above configuration, in the configuration that is a multi-stage lottery system such as the first transition lottery and the second transition lottery, the first stage transition lottery is performed based on the specific result of the lottery by the lottery means, The 2nd stage transition lottery will be implemented using the lottery result of the lottery method when winning the 1st stage transition lottery, and both transition lotteries will be conducted based on the lottery results of the same game lottery method. It can be done. In other words, for example, after winning the first transition lottery, if the second transition lottery is performed when the lottery result by the lottery means has some result, the game in which the first transition lottery was performed may be changed. A feeling of sluggishness can occur in the game up to the game in which the second transition lottery is performed, and the game is in the first specific game state until the second transition lottery is performed. It is not preferable in a configuration in which there is a situation in which the situation that is not in the specific game state should be shortened. In that respect, by allowing both transition lotteries to be performed using the lottery results of the same game as in the above configuration, the second transition lottery can be performed immediately after the transition to the first specific game state, which is noteworthy. It is possible to expect the effect of dramatically increasing the degree of attention by concentrating the both transition lotteries to be played, and shortening the game which is in the first specific game state and not in the second specific game state.

Feature B4. Based on the fact that the result of the first transition lottery by the first transition lottery means is the first transition result, the second transition lottery can be executed in the game in which the first transition lottery was performed. 2 Transition destination lottery means (function to execute AT mode transition lottery in advantageous section winning processing by main control device 101),
Said specific ending means is capable of executing a process for ending said first specific game state to be shifted after said second transfer lottery by said second transfer destination lottery means is not said second transfer result. The gaming machine according to any one of features B1 to B3, characterized by:

According to the above configuration, when the lottery result by the first transition lottery means becomes the first transition result, the second transition lottery can also be performed in the game. By doing so, in the configuration for ending the first specific game state when the second transition lottery is not won, the end processing is performed in advance (before the transition to the first specific game state). It is also possible, for example, when the first transition lottery is won, but the second transition lottery is not won, etc. In the case where the first specific game state is substantially terminated immediately, it is possible It is also possible to prevent the player from being overjoyed by, for example, performing a special effect.

It should be noted that the ``process for ending the first specific game state that transitions after that'' is, for example, ``the first specific game state that transitions after that is a configuration that can be executed over a specific number of games. , a process for setting the specific number of games".

Feature B5. The second transition lottery means includes a second transition lottery correspondence information group ( AT mode transition lottery table) is used to execute the second transition lottery,
Based on the fact that the result of the first transition lottery by the first transition lottery means is the first transition result, the second transition destination lottery means selects the lottery means in the game with the first transition result. Characteristic B4, characterized in that the second transition lottery can be executed in the game with the first transition result by using the lottery result information and the second transition lottery correspondence information group. game machine.

According to the above configuration, the second transition lottery means corresponds to the second transition lottery in which the relationship between the lottery result information corresponding to the lottery result of the lottery means and the second transition result information corresponding to the second transition result is determined. A second transition lottery is performed using a so-called lottery table such as an information group. The second transition lottery is performed by using the lottery result by the lottery means in the game with the 1 transition result and the lottery table when the second transition lottery is performed by the second transition lottery means. By doing so, the only difference between the second transition lottery means and the second destination lottery means is the lottery result in the game in which the second transition lottery is performed. That is, the second transition lottery means performs the second transition lottery using the lottery results of the lottery means in the game in the first specific game state, and the second destination lottery means is the game winning the first transition lottery. A second transfer lottery is performed using the lottery result of the lottery means in . Therefore, the configuration of the second destination lottery means is relatively simple, and the lottery method of the first transition lottery is changed when the transition to the second specific game state is caused by the second destination lottery means. It is possible to eliminate the room for unnecessary changes such as, etc., and ensure the transparency of the game.

Feature B6. The second transition lottery means, even if the second transition lottery by the second destination lottery means is not the second transition result, the second transition in the first specific game state to be shifted after that A lottery can be performed,
If the result of the second transition lottery in the first specific game state that transitions after that is the second transition result, the means (main control A gaming machine according to feature B5, characterized in that it has a function of executing a process of clearing an AT mode non-winning flag when the AT mode is won by the device 101).

According to the above configuration, even if the second transition lottery by the second transition destination lottery means is not won, if the second transition lottery in the first specific game state to be shifted after that is won, the first specific The game state does not end. In other words, the first specific game state ends when neither the second transition lottery by the second destination lottery means nor the second transition lottery by the second transition lottery means is won. By doing so, while exhibiting the effect of implementing the second transition destination lottery means before the transition to the first specific game state, a situation arises in which it is easy to win the second transition lottery after the transition to the first specific game state. In some cases (for example, when winning a rare role, etc.), it is possible to flexibly respond to changes in the situation, and a situation has arisen that makes it easy for players to win the second transition lottery. In spite of this, it is possible to avoid giving a feeling of disappearance due to invalidation or the like.

Feature B7. As a game state, a first special state (for example, a second RT state) and a second special state (for example, a second RT state) and a second special state (for example, a , fourth RT state) and are set,
The probability of obtaining the first transition result when the first transition lottery is performed by the first transition lottery means in the first special state, and the first transition lottery by the first transition lottery means in the second special state The probability that the first transition result will be obtained when the transition lottery is performed is common,
In the first special state, the probability that the result of the second transition lottery by the second destination lottery means is the second transition result, and the result of the second transition lottery by the second transition lottery means is the second 2 while the probabilities of transition outcomes are common,
In the second special state, the probability that the result of the second transition lottery by the second destination lottery means is the second transition result, and the result of the second transition lottery by the second transition lottery means is the second The gaming machine according to feature B5 or feature B6, wherein the probability of 2 transition results can be different.

According to the above configuration, for example, a so-called RT state is set such as a first special state and a second special state in which the probability of a payout result is common, but the probability of a replay result is different. is common in the first special state and the second special state, the winning probability of the second transition lottery by the second destination lottery means is common in the first special state and the second special state, The winning probability of the second transition lottery by the two-transition lottery means can differ between the first special state and the second special state. In a configuration in which a two-stage lottery system such as a first transition lottery means and a second transition lottery means is set, the winning probability of the first transition lottery means is made common in both special states, and the winning of the second transition lottery means is made. By making the probability different between the two special states, the chance to shift to the first specific game state is given equally, and the ease of shifting to the second specific game state can differ depending on the special state. In addition, the effect of achieving both equality and diversity in games can be expected. In that respect, as described above, the second transition lottery by the second destination lottery means can be performed before the transition to the first specific game state (winning game), so the winning by the second destination lottery means By setting the probability to be common between the first special state and the second special state, the second transition lottery is performed within the scope of making the winning probability of the first transition lottery common to both special states. It becomes possible to perform before the transition to the first specific game state.

Feature B8. The probability that the result of the second transition lottery by the second destination lottery means will be the second transition result, and the probability that the result of the second transition lottery by the second transition lottery means will be the second transition result. , can be different.

According to the above configuration, the winning probability of the second transition lottery performed before the transition to the first specific game state and the second transition lottery performed after the transition to the first specific game state are different, for example, the winning probability before the transition If it is made higher, the game result when winning the first transition lottery is prioritized over the game result after the transition to the first specific game state, and if the winning probability after transition is increased, the game result when winning the first transition lottery is obtained. It becomes the structure which gives priority to the game result after 1st specific game state transition rather than. By doing so, it greatly contributes to the creation of new playability using the difference in winning probability between the second transition lottery by the second destination lottery means and the second transition lottery by the second transition lottery means. becomes possible.

Feature B9. If the result of the second transition lottery is not the second transition result, end game number setting means for setting the number of games until the end of the first specific game state (sets an advantageous section end counter by the main controller 101) function to execute the processing to be performed) and
Updating means capable of updating the number of games set by the number-of-end-games setting means in each game in the first specific gaming state (subtraction processing of the advantageous interval end counter in the third processing when AT is not won by the main controller 101 function) and
with
The specific ending means terminates the first specific game state based on the number of games set by the number-of-end-games setting means becoming the number of games (0) corresponding to the end of the first specific game state. The game machine according to any one of features B1 to B8, characterized in that the game is terminated.

According to the above configuration, the first specific game state ends based on the number of games to be finished, which is set when the second transition lottery by the second transition lottery means is not won. Specifically, for example, if the number of games to end is set to 1 game, the first specific game state will end after 1 game, and if the number of games to finish is set to 2 games, the first specific game state will end in 2 games. end in the game. By doing so, the number of games until the end of the first specific game state can be made highly flexible in the structure in which the first specific game state is ended based on non-winning of the second transition lottery. becomes possible.

Feature B10. When the lottery result of the second transition lottery by the second transition lottery means is the second transition result in a situation where the number of games is set by the number-of-end-games setting means, the specific end means causes the second transition lottery. The gaming machine according to feature B9, further comprising means for limiting the termination of the 1 specific gaming state (function for executing processing for clearing the AT mode non-winning flag by the main control device 101).

According to the above configuration, even if the second transition lottery is not won once and the number of games until the end of the first specific game state is set by the end game number setting means, the second transition lottery is repeated. , the end of the first specific game state by the specific end means is restricted. By doing so, even if the second transition lottery is not won, the end of the first specific game state is not confirmed, and it is possible to re-challenge so as not to end the set end game number. This makes it possible to draw a high degree of interest in the number of finished games and the second transition lottery in re-challenge, thereby greatly improving the game playability.

Feature B11. As a game state, a first special state (for example, a second RT state) and a second special state (for example, a second RT state) and a second special state (for example, , fourth RT state) and are set,
The second transition lottery can be executed in each game until the first specific game state ends,
The number-of-end-games setting means determines whether the result of the second transition lottery executed in the first special state is not the second transition result or the second transition executed in the second special state. The game according to feature B9 or feature B10, characterized in that the number of games to be played until the first specific game state ends can be made different between when the result of the lottery is not the second transition result. machine.

According to the above configuration, in the configuration of ending the first specific game state when the second transition lottery is not won, the probability of the payout result is common, but the probability of the replay result is different. There are provided a first special state and a second special state, and the game until the end of the first specific game state when the second transition lottery is not won in the first special state and the second special state different numbers. And, since the second transition lottery can be executed in each game in the first specific game state, the substantial transition rate to the second specific game state in the first special state and the second special state is 2 The number of executions of the transition lottery, that is, the number of games until the end of the first specific game state is defined. In this way, it is possible to realize a novel game property such as making the rate of transition to the second specific game state different between the first special state and the second special state.

Feature B12. The first specific transition means can shift to the first specific game state in a game in which the result of the first transition lottery by the first transition lottery means is the first transition result,
Any of the characteristics B1 to B11, wherein the second transition lottery means can execute the second transition lottery in the game shifted to the first specific game state by the first specific transition means. 1. The gaming machine according to 1.

According to the above configuration, it is possible to shift to the first specific game state in the game in which the lottery for transition to the first specific game state is won, and to perform the second transition lottery in that game. By doing so, in the configuration in which the transition to the second specific game state is performed via the two-stage lottery system of the first transition lottery and the second transition lottery, the first transition lottery and the second transition lottery are performed in the same game. It is a configuration that can be implemented. Therefore, when the second transition lottery is not won in the game, even if the first specific game state is terminated by the specific end means, the first specific game state is terminated by the specific end means from the first transition lottery. The entire game is substantially completed in one game, and by consolidating the games that the player should pay attention to, the effect of providing a strong thrilling feeling is further enhanced. Secondly, there is a situation where it is desired to reduce the number of games that are in the first specific game state and not in the second specific game state (the number of games that are in the first specific game state and have not won the second transition lottery). , it is also possible to make the number of games the minimum number of games.

Feature B13. Features B1 to B12, characterized in that the specific end means is capable of ending the first specific game state in the game when the result of the second transition lottery is not the second transition result. The gaming machine according to any one of 1.

According to the above configuration, when the second transition lottery is not won, the first specific game state is terminated as it is without continuing the first specific game state. In this way, it becomes clearer that the minimum number of games can be the number of games that are in the first specific game state but not in the second specific game state.

Feature B14. The first specific transition means causes a transition to the first specific game state with a game next to the game in which the first transition lottery by the first transition lottery means is won as a starting game,
When the result of the second transition lottery executed in the game in which the first transition lottery was performed or the result of the second transition lottery executed in the start game is not the second transition result, the specific ending means The gaming machine according to any one of features B1 to B13, characterized in that the first specific gaming state can be ended in the starting game.

According to the above configuration, it is clarified that the transition to the first specific game state occurs even if the lottery for transition to the second specific game state is not won. By adopting such a configuration, compared with a configuration in which lottery processing is simply performed in multiple stages by internal processing of the game machine, the player wins the lottery for transition to the first specific game state. can be clearly grasped, and it is possible to preferably increase the degree of attention to each of the two transition lotteries.

Feature B15. A lottery result storage means for storing a lottery result by the lottery means of the game that triggered the first transition lottery when the result of the first transition lottery by the first transition lottery means is the first transition result. (Main control device 101 information temporary storage area 106f at the time of winning transition),
The second transition lottery means is capable of executing the second transition lottery using lottery result information stored by the lottery result storage means in the first specific game state. The game machine according to any one of B1 to B14.

According to the above configuration, the second transition lottery, which is the trigger for ending by the specific end means, is performed during the first specific game state, and the game result of the game in which the first transition lottery is won is used. It will be the one that was done. By doing so, while the transition to the first specific game state itself is reliably generated, the game result (so-called rare role) that becomes the lottery trigger must be allocated separately in the first transition lottery and the second transition lottery. After the transition to the first specific game state is avoided by avoiding the difficulty of being unlucky, the second transition lottery can be quickly executed.

Feature B16. A feature characterized by comprising a specific display means (role ratio monitor 77) capable of displaying the ratio of the number of games in a situation in which transition to the second specific game state is possible and a situation in which it is not. The game machine according to any one of B1 to B15.

Since the ratio of the number of games in which the transition to the second specific game state is possible and the situation in which it is not possible is displayed, the ratio of the increase in game media caused by the second specific game state can be grasped by the manager of the game hall. As a result, for example, it is possible to identify the act of illegally transferring to the second specific game state, or the second specific game state at a rate that exceeds the ratio intended by the designer. It will be possible to use it to ensure the safety and soundness of the aircraft.

In particular, as in the feature B1, the first specific game state is terminated when the second transition lottery is not won in the first specific game state, so the ratio displayed by the specific display means becomes a significantly smaller value. . By doing so, it is possible to avoid the event that the ratio is eroded by continuing the situation of the first specific game state even though the transition to the second specific game state has not occurred.

In addition, the above-mentioned configuration is configured such that "as the lottery result by the lottery means, a first result in which a prize is established when each of the stop operation means is operated in the first stop operation mode; and a second result in which a prize is established when operated in a second stop operation mode different from the first stop operation mode,
Based on the result of the lottery by the lottery means, a predetermined notification means (the first display on the instruction monitor 68) informs the mode notification (push order notification) regarding the operation mode including the first stop operation mode and the second stop operation mode. (segment N1 to seventh display segment N7) executable mode notification means (function to execute the pushing process by the main controller 101),
By adding a limitation such that the mode notification by the mode notification means is executed by enabling the transition to the second specific game state, the transition to the second specific game state is possible. The significance of calculating and displaying the ratio of the situation in which it is and the situation in which it is not is clarified. In other words, by making such a limitation, the display by the "specific display means" is configured to display the ratio of the situation in which the mode notification can be executed and the situation in which the mode notification can be executed. It is possible to easily confirm whether the ratio is far from the design value.

Regarding the "specific display means", "displacement means (the front door 12 ), and the position of the displacement means is switched between a state in which the position of the displacement means can be displaced and a state in which it cannot be displaced by a predetermined locking means. It is possible to have a configuration in which the manager of the game hall can confirm, but the player cannot confirm.

<Characteristic group C>
Feature C1. a plurality of revolving bodies (each reel 32L, 32M, 32R) on which a plurality of types of patterns are attached in the circumferential direction;
a display unit (display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) that makes it possible to visually recognize a part of the pattern for each of the surrounding bodies;
a starting operation means (start lever 41) for starting the circulation of each of the winding bodies when operated;
stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) for stopping the circulation of each of the circulation bodies when operated;
Drive control means (reel control by the main controller 101) for starting the circulation of each of the winding bodies when the starting operation means is operated, and stopping the circulation of each of the winding bodies when the stop operation means is operated function to perform processing) and
A lottery means (a function of executing a lottery process by the main control device 101) that performs a lottery as to whether or not to give a privilege to a player based on the operation of the starting operation means;
When the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result and the predetermined pattern combination corresponding to the predetermined result stops at an effective position set at a position where the pattern can be visually recognized through the display unit, Privilege granting means capable of granting a privilege corresponding to a predetermined result (function for executing payout determination processing by main controller 101);
with
As a lottery result by the lottery means, a replay result in which a replay that enables the next game to be executed without requiring a new game medium is given as the privilege by the privilege granting means, and a predetermined number of games are played by the privilege granting means. A gaming machine provided with at least a payout result in which the payout of game media is given as the privilege,
As game states, a normal game state (normal section) and a first specific game state (advantageous section) that is likely to be more advantageous to the player than the normal game state are provided,
As a state included in the first specific game state, a second specific game state (AT mode) that is more likely to be advantageous to the player than other states in the first specific game state is set,
In the normal game state, first transition lottery means for executing a first transition lottery for determining whether to transition to the first specific game state (function for executing an advantageous zone transition lottery by the main controller 101);
Based on the fact that the lottery result of the first transition lottery by the first transition lottery means is the first transition result (advantageous section winning) corresponding to shifting to the first specific game state, the first specific game First specific transition means for transitioning to the state (function for executing processing for transitioning to the advantageous section by the main controller 101);
Second transition lottery means for executing a second transition lottery for whether or not to transition to the second specific game state (function for executing an AT mode transition lottery by the main control device 101);
Based on the fact that the lottery result of the second transition lottery by the second transition lottery means is the second transition result (AT mode winning) corresponding to shifting to the second specific game state, the second specific game Second specific transition means for transitioning to the state (function for executing processing for transitioning to AT mode by main controller 101);
with
Further, as game states, a first special state (for example, a second RT state) and a second special state in which the probability that the lottery result by the lottery means is the payout result is common, but the probability that the replay result is the result may differ. (For example, the 4th RT state) is set,
The second transition lottery means executes the second transition lottery so that the second transition result is obtained with a first probability in the first special state, while the second transition lottery means is higher than the first probability in the second special state. It is possible to execute the second transition lottery so that the second transition result is obtained with a high second probability,
In the second specific game state, specific end means for ending the second specific game state based on the transition to the second special state (function of executing the process of step S1626 by the main controller 101) is provided A gaming machine characterized by:

According to the above configuration, when the start operation means is operated, the lottery means conducts a lottery and starts the orbiting of the orbiting body, and when the stop operation means is operated, the orbiting orbiting body stops and stops. In a so-called slot machine in which a privilege is given by a privilege giving means if the number corresponds to the lottery result, a first specific game state is provided in which a player is likely to be more advantageous than a normal game state. Since a more advantageous second specific game state is provided as a state included in the first specific game state, the normal game state is shifted to the first specific game state, and the second specific game state is aimed at. A game property premised on the state transition that is advantageous to the game is realized, and it is possible to greatly contribute to the improvement of interest.

Further, as game states, there are provided a first special state and a second special state corresponding to a so-called RT state, in which the probability of a payout result is common but the probability of a replay result may differ. Then, the first specific game state and the second specific game state are those that shift through the first transition lottery and the second transition lottery, and in particular, the second transition lottery is the second special state rather than the first special state. Since the lottery is performed so that the transition to the second specific game state is more likely to occur in the second specific game state, the chances of transition to the second specific game state differ depending on the type of RT state, thereby diversifying the game.

Moreover, in the above configuration, when the transition to the second special state occurs in the second specific game state, the second specific game state is terminated. Therefore, when the transition to the second special state that is easy to transition to the second specific game state occurs, once the second specific game state is terminated, for example, the so-called withdrawal zone of the second specific game state It is possible to make a great use of the realization of novel game properties, such as creating new game states and prompting resetting of the second specific game state.

Feature C2. Second special transition means (main controller 101) capable of transitioning to the second special state when the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined second special result (transition replays 1 and 2). function to execute RT state processing by
The specific end means is capable of ending the second specific game state when the lottery result by the lottery means in the second specific game state is the second special result. The gaming machine according to feature C1.

According to the above configuration, the transition to the second special state occurs based on the result of the lottery by the lottery means becoming the second special result, and the transition to the second special state occurs in the second specific game state. , It is clarified that it is not forced to occur due to settings on the gaming machine side (for example, the number of games, the number of medals, etc.), nor can it be triggered at any time by the player. In this way, the transition to the second special state, which is both happy and sad for the player, can be a pull-back zone to the second specific game state while ending the second specific game state. It is associated with the luck factor such as the lottery result, and the interest in the lottery result of each game is greatly increased.

Feature C3. The second special transition means shifts to the second special state when the lottery result by the lottery means is the second special result and the stop operation means is stopped in the first stop operation mode. , when the lottery result by the lottery means is the second special result and the stop operation means is operated in a second stop operation mode different from the first stop operation mode, the second special state is entered. The gaming machine according to feature C2, characterized in that no transition is made.

According to the above configuration, whether or not there is a transition to the second special state depends on luck, such as the result of the lottery in each game, and the operation mode of the stop operation means operated by the player. By doing so, the player who wants to cause the transition to the second special state will play the game aiming at the first stop operation mode when the second special result is won, and the second special state. A player who does not want to cause the transition to the second special result is encouraged to participate in the game and enjoy the game by aiming for the second stop operation mode when the second special result is won. improves.

Feature C4. When the lottery result by the lottery means is the second special result, a predetermined notification means ( The gaming machine according to feature C3, characterized in that it comprises mode notification executing means (a function of executing a pushing process by the main controller 101) that can be executed by the instruction monitor 68).

According to the above-described configuration, since the predetermined notification means performs the mode notification of the first stop operation mode that causes the transition to the second special state and the second stop operation mode that does not cause the transition, the operation is performed in accordance with the mode notification. By doing so, the transition to the second special state can be enabled or disabled. In this way, depending on the presence or absence of mode notification, it becomes possible for the game machine side to assist whether or not there is a shift to the second special state, and to realize the playability using the second special state as the withdrawal zone as designed. becomes possible.

Feature C5. A first state (for example, a third RT state) in which the lottery result by the lottery means can be the second special result, and a second state in which the lottery result by the lottery means does not become the second special result or is less likely than the first state. 2 states (for example, the second RT state) are set,
State transition means for transitioning from the second state to the first state based on the establishment of a predetermined condition in the second specific game state (to shift to the transition mode by the main controller 101 A gaming machine according to any one of features C2 to C4, characterized in that it has a function of executing the processing of .

According to the above configuration, the presence or absence of the transition to the second special state is likely to be influenced by luck, such as when the lottery result of each game is the second special result, the transition to the second special state may occur. In the configuration, the presence or absence of the winning of the second special result and the probability of winning, which triggers the transition to the second special state, are different between the first state and the second state, and when a predetermined condition is established, the second special result is won. It becomes the structure which the transition to the 1st state which is easy to carry out arises. With such a configuration, at the timing when the transition to the second special state should not be made, the second state is maintained (not shifted to the first state) so as not to win the second special result. It is possible to shift to the first state at the timing to shift to the 2 special state so that the second special result can be won, and the shift to the second special state occurs at unintended timing and the second specific game state. is avoided.

Feature C6. When transitioning to the second specific game state by the second specific transition means, a transition to the first special state can also occur,
A first special transition means (main control function to execute RT state processing and push-out processing by the device 101),
The gaming machine according to any one of features C1 to C5, wherein in the second special state, the lottery result by the lottery means can be the first special result.

According to the above configuration, when transitioning to the second special state during the second specific game state, in the configuration in which the second specific game state ends, in the second special state after the transition, to the first special state It is possible to win the first special outcome in which a transition can occur. On the premise that the second specific game state is played in the first special state, if the lottery for transition to the second specific game state is won in the second special state, the first special result will be won. Based on this, it is possible to quickly shift to the first special state. Therefore, in the second special state as a so-called pullback zone, even though the lottery for transition to the second specific game state has been won, it is difficult to shift to the first special state due to the intervention of another game state. Through this, it is possible to eliminate the inconvenience that the second specific game state is not started.

Feature C7. The gaming machine according to feature C6, characterized in that the second special state is terminated by shifting from the second special state to the first special state regardless of whether or not the second transition lottery is won. .

The above configuration is a configuration in which it is possible to return to the second specific game state by shifting to the first special state, and if the second transition lottery is not won, the transition to the second specific game state does not occur. This clarifies the point that the second special state is, of course, terminated instead of the above. In this way, by making the transition from the second special state to the first special state have not only merits but also demerits for the players, it is possible to increase interest in the winning of the first special result and the timing of winning. can be done.

Feature C8. A plurality of stages of set values are provided that are capable of causing changes in the rate of increase or decrease or manner of increase or decrease of the game medium, and setting means (main controller) for setting one set value among the set values of the plurality of stages. 101 function to execute the setting process of the winning probability),
When the first set value is set by the setting means and when the second set value different from the first set value is set, the result of the lottery by the lottery means is determined in the second special state. The gaming machine according to feature C6 or feature C7, wherein the probability of obtaining the first special result can be different.

According to the above configuration, the second specific game state ends by shifting to the second special state in the second specific game state, and in the configuration that it becomes easier to return to the second specific game state, during the second special state The probability that the player can directly return to the second specific game state with the first special result after winning the second shift lottery can vary depending on the set value. In other words, the higher the setting value of the winning probability of the first special result, the smoother the return to the second specific game state in the situation where the second shift lottery is won. In addition, from the point that the second special state can be terminated by becoming the first special result, the higher the winning probability of the first special result, the second special state that is easier to win the transition lottery to the second specific game state. Thus, by making the winning probability of the first special result different according to the setting value, it is possible to provide a difference in the playability and characteristics of the second special state according to the setting value.

Feature C9. The first special transition means shifts to the first special state when the lottery result by the lottery means is the first special result and the stop operation means is stopped in a third stop operation mode. , when the lottery result by the lottery means is the first special result and the stop operation means is operated in a fourth stop operation mode different from the third stop operation mode, the first special state is entered. It is a configuration that does not migrate,
When the second transfer lottery is won and the lottery result by the lottery means is the first special result, a stop operation including at least one of the third stop operation mode and the fourth stop operation mode. A first mode notification executing means (a function of executing a pushing process by the main controller 101) capable of executing a mode notification of the mode by a predetermined notification means (instruction monitor 68);
When the second shift lottery is won in a state different from the second special state, the mode notification by the first mode notification execution means is performed based on the fact that the lottery result by the lottery means becomes the first special result. Through, the transition to the second specific game state by the second specific transition means occurs,
In the second special state, based on the fact that the lottery result by the lottery means is a third special result (falling replays 1 to 3) different from the first special result, a third mode for terminating the second special state. The gaming machine according to any one of features C6 to C8, further comprising special state transition means (a function of executing RT state processing and pushing-in-place processing by the main control device 101).

According to the above configuration, the first special result can be won even in a state other than the second special result, and even if the lottery for transition to the second specific game state is won in a state different from the second special result, the Through the transition to the first special state based on the winning of the first special result, the transition to the second specific game state occurs. In this case, in order to increase the advantage of the second specific game state, for example, it is conceivable to increase the winning probability of the replay result in the first special state. , the mode of the stop operation, etc. happens to correspond to the transition to the first special state, and the second special state is not won in the lottery for transition to the second specific game state. It is not preferable in terms of game design if a shift to . From such a point of view, when the first special result is won, while avoiding the transition to the first special state as much as possible, and when the second transition lottery is won, the assist of the gaming machine side It is preferable to have a configuration in which transition to the first special state can be smoothly performed via (mode notification by the first mode notification executing means). Specifically, when the third stop operation mode in which the transition to the first special state occurs when the first special result is won is compared with the fourth stop operation mode in which the transition to the first special state does not occur, the fourth stop It is considered that the operation mode is more likely to be operated, and that the configuration in which the third stop operation mode is performed by the assistance of the game machine side is considered to be good.

While using the first special result having such a premise to return to the second specific game state in the second special state, if you try to use it as a trigger for ending the second special state, the second special result in the second special state The probability of shifting to the first special state in a situation in which the second transition lottery is not won, that is, the probability of ending the second special state tends to be relatively low, and the second special state tends to continue for a long time. In this regard, in the above configuration, in addition to the first special result in the second special state, the third special result is also set as a trigger for ending the second special state. It is possible to suppress the event that the special state tends to become long, and to prevent the advantage of the second special state from being excessively increased.

Feature C10. When transitioning to the second specific game state by the second specific transition means, a transition to the first special state can also occur,
Characteristic features C1 to C9, characterized in that the probability that the lottery result by the lottery means becomes the replay result is set to be higher in the first special state than in the second special state. 1. The gaming machine according to any one of the above.

According to the above configuration, in the configuration in which the second specific game state is played in the first special state, the probability of a replay result becomes lower when the second special state is entered. In other words, when the transition to the second special game state is likely to occur in the second specific game state and the second specific game state ends, basically, the probability that the replay result will be that lower than up to Then, by shifting to the second special state, it is easy to shift to the second specific game state again. game media may decrease. By doing so, in the second special state, not only the viewpoint of whether or not to win the second transition lottery, but also the timing (the number of games played) of winning the second transition lottery is made interested, and the game is played. of fun is added.

Feature C11. Remaining number grasping means for grasping the number of remaining games in the second specific game state (function for executing processing for grasping the number of games remaining in the advantageous section ZG by the main control device 101);
Based on the result of grasping by the remaining number grasping means, the second end means (advantageous section/ a function to execute processing for ending the AT mode);
The second special state is entered on the basis that the remaining number ascertained by the remaining number ascertaining means becomes a predetermined specific number before the end processing by the second terminating means. and a means capable of restricting the transition to the second special state before reaching the specific number (a function of executing a process of setting a transition notification flag by the main controller 101); ,
The gaming machine according to any one of features C1 to C10, characterized by comprising:

According to the above configuration, the remaining number of the second specific game state is grasped by the remaining number grasping means, and the second specific game state is terminated based on the grasping result, and the remaining number is the specific number. Before becoming, the transition to the second special state is restricted, and when a specific number is reached, the transition to the second special state is permitted. In this way, by adopting a configuration in which the transition to the second special state occurs at the end of the second specific game state, the second specific game state that has been shifted to the second special state ends immediately by the transition to the second special state. , while avoiding the occurrence of events such as , at the end of the game, it is possible to draw attention to points such as whether to move to the second special state and end, or whether to end with the remaining number. Through the diversification of games, the interest in games will be improved.

Feature C12. When the second specific game state is terminated by the second termination means, it is easier for the player than when the second specific game state is terminated by the specific termination means based on the transition to the second special state. The gaming machine according to feature C11, characterized by having a configuration that is likely to be disadvantageous.

According to the above configuration, in the configuration of the characteristic C10, when the second specific game state ends based on the grasp result by the remaining number grasping means, when the second specific game state ends based on the second special state transition It is disadvantageous for the player. By doing so, it is possible to bring about the advantage of ending the second specific game state by the specific ending means, and the effect of the feature C1 can be favorably expected.

Feature C13. When transitioning to the second specific game state by the second specific transition means, a transition to the first special state can also occur,
After the second specific game state is terminated by the second termination means, the first special state is established when a predetermined termination condition (second replay win, stop transition) is established in the first special state. is configured to transition to a state different from the second special state from
After the second specific game state is terminated by the second termination means and before the predetermined termination condition is established, predetermined transition conditions (11th regame winning prize, 12th replay winning prize ) is established, the gaming machine according to feature C11 or feature C12, characterized in that the state is shifted to the second special state.

According to the above configuration, as usual, even if the second specific game state is terminated by the second end means based on the remaining number of the second specific game state, the first special state shifts to another state. The transition to the second special state can occur before the transition to the second special state occurs. Therefore, in a configuration having different termination means such as the second termination means and the specific termination means, termination by the second termination means does not completely negate the transition to the second special state. remains.

Feature C14. The gaming machine according to any one of features C1 to C13, wherein when the second specific game state is ended by the specific end means, the first specific game state is also ended.

According to the above configuration, when the second specific game state is ended by the specific end means, the first specific game state is also ended together, so in the second special state, the first transition lottery is won, and the If the second transition lottery is not won, the second specific game state is not returned. By doing so, the soundness of the game can be ensured without increasing the advantage of the second specific game state or the second special state too much.

<Characteristic group D>
Feature D1. a plurality of revolving bodies (each reel 32L, 32M, 32R) on which a plurality of types of patterns are attached in the circumferential direction;
a display unit (display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) that makes it possible to visually recognize a part of the pattern for each of the surrounding bodies;
a starting operation means (start lever 41) for starting the circulation of each of the winding bodies when operated;
stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) for stopping the circulation of each of the circulation bodies when operated;
Drive control means (reel control by the main controller 101) for starting the circulation of each of the winding bodies when the starting operation means is operated, and stopping the circulation of each of the winding bodies when the stop operation means is operated function to perform processing) and
A lottery means (a function of executing a lottery process by the main control device 101) that performs a lottery as to whether or not to give a privilege to a player based on the operation of the starting operation means;
When the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result and the predetermined pattern combination corresponding to the predetermined result stops at an effective position set at a position where the pattern can be visually recognized through the display unit, Privilege granting means capable of granting a privilege corresponding to a predetermined result (function for executing payout determination processing by main controller 101);
with
As a lottery result by the lottery means, a replay result in which a replay that enables the next game to be executed without requiring a new game medium is given as the privilege by the privilege granting means, and a predetermined number of games are played by the privilege granting means. A gaming machine provided with at least a payout result in which the payout of game media is given as the privilege,
As game states, a normal game state (normal section) and a first specific game state (advantageous section) that is likely to be more advantageous to the player than the normal game state are provided,
As a state included in the first specific game state, a second specific game state (AT mode) that is more likely to be advantageous to the player than other states in the first specific game state is set,
In the normal game state, first transition lottery means for executing a first transition lottery for determining whether to transition to the first specific game state (function for executing an advantageous zone transition lottery by the main controller 101);
Based on the fact that the lottery result of the first transition lottery by the first transition lottery means is the first transition result (advantageous section winning) corresponding to shifting to the first specific game state, the first specific game First specific transition means for transitioning to the state (function for executing processing for transitioning to the advantageous section by the main controller 101);
Second transition lottery means for executing a second transition lottery for determining whether or not to transition to the second specific game state in the first specific game state (a function of executing an AT mode transition lottery by the main controller 101);
Based on the fact that the lottery result of the second transition lottery by the second transition lottery means is the second transition result (AT mode winning) corresponding to shifting to the second specific game state, the second specific game Second specific transition means for transitioning to the state (function for executing processing for transitioning to AT mode by main controller 101);
Based on the fact that the lottery result of the first transition lottery by the first transition lottery means is the first transition result, before shifting to the first specific game state, the second transition lottery can be executed. 2 transition destination lottery means (function for executing the AT mode transition lottery in the advantageous section winning processing by the main control device 101);
with
Said first specific transition means is characterized by shifting to said first specific game state even when the result of said second transition lottery by said second destination lottery means is not said second transition result. game machine.

According to the above configuration, when the start operation means is operated, the lottery means conducts a lottery and starts the orbiting of the orbiting body, and when the stop operation means is operated, the orbiting orbiting body stops and stops. In a so-called slot machine in which a privilege is given by a privilege giving means if the number corresponds to the lottery result, a first specific game state is provided in which a player is likely to be more advantageous than a normal game state. Since a more advantageous second specific game state is provided as a state included in the first specific game state, the normal game state is shifted to the first specific game state, and the second specific game state is aimed at. A game property premised on the state transition that is advantageous to the game is realized, and it is possible to greatly contribute to the improvement of interest.

Moreover, in the above configuration, after the transition to the first specific game state, in addition to the second transition lottery means capable of executing the second transition lottery to the second specific game state, the first transition to the first specific game state Based on the fact that the lottery is won, a second transition destination lottery means capable of executing a second transition lottery to the second specific game state before the transition to the first specific game state is provided, and the second transition destination lottery means is provided. 2. Transition to the first specific game state occurs even if the lottery is not won. By doing so, when the first transition lottery is won, the second transition lottery can be substantially performed a plurality of times, and many chances to shift to the second specific game state are given. However, by providing a plurality of chances, even if the winning probability of one chance (second shift lottery) is lowered, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to be disadvantaged. By providing a plurality of chances, the number of winning patterns in the second transition lottery increases, and the game can be greatly diversified.

Feature D2. The probability of the second transition result when the second transition lottery is performed by the second transition lottery means, and the second transition lottery when the second transition lottery is performed by the second destination lottery means. The gaming machine according to feature D1, characterized in that the probability of a transition result is different.

According to the above configuration, the winning probability is different between the second transition lottery performed after the transition to the first specific game state and the second transition lottery performed before the transition to the first specific game state, and which transition lottery will be received. Or, when the second transition lottery before the transition to the first specific game state and the second transition lottery after the transition are received in duplicate, and only the second transition lottery after the transition to the first specific game state is repeatedly received. Even if the number of executions of the second transition lottery is the same, the degree of advantage may differ greatly depending on the case. By doing so, it is possible to draw a great deal of attention to the timing of receiving the second transfer lottery. Therefore, it is possible to preferably increase the degree of attention to the game.

Feature D3. A plurality of stages of set values are provided that are capable of causing changes in the rate of increase or decrease or manner of increase or decrease of the game medium, and setting means (main controller) for setting one set value among the set values of the plurality of stages. 101 function to execute the setting process of the winning probability),
When the first setting value is set by the setting means and when the second setting value different from the first setting value is set, the second transition lottery by the second destination lottery means While the probability of the second transition result being the same for
When the first setting value is set by the setting means and when the second setting value is set, the second transition lottery by the second transition lottery means determines the result of the second transition. The gaming machine according to feature D1 or feature D2, characterized in that the probability of winning can be different.

In the above configuration, the difference in the increase/decrease rate and increase/decrease mode of the game medium is determined by the winning probability of the second transition lottery by the second transition lottery means, that is, the probability that the transition to the second specific game state occurs in the first specific game state. Although it is configured to be set, there is no setting difference in the winning probability of the second shift lottery by the second shift destination lottery means performed before the shift to the first specific game state. In a state that is already advantageous to the player, such as the first specific game state, the possibility that the player will end the game is low, and the game machine where the player newly starts the game is the same as before the transition to the first specific game state. There is a high possibility that it is in the normal game state. Then, if there is a setting difference in the winning probability of the second transition lottery by the second transition destination lottery means before the transition to the first specific game state, there is a difference in the degree of advantage in the normal game state, depending on the gaming machine on which the player is seated. It is difficult to ensure equality between players. In that respect, as in the above configuration, there is no set difference in the probability of winning the second transition lottery by the second destination lottery means, so while ensuring equality between players, the second specific game It is possible to diversify the playability using the state.

Feature D4. When the first setting value is set by the setting means and when the second setting value is set, the first transition lottery by the first transition lottery means determines the result of the first transition. The gaming machine according to feature D3, characterized by having a common probability of becoming.

According to the above configuration, there is no set difference in the advantage level in the normal game state with respect to the first transition lottery, and the significance of the fact that there is no set difference in the winning probability of the second transition lottery by the second destination lottery means is enhanced. .

Feature D5. When the result of the second transition lottery by the second destination lottery means is the second transition result, after the transition to the first specific game state, the second transition lottery by the second transition lottery means The gaming machine according to any one of features D1 to D4, wherein execution is restricted.

According to the above configuration, even though the second transition lottery by the second transition destination lottery means has been won, the second transition lottery is further performed after the transition to the first specific game state. be killed. By avoiding duplication of processing in this way, the significance of providing the second destination lottery means can be enhanced.

Feature D6. Based on a predetermined lottery opportunity (game lottery result), the second transition lottery by the second destination lottery means and the second transition lottery by the second transition lottery means are executed,
When the first lottery opportunity (transition opportunity role) occurs among the predetermined lottery opportunities, the second transition lottery by the second destination lottery means and the second transition lottery by the second transition lottery means are performed. While being executed, if a second lottery opportunity (non-trigger role) different from the first lottery opportunity (transition opportunity role) occurs among the predetermined lottery opportunities, the second transition lottery means is executed. A means capable of restricting the execution of the second transfer destination lottery means (a function of making the presence or absence of AT mode lottery different between the transition trigger role and the non-trigger role by the main controller 101) is provided. The gaming machine according to any one of features D1 to D5, characterized by:
game machine.

According to the above configuration, in the configuration in which the second transition lottery is performed by the second destination lottery means or the second transition lottery means at a predetermined lottery opportunity, the execution of the second destination lottery may be restricted. be. Thus, by restricting the irregular lottery such as the second shift lottery by the second destination lottery means performed before the shift to the first specific game state, unlimited execution of such lottery is eliminated. be able to.

In addition, as a specific configuration of the above configuration, "the second transfer destination lottery means executes the second transfer lottery using the lottery result by the lottery means,
The second transition lottery means executes the second transition lottery using a lottery result by the lottery means,
When the lottery result by the lottery means is the first result (transition opportunity role), the second transition lottery by the second destination lottery means and the second transition lottery by the second transition lottery means are executed. On the other hand, if the lottery result by the lottery means is a second result (non-trigger role) different from the first result, the second transition lottery means is executed, but the second destination lottery means is executed. execution is restricted”.

Feature D7. The first transition lottery is executed by the first transition lottery means based on the predetermined lottery opportunity,
When the first lottery opportunity (transition opportunity role) occurs among the predetermined lottery opportunities, the execution of the first transition lottery by the first transition lottery means is permitted, and the first lottery opportunity among the predetermined lottery opportunities is permitted. 2 When a lottery opportunity (non-trigger role) occurs, means capable of restricting the execution of the first transition lottery by the first transition lottery means The gaming machine according to feature D6, characterized by comprising a function of differentiating the presence or absence of an advantage zone transition lottery.
game machine.

According to the above configuration, when execution of the second transition lottery by the second destination lottery means is restricted, execution of the first transition lottery by the first transition lottery means is also restricted. In other words, when the execution of the first transition lottery is restricted before the transition to the first specific game state, the execution of the second transition lottery by the second destination lottery means performed before the transition to the first specific game state is also performed. will be restricted. By doing so, in a configuration that undergoes a two-step transition such as shifting from the first specific game state to the second specific game state, the second to the second specific game state before shifting to the first specific game state It is possible to match an irregular configuration such as performing a 2 transition lottery to a transition lottery to a first specific game state.

Feature D8. A plurality of stages of set values are provided that are capable of causing changes in the rate of increase or decrease or manner of increase or decrease of the game medium, and setting means (main controller) for setting one set value among the set values of the plurality of stages. 101 function to execute the setting process of the winning probability),
When the first setting value is set by the setting means and when the second setting value different from the first setting value is set, the second transition lottery by the second destination lottery means While the probability that the result is the second transition result is common,
Depending on whether the first setting value is set by the setting means or the second setting value is set, the result of the second transition lottery by the second transition lottery means is the second transition result. The gaming machine according to any one of features D1 to D7, wherein the probability of becoming .

In a configuration in which a transition from the normal game state to the first specific game state occurs, and further a transition from the first specific game state to the second specific game state occurs, the transition to the second specific game state is the goal of the game. If so, the first specific gaming state can be regarded as a so-called chance zone. By providing a set difference in the rate of transition to the second specific game state in such a chance zone, it is considered that the game will be diversified.

However, there is also the idea that, in gaming machines that can be installed in multiple gaming halls, the opportunity should be given equally regardless of which gaming machine the player chooses, and the chances are unequal at the stage of the player's selection. There is also the idea that setting differences such as

In that regard, if the first specific gaming state is regarded as a chance zone as described above, the player is less likely to end the game in that chance zone. The state in which the player starts playing is likely to be the normal game state. In other words, in a configuration that undergoes two-stage state transitions like this game machine, it is considered that the transition rate in the normal game state should eliminate the set difference in the transitions.

Therefore, as in the above configuration, there is no setting difference of the second transition lottery by the second transition destination lottery means executed before the transition to the first specific game state, and the second transition lottery means executed after the transition to the first specific game state By allowing the setting difference of the second transition lottery to be possible, it is possible to diversify the game at the transition rate to the second specific game state while eliminating the setting difference in the normal game state.

In the above configuration, "the first transition lottery by the first transition lottery means is determined depending on whether the first set value is set by the setting means or when the second set value is set." By adding a configuration such that the probability that the result is the first transition result is common, the equality of the game in the normal game state is further ensured.

Feature D9. As a game state, a first special state (for example, a second RT state) and a second special state (for example, a second RT state) and a second special state (for example, , fourth RT state) and are set,
Execution of the second transition lottery by the second destination lottery means is restricted in the first special state, while execution of the second transition lottery by the second destination lottery means in the second special state. The gaming machine according to any one of features D1 to D8, wherein

According to the above configuration, the winning probability of the second transition lottery is achieved by utilizing the so-called RT state such as the first special state and the second special state in which the probability of the payout result is common but the probability of the replay result is different. can be different. That is, in the first special state, execution of the second transition lottery by the second destination lottery means is restricted, and in the second special state, execution of the second transition lottery by the second destination lottery means is permitted. , the case of winning the first transition lottery in the second special state is better than the case of winning the first transition lottery in the first special state, including the second transition lottery by the second transition lottery means after that, The possibility of winning the second transfer lottery increases. Therefore, it is easy to change the winning probability of the second transition lottery depending on the state only by combining the existing RT state configuration such as the first special state and the second special state with the feature D1 such as the second transition destination lottery means. becomes feasible.

<Characteristic group E>
Feature E1. a plurality of revolving bodies (each reel 32L, 32M, 32R) on which a plurality of types of patterns are attached in the circumferential direction;
a display unit (display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) that makes it possible to visually recognize a part of the pattern for each of the surrounding bodies;
a starting operation means (start lever 41) for starting the circulation of each of the winding bodies when operated;
stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) for stopping the circulation of each of the circulation bodies when operated;
Drive control means (reel control by the main controller 101) for starting the circulation of each of the winding bodies when the starting operation means is operated, and stopping the circulation of each of the winding bodies when the stop operation means is operated function to perform processing) and
A lottery means (a function of executing a lottery process by the main control device 101) that performs a lottery as to whether or not to give a privilege to a player based on the operation of the starting operation means;
When the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result and the predetermined pattern combination corresponding to the predetermined result stops at an effective position set at a position where the pattern can be visually recognized through the display unit, Privilege granting means capable of granting a privilege corresponding to a predetermined result (function for executing payout determination processing by main controller 101);
with
As a lottery result by the lottery means, a replay result in which a replay that enables the next game to be executed without requiring a new game medium is given as the privilege by the privilege granting means, and a predetermined number of games are played by the privilege granting means. A gaming machine provided with at least a payout result in which the payout of game media is given as the privilege,
As game states, a normal game state (normal section) and a first specific game state (advantageous section) that is likely to be more advantageous to the player than the normal game state are provided,
As a state included in the first specific game state, a second specific game state (AT mode) that is more likely to be advantageous to the player than other states in the first specific game state is set,
In the normal game state, first transition lottery means for executing a first transition lottery for determining whether to transition to the first specific game state (function for executing an advantageous zone transition lottery by the main controller 101);
Based on the fact that the lottery result of the first transition lottery by the first transition lottery means is the first transition result (advantageous section winning) corresponding to shifting to the first specific game state, the first specific game First specific transition means for transitioning to the state (function for executing processing for transitioning to the advantageous section by the main controller 101);
Based on the fact that the lottery result of the first transition lottery by the first transition lottery means is the first transition result, specific information corresponding to the game result of the game that triggered the first transition lottery is stored. Specific information storage means (transition winning time information temporary storage area 106f by main control device 101);
In the first specific game state, second transition lottery means (AT mode transition lottery by main controller 101) for executing a second transition lottery to determine whether to transition to the second specific game state based on the specific information function) and
Based on the fact that the lottery result of the second transition lottery by the second transition lottery means is the second transition result (AT mode winning) corresponding to shifting to the second specific game state, the second specific game Second specific transition means for transitioning to the state (function for executing processing for transitioning to AT mode by main controller 101);
A game machine characterized by comprising:

According to the above configuration, when the start operation means is operated, the lottery means conducts a lottery and starts the orbiting of the orbiting body, and when the stop operation means is operated, the orbiting orbiting body stops and stops. In a so-called slot machine in which a privilege is given by a privilege giving means if the number corresponds to the lottery result, a first specific game state is provided in which a player is likely to be more advantageous than a normal game state. Since a more advantageous second specific game state is provided as a state included in the first specific game state, the normal game state is shifted to the first specific game state, and the second specific game state is aimed at. A game property premised on the state transition that is advantageous to the game is realized, and it is possible to greatly contribute to the improvement of interest.

Moreover, in the above configuration, when the first transition lottery to the first specific game state is won, the specific information corresponding to the game result of the game that triggered the first transition lottery is stored, and the first specific game state is stored. In the state, a second transition lottery to the second specific game state based on the specific information may be executed. By doing so, in the configuration in which the game state shifts through a plurality of stages of lottery from the first specific game state to the second specific game state, for example, a so-called rare combination is won and the transition to the first specific game state is performed. To eliminate the absurdity of not being blessed with a lottery result by a subsequent lottery means (not winning a rare role) and not being able to shift to a second specific game state despite having won a lottery. becomes possible.

Feature E2. Means capable of erasing the specific information based on the fact that the second transfer lottery based on the specific information by the specific information storage means (transition winning time information temporary storage area 106f by main controller 101) The gaming machine according to feature E1, characterized in that it has a function of executing the erasing process of (1).

According to the above configuration, if the second shift lottery based on the specific information is performed, the specific information is erased, so the specific information is stored forever and can affect the subsequent game performance. Unlike , the number of times the specific information is used is limited. Therefore, it is possible to take over the information at the time of winning the first transfer lottery without increasing the advantage too much.

Feature E3. The specific information stored by the specific information storage means can be stored and held over a plurality of games or a plurality of execution times of the second transition lottery,
Characteristic feature E1, characterized in that, when the specific information is stored in the specific information storage means, the number of games or the number of times the specific information is stored and held is set based on the lottery result of the game. game machine.

According to the above configuration, the number of times the second transition lottery is executed using the specific information is set according to the lottery result by the lottery means when the first transition lottery wins. By doing so, it is possible to set the likelihood of winning the second transition lottery according to the result of the game when the first transition lottery wins.

Feature E4. In the first specific game state, based on the lottery result by the lottery means, the second transition normal lottery means for executing the second transition lottery whether to transition to the second specific game state (by the main controller 101 Equipped with a function to execute an AT mode transition lottery based on the result of the game),
The second specific transition means transitions to the second specific gaming state based on the fact that the lottery result of the second transition lottery by the second transition normal lottery means is the second transition result (AT mode winning). It is a configuration that allows
When the specific information is stored in the specific information storage means, the second transfer lottery is executed by the second transfer lottery means, and when the specific information is not stored in the specific information storage means. , means for executing the second shift lottery by the second shift normal lottery means (function for executing the processes of steps S5613, S5713, and S5813 by the main controller 101). A gaming machine according to any one of features E1 to E3.

According to the above configuration, if the specific information is stored, the second transfer lottery is performed using the specified information, and if the specific information is not stored, the second transfer lottery using the lottery results of the game is performed. done. By doing so, while ensuring the advantage of performing the second transition lottery based on the specific information, the inconvenience of not performing the second transition lottery when the specific information is not stored does not occur. can be made

Feature E5. The second transition lottery means utilizes the specific information stored in the specific information storage means and the lottery result of the lottery means in the game in which the second transition lottery is executed to perform the second transition lottery. The gaming machine according to any one of features E1 to E4, characterized in that it is possible to execute a transfer lottery.

According to the above configuration, as in the case of winning the so-called rare role in the game in which the second transition lottery is executed, the superiority in the case of winning the rare role even after the transition to the first specific game state is ensured. Therefore, it is possible to provide a game property that compensates for the fact that even if a rare combination is not won after the transition as in the feature E1, the player does not feel that the game is a loss.

Feature E6. In the second transition lottery by the second transition lottery means, the lottery result by the lottery means in the game in which the second transition lottery is executed is higher than the specific information stored in the specific information storage means. The gaming machine according to feature E5, characterized by having a high degree of influence on obtaining the second transition result.

According to the above configuration, as in feature E1, the game result in the game in which the second transition lottery is performed is better than the configuration in which the game result at the time of winning the first transition lottery is taken over to the second transition lottery. Since the degree of influence of the second transition lottery is high, the result of the game in which the second transition lottery is performed is rare while maintaining the general premise of the game that the second transition lottery is performed based on the result of the game. It is possible to realize an unexpected game property such that the second transfer lottery may be won depending on the result of the game at the time of the first transfer lottery even if it is not a winning combination.

In addition, as a specific configuration of the above configuration, "when the result of the first transition lottery is the first transition result and the lottery result by the lottery means is a specific result, the specific result of the specific result When the second transition lottery is performed based on the information and the predetermined result when the lottery result by the lottery means when the second transition lottery is performed is a predetermined result including the specific result, the second transition lottery is performed. The probability of a 2-transition result is the first probability,
When the result of the first transition lottery is the first transition result and the lottery result by the lottery means is the predetermined result, the second transition lottery is performed with the specific information about the predetermined result. the probability of obtaining the second transition result is higher than the first probability when the second transition lottery is performed based on the specific result when the lottery result by the lottery means is the specific result in the case where the 2 probabilities” can be considered.

Feature E7. When the result of the first transition lottery is the first transition result and the lottery result by the lottery means is the specific result, the specific information about the specific result and the second transition lottery are performed. When the lottery result by the lottery means is the specific result, the probability of the second transition result when the second transition lottery is performed based on the specific result,
When the result of the first transition lottery is the first transition result and the lottery result by the lottery means is the specific result, the specific information about the specific result and the second transition lottery are performed. In the case where the lottery result by the lottery means is a different result from the specific result, the probability of obtaining the second transition result is higher when the second transition lottery is performed based on the other result. The game machine according to feature E5 or feature E6, characterized in that it tends to be low.

According to the above configuration, the second transition lottery is more likely to be won if the second transition lottery execution game draws the same lottery result as the lottery result in the game in which the first transition lottery is won, rather than a different result. easy. By doing so, the game becomes easy to understand, and if the first transition lottery winning is not a rare role but a result that appears frequently in normal times, it is based on the result that it is difficult to win the first transition lottery. In the case of winning the lottery, it is not necessary to draw a rare role in the second shift lottery, and the superiority of winning the first shift lottery as a result of many appearances in the normal time as described above can be secured.

Feature E8. When the result of the first transition lottery is the first transition result and the lottery result by the lottery means is the first specified result, the specific information about the first specified result and the second transition lottery When the second transition lottery is performed based on the second specified result when the lottery result by the lottery means is a second specified result different from the first specified result when the second the probability of a transition outcome and
When the lottery result by the lottery means is the second specified result when the result of the first transition lottery is the first transition result, the specific information about the second specified result, and the second transition. a probability of obtaining the second transition result when the second transition lottery is conducted based on the first identification result when the lottery result by the lottery means when the lottery is performed is the first identification result; , can be different.

According to the above configuration, in the configuration in which the second transition lottery is executed by combining the lottery result of the first transition lottery execution game and the lottery result of the second transition lottery execution game, the order is also taken into account. By doing so, it is possible to realize a game property in which the weighting in the game of the first transition lottery and the second transition lottery is taken into account. Specifically, in the case of a game in which the first transition lottery is frequently won, but the second transition lottery is rarely won, the lottery result in the second transition lottery execution game should be given priority. On the contrary, the lottery result in the first shift lottery execution game should be given priority, and even if the combination of the lottery results is the same, the winning probability depends on which lottery execution game result is prioritized. should be different.

Feature E9. In the first specific game state, based on the lottery result by the lottery means, the second transition normal lottery means for executing the second transition lottery whether to transition to the second specific game state (by the main controller 101 Equipped with a function to execute an AT mode transition lottery based on the result of the game),
The second specific transition means transitions to the second specific gaming state based on the fact that the lottery result of the second transition lottery by the second transition normal lottery means is the second transition result (AT mode winning). It is a configuration that allows
Means (main controller) for executing the second transition lottery by the second transition normal lottery means when the lottery result of the second transition lottery by the second transition lottery means is not the second transition result The gaming machine according to any one of features E1 to E8, characterized by comprising a function of executing the processing of steps S5813 to S5819 according to 101).

According to the above configuration, when the second transition lottery based on the specific information is not won, the second transition lottery is performed by the second transition normal lottery means based on the lottery result of the lottery means in the game. By doing so, while maintaining the superiority in the case where the specific information is stored, the complexity of the configuration when trying to reflect the lottery results of a plurality of games in one second shift lottery can be avoided. It is possible to cancel.

Feature E10. As a game state, a first special state (for example, a second RT state) and a second special state (for example, a second RT state) and a second special state (for example, a , fourth RT state) and are set,
Storing of the specific information by the specific information storage means is restricted in the first special state, while storage of the specific information by the specific information storage means is permitted in the second special state. The gaming machine according to any one of features E1 to E9.

According to the above configuration, the so-called RT state such as the first special state and the second special state in which the probability of the payout result is common but the probability of the replay result is different is utilized to make the second transition based on the specific information. Whether or not the lottery is executed can be varied. That is, since the specific information is not stored in the first special state, the second transition lottery will be performed based on the game result after the transition to the first specific game state, and the specific information is stored in the second special state. A second shift lottery is performed based on the game result when the first specific game state is won. Based on the premise that the game result at the time of winning the first specific game state will be a rare combination, it is considered that the latter will make it easier to win the second shift lottery. Therefore, simply by combining the configuration of the existing RT states such as the first special state and the second special state with the characteristic E1 such as the specific information storage means, it is possible to easily realize different winning probabilities of the second transition lottery depending on the state. It becomes possible.

It is also possible to individually apply the technical ideas shown in each configuration of the other feature group A to feature group E to each configuration of feature group A to feature group E detailed above. However, it is also possible to combine and apply each technical idea. When combining and applying each technical idea, it is also possible to combine across a group of features.

The basic configuration of a game machine to which each feature described above can be applied is shown below.

Pachinko machine: an operation means operated by a player, a game ball shooting means for shooting game balls based on the operation of the operation means, a ball passage for guiding the shot game balls to a predetermined game area, and a game This game machine is provided with game parts arranged in an area, and gives a privilege to a player when a game ball passes through a predetermined passing part of the game parts.

Spindle-type gaming machine such as slot machine: Equipped with variable display means for finally stopping and displaying a symbol row consisting of a plurality of symbols after the symbol row is variably displayed, and the symbol variation starts due to the operation of the starting operation means A special game that is advantageous to the player under the condition that the fluctuation of the symbols is stopped due to the operation of the operation means for stopping or after the lapse of a predetermined time, and that the final stopped symbol at the time of stopping is a specific symbol. A gaming machine designed to generate a state (bonus game, etc.).

Ball-use belt-type game machine: Equipped with a variable display means for displaying a symbol row consisting of a plurality of symbols and then finally stopping the symbol row; A special game state (bonus game, etc.), and further comprising: a throwing device for performing throwing processing for taking in game balls from the ball tray provided with a ball tray; and a payout device for putting out game balls to the ball tray. A gaming machine constructed so that the operation of the starting operating means is enabled when a game ball is thrown in.

DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 10... Slot machine as a game machine, 32... Reel as a revolving body, 41... Start lever as a start operation means, 42-44... Stop switch as a stop operation means, 64... Speaker constituting an auxiliary effect part, 65 ... Auxiliary display section constituting an auxiliary effect section, 68 ... Instruction monitor, N8 ... Eighth display segment as a section display device, 81 ... Display control device as a sub control board, 101 ... Main control device as a main control board , 102 .

Claims (1)

a plurality of circular bodies to which a plurality of types of patterns are attached in a circumferential direction;
a display unit that allows visual recognition of a part of the pattern for each of the circular bodies;
a starting operation means for starting the circulation of each of the circulation bodies when operated;
stop operation means for stopping the circulation of each of the circulation bodies when operated;
drive control means for starting the circulation of each of the circulation bodies when the start operation means is operated, and stopping the circulation of the circulation bodies when the stop operation means is operated;
Lottery means for performing a lottery as to whether or not to grant a privilege to a player based on the operation of the starting operation means;
When the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result and the predetermined pattern combination corresponding to the predetermined result stops at an effective position set at a position where the pattern can be visually recognized through the display unit, privilege granting means capable of granting a privilege corresponding to a predetermined result;
with
As a lottery result by the lottery means, a replay result in which a replay that enables the next game to be executed without requiring a new game medium is given as the privilege by the privilege granting means, and a predetermined number of games are played by the privilege granting means. A gaming machine provided with at least a payout result in which the payout of game media is given as the privilege,
As game states, a normal game state and a first specific game state which is likely to be more advantageous to the player than the normal game state are provided,
As a state included in the first specific game state, a second specific game state that is more likely to be advantageous to the player than other states in the first specific game state is set,
A first transition lottery means for executing a first transition lottery for determining whether or not to transition to the first specific game state in the normal game state;
Based on the fact that the lottery result of the first transition lottery by the first transition lottery means is the first transition result corresponding to the transition to the first specific game state, the second to shift to the first specific game state 1 specific transition means;
A second transition lottery means for executing a second transition lottery for determining whether to transition to the second specific game state;
Based on the fact that the lottery result of the second transition lottery by the second transition lottery means is the second transition result corresponding to the transition to the second specific game state, the second transition to the second specific game state 2 specific transition means;
with
When the result of the second transition lottery by the second transition lottery means is not the second transition result, a specific end means for terminating the first specific game state;
A game machine characterized by comprising:

Images